Contents

Hyundai Ioniq Base 2018 Electric Car Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 541
1 of 541

Summary of Content for Hyundai Ioniq Base 2018 Electric Car Owner's Manual PDF

OWNER'S MANUAL Operation Maintenance Specifications

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of pub- lication. However, HYUNDAI reserves the right to make changes at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to all HYUNDAI models and includes descrip- tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

F2

Your HYUNDAI should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the per- formance, safety or durability of your HYUNDAI and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limit- ed warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifi- cations may also be in violation of regulations estab- lished by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal or state agencies.

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injec- tion and other electronic components. It is possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturers instructions or consult your HYUNDAI dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

This manual includes information titled as DAN- GER, WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE. These titles indicate the following:

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

DANGER

WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

CAUTION

NOTICE indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in vehicle damage.

NOTICE

WARNING

F3

Your Hyundai vehicle may be equipped with technologies and services that use information collected, generated, recorded or stored by the vehicle. Hyundai has created a Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy to explain how these technologies and services collect use and share this information.

You may read our Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy on the Hyundaiusa.com website at: https://www.hyundaiusa.com/owner-privacy-policy.aspx If you would like to receive a hard copy of our Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy, please contact our Customer Connect Center at:

Hyundai Customer Care P.O. Box 20850 Fountain Valley, CA 92728 800-633-5151 consumeraffairs@hmausa.com

Hyundai's Customer Connect Center representatives are available Monday through Friday, between the hours of 5:00 AM and 7:00 PM PST and Saturday and Sunday between 6:30 AM and 3:00 PM PST (English). For Customer Connect Center assistance in Spanish or Korean, representatives are available Monday through Friday between 6:30 AM and 3:00 PM PST.

HYUNDAI VEHICLE OWNER PRIVACY POLICY

F4

INTRODUCTION

Congratulations, and thank you for choosing HYUNDAI. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of dis- tinguished people who drive HYUNDAIS. We are very proud of the advanced engineering and high-quality construc- tion of each HYUNDAI we build. Your Owners Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new HYUNDAI. To become familiar with your new HYUNDAI, so that you can fully enjoy it, read this Owners Manual carefully before driving your new vehicle. This manual contains important safety information and instructions intended to familiarize you with your vehicles con- trols and safety features so you can safely operate your vehicle. This manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance safe operation of the vehicle. It is recom- mended that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. HYUNDAI deal- ers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required. This Owners Manual should be considered a permanent part of your vehicle, and should be kept in the vehicle so you can refer to it at any time. The manual should stay with the vehicle if you sell it to provide the next owner with impor- tant operating, safety and maintenance information.

HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA

Copyright 2018 HYUNDAI Motor America. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of HYUNDAI Motor America.

Severe vehicle damage may result from the use of poor quality lubricants that do not meet HYUNDAI spec- ifications.You must always use high quality lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 8-6 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.

CAUTION

F5

1. What are HYUNDAI Genuine Parts? HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are the same parts used by HYUNDAI Motor Company to manufacture vehicles. They are designed and tested for the optimum safety, per- formance, and reliability for our customers.

2. Why should you use genuine parts? HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are engineered and built to meet rigid manufacturing requirements. Damage caused by using imita- tion, counterfeit or used salvage parts is not covered under the HYUNDAI New Vehicle Limited Warranty or any other HYUNDAI warranty. In addition, any damage to or fail- ure of HYUNDAI Genuine Parts caused by the installation or fail- ure of an imitation, counterfeit or used salvage part is not covered by any HYUNDAI Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are pur- chasing HYUNDAI Genuine Parts? Look for the HYUNDAI Genuine Parts Logo on the package (see below). HYUNDAI Genuine Parts export- ed to the U.S. are packaged with labels written only in English. HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are only sold through authorized HYUNDAI Dealerships.

GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS

F6

Introduction

We want to help you get the greatest possible driving pleasure from your vehicle. Your Owner's Manual can assist you in many ways. To gain an overview of the contents of your Owner's Manual, use the Table of Contents in the front of the manual. The first page of each Chapter includes a detailed Table of Contents of the topics in that Chapter. To quickly locate information about your vehicle, use the Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabet- ical list of what is in this manual and the page number where it can be found. For your convenience, we have incorporated tabs on the right-hand page edges. These tabs are coded with the Chapter titles to assist you with navigating through the manual.

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. This Owner's Manual provides you with many safe- ty precautions and operating proce- dures. This information alerts you to potential hazards that may hurt you or others, as well as damage to your vehicle. Safety messages found on vehicle labels and in this manual describe these hazards and what to do to avoid or reduce the risks. Warnings and instructions contained in this manual are for your safety. Failure to follow safety warnings and instructions can lead to serious injury or death.

Throughout this manual DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE and the SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL will be used.

This is the safety alert sym- bol. It is used to alert you to potential physical injury haz- ards. Obey all safety mes- sages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death. The safety alert sym- bol precedes the signal words DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

DANGER

WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

WARNING

SAFETY MESSAGES

F7

Introduction

NOTICE indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in vehicle damage.

This vehicle should not be modi- fied. Modification of your vehicle could affect its performance, safety or durability and may even violate governmental safety and emis- sions regulations. In addition, damage or perform- ance problems resulting from any modification may not be covered under warranty.

If you use unauthorized electronic devices, it may cause the vehicle to operate abnormally, wire damage, battery discharge and fire. For your safety, do not use unauthorized electronic devices.

NOTICE

CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moder- ate injury.

CAUTION

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

Items contained in motor vehi- cles or emitted from them are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or reproductive harm. These include: Gasoline and its vapors Engine exhaust Used engine oil Interior passenger compart-

ment components and materi- als

Component parts which are subject to heat and wear

In addition, battery posts, termi- nals and related accessories contain lead, lead compounds and other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.

WARNING

F8

Introduction

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety sys- tems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: How various systems in your

vehicle were operating; Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts were buckled/ fastened;

How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

How fast the vehicle was travel- ing.

These data can help provide a bet- ter understanding of the circum- stances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of per- sonally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investiga- tion. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

I

Your vehicle at a glance

Safety system of your vehicle

Convenient features of your vehicle

Multimedia System

Driving your vehicle

What to do in an emergency

Maintenance

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Index

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Your vehicle at a glance

1

Your vehicle at a glance

Exterior Overview..................................................1-2 Interior Overview ...................................................1-4 Instrument Panel Overview ..................................1-5 Motor Compartment ..............................................1-6

1-2

EXTERIOR OVERVIEW

Your vehicle at a glance

1. Hood......................................................3-46

2. Windows ................................................3-38

3. Sunroof..................................................3-42

4. Wiper blade ..........................................7-20

5. Tires and wheels ..................................7-26

6. Headlamp ..............................................7-56

7. Outer side view mirror ..........................3-34

8. Daytime running light (DRL) ........3-94, 7-60

OAEE016001N

Front view

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1-3

Your vehicle at a glance

1

1. Door lock ................................................3-9

2. Charging door ......................................3-50

3. Antenna ..................................................4-2

4. Rear combination lamp ........................7-61

5. High mounted stop lamp ......................7-62

6. Rearview camera ................................3-105

7. Liftgate ..................................................3-48

8. Towing hook ..........................................6-22

OAEE016005N

Rear view

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1-4

Your vehicle at a glance

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

1. Door lock/unlock button ........................3-10

2. Driver position memory system ............3-14

3. Side view mirror folding switch ..............3-36

4. Side view mirror control switch ..............3-35

5. Central door lock switch ........................3-11

6. Power window switches ........................3-38

7. Power window lock switch......................3-41

8. Instrument panel illumination control switch ....................................................3-52

9. Blind spot detection(BSD) system ........5-38

10. Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ..5-59

11. ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFF button ..........................................5-29

12. Charging door open button ..................3-50

13. AUTO/LOCK mode selection button....H-15

14. Scheduled charging deactivation button ..................................................H-16

15. Fuse panel ..........................................7-43

16. Steering wheel ....................................3-16

17. Steering wheel tilt/telescope lever ......3-16

18. Seat........................................................2-4

19. Hood release lever ..............................3-46

OAEE017003N

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1-5

Your vehicle at a glance

1 1. Steering wheel audio controls/

Bluetooth wireless technology hands-free controls ..............................4-4

2. Instrument cluster ..............................3-51 3. Horn ....................................................3-17 4. Drivers front air bag ..........................2-49 5. Cruise controls/ ..................................5-67

Advanced smart cruise controls ........5-72 6. POWER button ....................................5-5 7. Light control/Turn signals....................3-94 8. Wiper/Washer ..................................3-103 9. Reduction gear (shift button) ..............5-10 10. Hazard warning flasher button ..............6-2 11. Climate control system ..................3-107 12. Seat warmer ....................................2-20 13. Drive mode integrated control

system ..............................................5-36 14. Auto hold ..........................................5-23 15. EPB (Electronic Parking brake) ........5-18 16. Wireless cellular phone charging

system ............................................3-128 17. Passenger's front air bag..................2-49 18. Glove box........................................3-124 19. Power outlet ....................................3-127 20. AUX, USB and iPod port ..................4-2

OAEE016004N

1-6

Your vehicle at a glance

MOTOR COMPARTMENT

1. Coolant reservoir ..............................7-12

2. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-16

3. Fuse box ...........................................7-44

4. Battery (12 volt) ................................7-23

5. Coolant cap.......................................7-13

6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-17

OAEE076001N

The actual motor compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Safety system of your vehicle

Important Safety Precautions..............................2-2 Always Wear Your Seat Belt ..........................................2-2 Restrain All Children .........................................................2-2 Air Bag Hazards.................................................................2-2 Driver Distraction ..............................................................2-2 Control Your Speed...........................................................2-3 Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition............................2-3

Seats ........................................................................2-4 Safety Precautions ...........................................................2-5 Front Seats .........................................................................2-6 Rear Seats.........................................................................2-12 Head Restraints ...............................................................2-16 Seat warmers ...................................................................2-20

Seat Belts ..............................................................2-23 Seat Belt Safety Precautions.......................................2-23 Seat Belt Warning Light ................................................2-24 Seat Belt Restraint System...........................................2-26 Additional Seat Belt Safety Precautions...................2-32 Care of Seat Belts...........................................................2-35

Child Restraint System (CRS).............................2-36 Children Always in the Rear.........................................2-36 Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) .................2-37 Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)..................2-39

Air Bag - Advanced Supplemental Restraint System.....2-47

Where Are the Air Bags?..............................................2-49 How Does the Air Bag System Operate?..................2-53 What to Expect After an Air Bag Inflates................2-57 Occupant Classification System (OCS).......................2-58 Why Didn't My Air Bag Go Off in a Collision? ........2-63 SRS Care............................................................................2-68 Additional Safety Precautions .....................................2-69 Air Bag Warning Labels.................................................2-70

This chapter provides you with important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers. It explains how to properly use your seats and seat belts, and how your air bags work. Additionally, this chapter explains how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle.

2

2-2

You will find many safety precautions and recommendations throughout this section, and throughout this man- ual.The safety precautions in this sec- tion are among the most important.

Always Wear Your Seat Belt A seat belt is your best protection in all types of accidents. Air bags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with air bags, ALWAYS make sure you and your passengers wear your seat belts, and wear them properly.

Restrain All Children All children under age 13 should ride in your vehicle properly restrained in a rear seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in an appropriate child restraint. Larger children should use a booster seat with the lap/shoulder belt until they can use the seat belt properly without a booster seat.

Air Bag Hazards While air bags can save lives, they can also cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or who are not prop- erly restrained. Infants, young chil- dren, and shorter adults are at the greatest risk of being injured by an inflating air bag. Follow all instruc- tions and warnings in this manual.

Driver Distraction Driver distraction presents a serious and potentially deadly danger, espe- cially for inexperienced drivers. Safety should be the first concern when behind the wheel and drivers need to be aware of the wide array of potential distractions, such as drowsiness, reaching for objects, eating, personal grooming, other passengers, and using cellular phones. Drivers can become distracted when they take their eyes and attention off the road or their hands off the wheel to focus on activities other than driv- ing. To reduce your risk of distraction or getting into an accident:

IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Safety system of your vehicle

2-3

Safety system of your vehicle

ALWAYS set up your mobile devices (i.e., MP3 players, phones, naviga- tion units, etc.) when your vehicle is parked or safely stopped.

ONLY use your mobile device when allowed by laws and when conditions permit safe use. NEVER text or email while driving. Most states have laws prohibiting drivers from texting. Some states and cities also prohibit drivers from using handheld phones.

NEVER let the use of a mobile device distract you from driving. You have a responsibility to your passen- gers and others on the road to always drive safely, with your hands on the wheel as well as your eyes and attention on the road.

Control Your Speed Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current condi- tions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.

Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such prob- lems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

2

2-4

SEATS

Safety system of your vehicle

OAEE036001N

Front seats (1) Forward and backward (2) Seatback angle (3) Seat cushion height (4) Lumbar support (Driver's seat)* (5) Seat warmer* (6) Headrest

Rear seats (7) Seat warmer* (8) Armrest* (9) Headrest (10) Seatback folding

* : if equipped

Manual seat

Power seat

Safety Precautions Adjusting the seats so that you are sit- ting in a safe, comfortable position plays an important role in driver and passenger safety together with the seat belts and air bags in an accident.

Air bags You can take steps to reduce the risk of being injured by an inflating air bag. Sitting too close to an air bag greatly increases the risk of injury in the event the air bag inflates. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and their chest.

Do not use a cushion that reduces friction between the seat and the passenger. The passen- ger's hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt during an accident or a sudden stop. Serious or fatal internal injuries could result because the seat belt cannot operate properly.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating air bag, take the following pre- cautions: Adjust the driver's seat as far to

the rear as possible while main- taining the ability to maintain full control of the vehicle.

Adjust the front passenger seat as far to the rear as possible.

Hold the steering wheel by the rim with hands at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to mini- mize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms.

NEVER place anything or any- one between the steering wheel and the air bag.

Do not allow the front passen- ger to place feet or legs on the dashboard to minimize the risk of leg injuries.

WARNING

2-5

Safety system of your vehicle

2

2-6

Safety system of your vehicle

Seat belts Always fasten your seat belt before starting any trip. At all times, passengers should sit upright and be properly restrained. Infants and small children must be restrained in appropriate child restraint systems. Adults and children who have outgrown a booster seat must be restrained using the seat belts.

Front Seats

Take the following precautions when adjusting your seat belt: NEVER use one seat belt for

more than one occupant. Always position the seatback

upright with the lap portion of the seat belt snug and low across the hips.

NEVER allow children or small infants to ride in a passenger's lap.

Do not route the seat belt across your neck, across sharp edges, or reroute the shoulder strap away from your body.

Do not allow the seat belt to become caught or jammed.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when adjusting your seat: NEVER attempt to adjust the

seat while the vehicle is mov- ing. The seat could respond with unexpected movement and may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an acci- dent.

Do not place anything under the front seats. Loose objects in the driver's foot area could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, causing an accident.

Do not allow anything to inter- fere with the normal position and proper locking of the seat- back.

Do not place a cigarette lighter on the floor or seat. When you operate the seat, gas may exit out of the lighter causing a fire.

(Continued)

WARNING

2-7

Safety system of your vehicle

Manual adjustment (if equipped) The front seat can be adjusted by using the levers located on the out- side of the seat cushion. Before driv- ing, adjust the seat to the proper position so that you can easily con- trol the steering wheel, foot pedals and controls on the instrument panel.

Forward and rearward adjustment

To move the seat forward or rearward: 1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment

lever and hold it. 2. Slide the seat to the position you

desire. 3. Release the lever and make sure

the seat is locked in place. Move forward and rearward without using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not locked properly.

2

To prevent injury:

Do not adjust your seat while wearing your seat belt. Moving the seat cushion for- ward may cause strong pres- sure on your abdomen.

Do not allow your hands or fingers to get caught in the seat mechanisms while the seat is moving.

CAUTION

(Continued) Use extreme caution when

picking small objects trapped under the seats or between the seat and the center con- sole. Your hands might be cut or injured by the sharp edges of the seat mechanism.

OAE036002

2-8

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback: 1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the

seatback lever. 2. Carefully lean back on the seat

and adjust the seatback to the position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the seatback is locked in place. (The lever MUST return to its orig- inal position for the seatback to lock.)

Reclining seatback Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dan- gerous. Even when buckled up, the protection of your restraint system (seat belts and air bags) is greatly reduced by reclining your seatback.

Seat belts must be snug against your hips and chest to work properly. When the seatback is reclined, the shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be snug against your chest. Instead, it will be in front of you. During an accident, you could be thrown into the seat belt, causing neck or other injuries. The more the seatback is reclined, the greater chance the passenger's hips will slide under the lap belt or the passenger's neck will strike the shoulder belt.

Safety system of your vehicle

NEVER ride with a reclined seatback when the vehicle is moving. Riding with a reclined seatback increases your chance of seri- ous or fatal injuries in the event of a collision or sudden stop. Drivers and passengers should ALWAYS sit well back in their seats, properly belted, and with the seatbacks upright.

WARNING

OAE036003

2-9

Safety system of your vehicle

2

Seat cushion height

To change the height of the seat cushion: Push down on the lever several

times, to lower the seat cushion. Pull up on the lever several times,

to raise the seat cushion.

Power adjustment (for driver's seat, if equipped) The front seat can be adjusted by using the control switches located on the outside of the seat cushion. Before driving, adjust the seat to the proper position so that you can easily control the steering wheel, foot pedals and controls on the instrument panel.

To prevent damage to the seats: Always stop adjusting the seats

when the seat has been adjust- ed as far forward or rearward as possible.

Do not adjust the seats longer than necessary when the vehicle is turned off. This may result in unnecessary battery drain.

Do not operate two or more seats at the same time.This may result in an electrical malfunc- tion.

NOTICE

NEVER allow children in the vehicle unattended. The power seats are operable when the vehicle is turned off.

WARNING OAE036004

2-10

Forward and rearward adjustment

To move the seat forward or rearward: 1. Push the control switch forward or

rearward. 2. Release the switch once the seat

reaches the desired position.

Seatback angle

To adjust the seatback: 1. Rotate the top of control switch

forward or rearward. 2. Release the switch once the seat-

back reaches the desired position.

Reclining seatback Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dan- gerous. Even when buckled up, the protections of your restraint system (seat belts and air bags) is greatly reduced by reclining your seatback.

Safety system of your vehicle

NEVER ride with a reclined seat- back when the vehicle is moving. Riding with a reclined seatback increases your chance of serious or fatal injuries in the event of a collision or sudden stop. Driver and passengers should ALWAYS sit well back in their seats, properly belted, and with the seatbacks upright.

WARNING

OAE036007OAE036006

2-11

Safety system of your vehicle

2

Seat belts must be snug against your hips and chest to work properly. When the seatback is reclined, the shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be snug against your chest. Instead, it will be in front of you. During an accident, you could be thrown into the seat belt, causing neck or other injuries. The more the seatback is reclined, the greater chance the passengers hips will slide under the lap belt or the passenger's neck will strike the shoulder belt.

Seat cushion height

To change the height of the seat cushion: 1. Push the front portion of the con-

trol switch up to raise or down to lower the front part of the seat cushion.

Push the rear portion of the con- trol switch up to raise or down to lower the height of the seat cush- ion.

2. Release the switch once the seat reaches the desired position.

Lumbar support (for driver's seat, if equipped)

To adjust the lumbar support: 1. Press the front portion of the

switch (1) to increase support or the rear portion of the switch (2) to decrease support.

2. Release the switch once it reach- es the desired position.

OAE036008 OAE036005

2-12

Safety system of your vehicle

Seatback pocket

The seatback pocket is provided on the back of the front passenger's seatback.

Rear Seats Folding the rear seat The rear seatbacks can be folded to facilitate carrying long items or to increase the luggage capacity of the vehicle.

To prevent the Occupant Classification System from mal- functioning: Do not hang onto the front pas- senger's seatback.

WARNING

Never allow passengers to sit on top of the folded down seatback while the vehicle is moving. This is not a proper seating position and no seat belts are available for use. This could result in serious injury or death in case of an accident or sudden stop.

Objects carried on the folded down seatback should not extend higher than the top of the front seatbacks. This could allow cargo to slide for- ward and cause injury or dam- age during sudden stops.

WARNING

Do not put heavy or sharp objects in the seatback pockets. In an accident they could come loose from the pocket and injure occupants.

CAUTION

OAD035017

2-13

Safety system of your vehicle

To fold down the rear seatback: 1. Set the front seatback to the

upright position and if necessary, slide the front seat forward.

2. Lower the rear head restraints to the lowest position by pushing and holding the release button (1) and pushing down on the headrest (2).

. 3. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in the pocket between the rear seat- back and cushion.

4. Locate the seatbelt toward the outboard position before folding down the seatback. If not, the seatbelt system may be interfered by the seatback.

5. Pull on the seatback folding lever (1).

2

OAE036018

OAE036065L

OAE036019

OAE036020

When returning the rear seat- back from a folded to an upright position, hold the seatback and return it slowly. Ensure that the seatback is completely locked into its upright position by pushing on the top of the seat- back. In an accident or sudden stop, the unlocked seatback could allow cargo to move for- ward with great force and enter the passenger compartment, which could result in serious injury or death.

WARNING

2-14

6. Fold the seatback toward the front of the vehicle.

7. To use the rear seat, lift and unfold the seatback to the upright posi- tion. Push the seatback firmly until it clicks into place. Make sure the seatback is locked in place. When you return the seatback to its upright position, always be sure it has locked into position by push- ing on the top of the seatback.

Safety system of your vehicle

OAE036021 OAE036066L

2-15

Safety system of your vehicle

2

Armrest (if equipped)

The armrest is located in the center of the rear seat. Pull the armrest down by using the strap from the seatback to use it.

Do not place objects in the rear seats, since they cannot be properly secured and may hit vehicle occupants in a collision causing serious injury or death.

WARNING

Make sure the vehicle is off, shifted to (Park), and the parking brake is securely applied when- ever loading or unloading cargo. Failure to take these steps may allow the vehicle to move if the shift button is inadvertently pressed to another position.

WARNING

OAE036022

Be careful when loading cargo through the rear pas- senger seats to prevent dam- age to the vehicle interior.

When cargo is loaded through the rear passenger seats, ensure the cargo is properly secured to prevent it from moving while driving.

Unsecured cargo in the pas- senger compartment can cause damage to the vehicle or injury to it's occupants.

CAUTION

2-16

Safety system of your vehicle

Head Restraints The vehicle's front and rear seats have adjustable head restraints. The head restraints provide comfort for passengers, but more importantly they are designed to help protect passengers from whiplash and other neck and spinal injuries during an accident, especially in a rear impact collision.

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death in an accident, take the following precautions when adjusting your head restraints: Always properly adjust the

head restraints for all passen- gers BEFORE starting the vehicle.

NEVER let anyone ride in a seat with the head restraints removed.

(Continued)

(Continued)

Adjust the head restraints so the middle of the head restraints is at the same height as the height of the top of the eyes.

NEVER adjust the head restraint position of the dri- vers seat when the vehicle is in motion.

Adjust the head restraint as close to the passengers head as possible. Do not use a seat cushion that holds the body away from the seatback.

Make sure the head restraint locks into position after adjust- ing it.

WARNING

OLF034072N

2-17

Safety system of your vehicle

2

To prevent damage, NEVER hit or pull on the head restraints.

Front seat head restraints

The vehicle's front and passenger's seats are equipped with adjustable head restraints for the passengers safety and comfort.

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the head restraint: 1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

To lower the head restraint: 1. Push and hold the release button

(2) on the head restraint support. 2. Lower the head restraint to the

desired position (3).

NOTICE

OPDE036068

OAE036010

2-18

Safety system of your vehicle

If you recline the seatback towards the front with the head restraint and seat cushion raised, the head restraint may come in contact with the sunvisor or other parts of the vehicle.

Removal/Reinstallation

To remove the head restraint: 1. Recline the seatback (2) rearward

using the seatback angle lever/ switch (1).

2. Raise the head restraint as far as it can go.

3. Press the head restraint release button (3) while pulling the head restraint up (4).

NOTICE

OLF034015

OAE036012

OAE036011

Type A

Type B

2-19

Safety system of your vehicle

2

To reinstall the head restraint: 1. Put the head restraint poles (2) into

the holes while pressing the release button (1).

2. Adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.

3. Recline the seatback (4) forward using the seatback angle lever/ switch (3).

Rear seat head restraints

The rear seats are equipped with head restraints in all the seating positions for the passenger's safety and comfort.

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the head restraint: 1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

To lower the head restraint: 1. Push and hold the release button

(2) on the head restraint support. 2. Lower the head restraint to the

desired position (3).

OPDE036069

OAE036014

OAE036013

Type A

Type B OAE036017

2-20

Safety system of your vehicle

Removal/Reinstallation

To remove the head restraint: 1. Raise the head restraint as far as

it can go. 2. Press the head restraint release

button (1) while pulling the head restraint up (2).

To reinstall the head restraint: 1. Put the head restraint poles into

the holes (3) while pressing the release button (1).

2. Adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.

Seat warmers Front seat warmers Seat warmers are provided to warm the seats during cold weather.

OAE036072L

The seat warmers can cause a SERIOUS BURN, even at low temperatures and especially if used for long periods of time. Passengers must be able to feel if the seat is becoming too warm so they can turn it off, if needed. People who cannot detect tem- perature change or pain to the skin should use extreme cau- tion, especially the following types of passengers: Infants, children, elderly or

disabled persons, or hospital outpatients.

People with sensitive skin or who burn easily.

Fatigued individuals. Intoxicated individuals. People taking medication that

can cause drowsiness or sleepiness.

WARNING

2-21

Safety system of your vehicle

2

To prevent damage to the seat warmers and seats: Never use a solvent such as

paint thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline to clean the seats.

Do not place heavy or sharp objects on seats equipped with seat warmers.

Do not change the seat cover. It may damage the seat warmer.

While the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode, push either of the switches to warm the driver's seat or front passenger's seat. During mild weather or under condi- tions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed, keep the switches in the OFF position.

Each time you push the switch, the temperature setting of the seat is changed as follows :

When pressing the switch for more than 1.5 seconds with the seat warmer operating, the seat warmer will turn OFF.

The seat warmer defaults to the OFF position whenever the POWER button is in the ON position.

Information With the seat warmer switch in the ON position, the heating system in the seat turns off or on automatically depending on the seat temperature.

i

NOTICE

NEVER place anything on the seat that insulates against heat when the seat warmer is in oper- ation, such as a blanket or seat cushion. This may cause the seat warmer to overheat, caus- ing a burn or damage to the seat.

WARNING

OAEE036002N

OFF HIGH ( )

LOW ( ) MIDDLE ( )

2-22

Safety system of your vehicle

Rear seat warmers (if equipped)

While the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode, push either of the switches to warm the rear seat. During mild weather or under condi- tions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed, keep the switches in the OFF position.

Each time you push the switch, the temperature setting of the seat is changed as follows :

The seat warmer defaults to the OFF position whenever the POWER button is placed in the ON position.

Information With the seat warmer switch in the ON position, the heating system in the seat turns off or on automatically depending on the seat temperature.

Battery cooling duct

The high voltage battery cooling duct is located in the bottom center of the rear seats. The cooling duct cools down the high voltage battery. When the high voltage battery cool- ing duct is blocked, the high voltage battery may be overheated. Do not obstruct the cooling duct with any other objects.

i OAE036023

OFF HIGH ( ) LOW ( )

OAEE036004

2-23

Safety system of your vehicle

2

This section describes how to use the seat belts properly. It also describes some of the things not to do when using seat belts.

Seat Belt Safety Precautions Always fasten your seat belt and make sure all passengers have fas- tened their seat belts before starting any trip. Air bags are designed to supplement the seat belt as an addi- tional safety device, but they are not a substitute. Most states require all occupants of a vehicle to wear seat belts.

SEAT BELTS

Seat belts must be used by ALL passengers whenever the vehi- cle is moving.Take the following precautions when adjusting and wearing seat belts: ALWAYS properly restrain

children under age 13 in the rear seats.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued) NEVER allow children to ride

in the front passenger seat. If a child age 13 or older must be seated in the front seat, move the seat as far back as possi- ble and properly restrain them in the seat.

NEVER allow an infant or child to be carried on an occupants lap.

NEVER ride with the seatback reclined when the vehicle is moving.

Do not allow children to share a seat or seat belt.

Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm or behind your back.

Always wear both the shoul- der portion and lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.

Do not use the seat belt if it is twisted. A twisted seat belt will not protect you properly in an accident.

(Continued)

(Continued) Do not use a seat belt if the

webbing or hardware is dam- aged.

Do not latch the seat belt into the buckles of other seats.

NEVER unfasten the seat belt while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control result- ing in an accident.

Make sure there is nothing in the buckle interfering with the seat belt latch mechanism. This may prevent the seat belt from fastening securely.

No modifications or additions should be made by the user which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly from being adjusted to remove slack.

2-24

Safety system of your vehicle

Seat Belt Warning Light Seat belt warning light (for driver's seat)

As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt warning light will illuminate and warning chime will sound for approxi- mately 6 seconds each time you turn the POWER button ON if the seat belt is unfastened.

If you continue not to fasten the seat belt and you drive over 6 mph (9 km/h), the warning light will stay illuminated. If you continue not to fasten the seat belt and you drive over 12 mph (20 km/h) the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately 100 seconds and the corresponding warning light will blink.

If you unfasten the seat belt while driving under 12 mph (20 km/h), the seat belt warning light will illuminate until the seat belt is fastened. If you unfasten the seat belt while driving over 12 mph (20 km/h), the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately 100 seconds and the corresponding warning light will blink.

Damaged seat belts and seat belt assemblies will not operate properly. Always replace: Frayed, contaminated, or dam-

aged webbing Damaged hardware The entire seat belt assembly

after it has been worn in an accident, even if damage to webbing or assembly is not apparent

WARNING

OLMB033022

2-25

Safety system of your vehicle

2

Seat belt warning light (for front passenger's seat)

As a reminder to the front passenger, the front passenger's seat belt warn- ing lights will illuminate for approxi- mately 6 seconds each time you turn the POWER button to the ON posi- tion regardless of belt fastening. If you continue not to fasten the seat belt and you drive over 6 mph (9 km/h), the warning light will stay illuminated.

If you continue not to fasten the seat belt and you drive over 12 mph (20 km/h) the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately 100 sec- onds and the corresponding warning light will blink. If you unfasten the seat belt while driving under 12 mph (20 km/h) the seat belt warning light will illuminate until the seat belt is fastened. If you unfasten the seat belt while driving over 12 mph (20 km/h), the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately 100 seconds and the corresponding warning light will blink.

Seat Belt Restraint System

The front passenger's seat belt warning light may not properly operate if the front passenger does not sit properly in the seat.

WARNING

OAEE036011N

Improperly positioned seat belts may increase the risk of serious injury in an accident.Take the fol- lowing precautions when adjust- ing the seat belt: Position the lap portion of the

seat belt as low as possible across your hips, not on your waist, so that it fits snugly.

(Continued)

WARNING

OLMB033025

2-26

Safety system of your vehicle

Seat Belt-Driver's 3-point sys- tem with emergency locking retractor

To fasten your seat belt:

Pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into the buckle (2). There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle.

You should place the lap belt (1) por- tion across your hips and the shoul- der belt (2) portion across your chest. The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length after the lap belt portion is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and move with you. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly.

(Continued) Position one arm under the

shoulder belt and the other over the belt, as shown in the illus- tration.

Always position the shoulder belt anchor into the locked position at the appropriate height.

Never position the shoulder belt across your neck or face.

OLMB033087

ODH033053

2-27

Safety system of your vehicle

2

If you are not able to smoothly pull enough of the seat belt out from the retractor, firmly pull the seat belt out and release it. After release, you will be able to pull the belt out smoothly.

Height adjustment

You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor to one of the three different positions for maximum comfort and safety. The shoulder portion should be adjusted so it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder near- est the door, not over your neck. To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster into an appropriate position.

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1). To lower it, push it down (3) while pressing the height adjuster button (2). Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into position.

NOTICE

OAD035027

2-28

Safety system of your vehicle

To release your seat belt:

Press the release button (1) in the locking buckle. When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor. If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure it is not twist- ed, then try again.

Rear Seat Belt Passenger's 3- point system with convertible locking retractor This type of seat belt combines the features of both an emergency locking retractor seat belt and an automatic locking retractor seat belt. Convertible retractor type seat belts are installed in the rear seat positions to help accom- modate the installation of child restraint systems. Although a convert- ible retractor is also installed in the front passenger seat position, NEVER place any infant/child restraint system in the front seat of the vehicle.

To fasten your seat belt:

Pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buck- le. There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle. When not securing a child restraint, the seat belt operates in the same way as the driver's seat belt (Emergency Locking Retractor Type). It automati- cally adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt portion of the seat belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly across your hips.

When the seat belt is fully extended from the retractor to allow the installa- tion of a child restraint system, the seat belt operation changes to allow the belt to retract, but not to extend (Automatic Locking Retractor Type). Refer to the "Using a Child Restraint System" section in this chapter.

Although the seat belt retractor provides the same level of protec- tion for seated passengers in either emergency or automatic locking modes, the emergency locking mode allows seated pas- sengers to move freely in their seat while keeping some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop, the retractor auto- matically locks the belt to help restrain your body. To deactivate the automatic lock- ing mode, unbuckle the seat belt and allow the belt to fully retract.

NOTICE

ODH033057

2-29

Safety system of your vehicle

2

To release your seat belt:

Press the release button (1) in the locking buckle. When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor. If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure it is not twist- ed, then try again.

Pre-tensioner seat belt (Driver and front passenger)

Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and front passenger's Pre-tensioner Seat Belts (Retractor Pretensioner and Emergency Fastening Device System). The purpose of the pre-ten- sioner is to make sure the seat belts fit tightly against the occupant's body in certain frontal or side collision(s). The Emergency Fastening Device System may be activated in certain crashes where the frontal or side colli- sion(s) is severe enough, together with the air bags.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock into position. In certain frontal or side collision(s), the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact against the occu- pant's body.

(1) Retractor Pretensioner The purpose of the retractor pre- tensioner is to make sure that the shoulder belts fit in tightly against the occupant's upper body in cer- tain frontal or side collision(s).

(2) Emergency Fastening Device System The purpose of the Emergency Fastening Device System is to make sure that the pelvis belts fit in tightly against the occupant's lower body in certain frontal or side collision(s).

If the system senses excessive ten- sion on the driver or passenger's seat belt when the pre-tensioner sys- tem activates, the load limiter inside the retractor pre-tensioner will release some of the pressure on the affected seat belt.

OTL035053

ODH033057

2-30

Safety system of your vehicle

The Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt System consists mainly of the following com- ponents. Their locations are shown in the illustration above: 1. SRS air bag warning light 2. Retractor pre-tensioner 3. SRS control module 4. Emergency Fastening Device

System

Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies for several minutes after they have been activated. When the pre-ten- sioner seat belt mechanism deploys during a collision, the pre-tensioners become hot and can burn you.

WARNING

OLMB033040/Q

Always wear your seat belt and sit properly in your seat.

Do not use the seat belt if it is loose or twisted. A loose or twisted seat belt will not pro- tect you properly in an acci- dent.

Do not place anything near the buckle. This may adversely affect the buckle and cause it to function improperly.

Always replace your pre-ten- sioners after activation or an accident.

NEVER inspect, service, repair or replace the pre-tensioners yourself. This must be done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not hit the seat belt assem- blies.

WARNING

2-31

Safety system of your vehicle

2

The sensor that activates the SRS air bag is connected with the pretensioner seat belts. The SRS air bag warning light on the instru- ment panel will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds after the POWER button is in the ON posi- tion, and then it should turn off. If the pre-tensioner is not working properly, the warning light will illu- minate even if the SRS air bag is not malfunctioning. If the warning light does not illuminate, stays illuminated or illuminates when the vehicle is being driven, have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect the pre-tensioner seat belts and SRS air bags as soon as possible.

Both the driver's and front pas- senger's pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated in certain frontal or side collisions or rollovers.

When the pre-tensioner seat belts are activated, a loud noise may be heard and fine dust, which may appear to be smoke, may be visible in the passenger compartment. These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous.

Although it is non-toxic, the fine dust may cause skin irritation and should not be breathed for prolonged periods. Wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly after an accident in which the pre-tensioner seat belts were activated.

NOTICENOTICE

Fasten your seat belt while sitting properly in an upright position to maximize the effectiveness of the pre-ten- sioner seat belt system.

A pre-tensioner seat belt sys- tem is designed to activate only once. Replace the pre- tensioner seat belt system, if it was activated in an accident.

WARNING

2-32

Safety system of your vehicle

Rear center seatbelt (3-point rear center seat belt)

1.Insert the tongue plate (A) into the buckle (A) until an audible "click" is heard, indicating the latch is locked. Make sure the belt is not twisted.

2. Pull the tongue plate (B) and insert it into the buckle (B) until an audible "click" is heard, indicating the latch is locked. Make sure the belt is not twisted.

When using the rear center seat belt, the buckle with the "CENTER" mark must be used.

Additional Seat Belt Safety Precautions Seat belt use during pregnancy The seat belt should always be used during pregnancy. The best way to protect your unborn child is to protect yourself by always wearing the seat belt. Pregnant women should always wear a lap-shoulder seat belt. Place the shoulder belt across your chest, rout- ed between your breasts and away from your neck. Place the lap belt line so that it fits snugly and as low as pos- sible across the hips, not across the abdomen.

OAE036027

OAE036068L

2-33

Safety system of your vehicle

2

Seat belt use and children Infant and small children

All 50 states have child restraint laws which require children to travel in approved child restraint devices, including booster seats. The age at which seat belts can be used instead of child restraints differs among states, so you should be aware of the specific requirements in your state, and where you are travelling. Infant and child restraints must be properly placed and installed in a rear seat. For more information refer to the "Child Restraint Systems" section in this chapter.

Small children are best protected from injury in an accident when prop- erly restrained in the rear seat by a child restraint system that meets the requirements of the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Before buying any child restraint system, make sure that it has a label certify- ing that it meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard FMVSS 213. The restraint must be appropri- ate for your child's height and weight.

A pregnant woman or a patient is more vulnerable to any imapcts on the abdomen during an abrupt stop or acci- dent. If you are in an accident while pregnant, we recom- mend you consult your doc- tor.

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death to an unborn child during an accident, pregnant women should NEVER place the lap portion of the seat belt above or over the area of the abdomen where the unborn child is located.

WARNING

ALWAYS properly restrain infants and small children in a child restraint appropriate for the child's height and weight. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death to a child and other passengers, NEVER hold a child in your lap or arms when the vehicle is moving.The violent forces created during an acci- dent will tear the child from your arms and throw the child against the interior of the vehicle.

WARNING

2-34

Safety system of your vehicle

Check the label on the child restraint for this information. Refer to the "Child Restraint Systems" section in this chapter.

Larger children

Children under age 13 and who are too large for a booster seat must always occupy the rear seat and use the available lap/shoulder belts. A seat belt should lie across the upper thighs and be snug across the shoul- der and chest to restrain the child safely. Check belt fit periodically. Children are afforded the most safe- ty in the event of an accident when they are restrained by a proper restraint system and/or seat belts in the rear seat. Always have the LATCH system inspected by your authorized HYUNDAI dealer after an accident. An accident can damage the LATCH system and may not properly secure the child restraint. If a larger child over age 13 must be seated in the front seat, the child must be securely restrained by the available lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be placed in the rear- most position.

If the shoulder belt portion slightly touches the child's neck or face, try placing the child closer to the center of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still touches their face or neck they need to be returned to an appropriate booster seat in the rear seat.

Transporting an injured person A seat belt should be used when an injured person is being transported. Consult a physician for specific rec- ommendations.

One person per belt Two people (including children) should never attempt to use a single seat belt. This could increase the severity of injuries in case of an accident.

Do not lie down Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the protec- tions of your restraint system (seat belts and air bags) is greatly reduced by reclining your seatback. To reduce the chance of injuries in the event of an accident and to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the restraint system, all passengers should be sitting up and the front and rear seats should be in an upright position when the car is moving.

Always make sure children are wearing their seat belts and that they are properly adjusted before driving.

NEVER allow the shoulder belt to contact the childs neck or face.

Do not allow more than one child to use a single seat belt.

WARNING

2-35

Safety system of your vehicle

2

A seat belt cannot provide proper protection if the person is lying down in the rear seat or if the front or rear seats are in a reclined position.

Care of Seat Belts Seat belt systems should never be disassembled or modified. In addi- tion, care should be taken to assure that seat belts and belt hardware are not damaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

Periodic inspection All seat belts should be inspected periodically for wear or damage of any kind. Any damaged parts should be replaced as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Keep belts clean and dry Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If belts become dirty, they can be cleaned by using a mild soap solu- tion and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong detergents or abrasives should not be used because they may damage and weaken the fabric.

When to replace seat belts The entire seat belt assembly or assemblies should be replaced if the vehicle has been involved in an acci- dent. This should be done even if no damage is visible. Additional ques- tions concerning seat belt operation should be directed to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NEVER ride with a reclined seatback when the vehicle is moving.

Riding with a reclined seatback increases your chance of seri- ous or fatal injuries in the event of a collision or sudden stop.

Drivers and passengers should always sit well back in their seats, properly belted, and with the seatbacks upright.

WARNING

2-36

Safety system of your vehicle

Children Always in the Rear Children under age 13 must always ride in the rear seats and must always be properly restrained to min- imize the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden maneuver. According to accident statistics, chil- dren are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats than in the front seat. Even with air bags, children can be seriously injured or killed. Children too large for a child restraint must use the seat belts provided. All 50 states have child restraint laws which require children to travel in approved child restraint devices. The laws governing the age or height/weight restrictions at which seat belts can be used instead of child restraints differs among states, so you should be aware of the spe- cific requirements in your state, and where you are travelling.

Child restraint systems must be prop- erly placed and installed in the rear seat. You must use a commercially available child restraint system that meets the requirements of the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS 213). Child restraint systems are generally designed to be secured in a vehicle seat by lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt, or by a LATCH sys- tem in the rear seats of the vehicle.

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM (CRS)

Always properly restrain chil- dren in the rear seats of the vehicle. Children of all ages are safer when restrained in the rear seat. A child riding in the front pas- senger seat can be forcefully struck by an inflating air bag resulting in SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH.

WARNING

2-37

Safety system of your vehicle

2

Child restraint system (CRS) Infants and younger children must be restrained in an appropriate rear-fac- ing or forward-facing CRS that has first been properly secured to the rear seat of the vehicle. Read and comply with the instructions for installation and use provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint.

Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) When selecting a CRS for your child, always: Make sure the CRS has a label

certifying that it meets applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS 213).

Select a child restraint based on your child's height and weight. The required label or the instructions for use typically provide this infor- mation.

Select a child restraint that fits the vehicle seating position where it will be used.

Read and comply with the warn- ings and instructions for installation and use provided with the child restraint system.

(Continued) Always follow the child

restraint system manufactur- er's instructions for installa- tion and use.

Always properly restrain your child in the child restraint.

If the vehicle head restraint prevents proper installation of a child seat (as described in the child restraint system manual), the head restraint of the respective seating posi- tion shall be readjusted or entirely removed.

Do not use an infant carrier or a child safety seat that "hooks" over a seatback, it may not provide adequate protection in an accident.

After an accident, have a HYUNDAI dealer check the child restraint system, seat belts, tether anchors and lower anchors.

An improperly secured child restraint can increase the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH in an accident. Always take the following precautions when using a child restraint system: NEVER install a child or infant

restraint in the front passen- ger's seat.

Always properly secure the child restraint to a rear seat of the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING

2-38

Safety system of your vehicle

Child restraint system types There are three main types of child restraint systems: rear-facing seats, forward-facing seats, and booster seats. They are classified according to the childs age, height and weight.

Rear-facing child seats

A rear-facing child seat provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the child. The har- ness system holds the child in place, and in an accident, acts to keep the child positioned in the seat and reduce the stress to the neck and spinal cord. All children under age one must always ride in a rear-facing infant child restraint. Convertible and 3-in-1 child seats typ- ically have higher height and weight limits for the rear-facing position, allowing you to keep your child rear- facing for a longer period of time.

Continue to use a rear-facing child seat for as long as your child will fit within the height and weight limits allowed by the child seat manufactur- er. It's the best way to keep them safe. Once your child has outgrown the rear-facing child restraint, your child is ready for a forward-facing child restraint with a harness.

OAE036062 NEVER install a child or infant restraint in the front passen- ger's seat. Placing a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat can result in SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH if the child restraint is struck by an inflating air bag.

WARNING

2-39

Safety system of your vehicle

2

Forward-facing child restraints

A forward-facing child seat provides restraint for the child's body with a harness. Keep children in a forward- facing child seat with a harness until they reach the top height or weight limit allowed by your child restraints manufacturer. Once your child outgrows the forward- facing child restraint, your child is ready for a booster seat.

Booster seats

A booster seat is a restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle's seat belt system. A booster seat positions the seat belt so that it fits properly over the lap of your child. Keep your child in a booster seat until they are big enough to sit in the seat without a booster and still have the seat belt fit properly. For a seat belt to fit properly, the lap belt must lie snug- ly across the upper thighs, not the stomach. The shoulder belt should lie snug across the shoulder and chest and not across the neck or face. Children under age 13 must always ride in the rear seats and must always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury.

Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)

Before installing your child restraint system always: Read and follow the instruc-

tions provided by the manu- facturer of the child restraint.

Read and follow the instruc- tions regarding child restraint systems in this manual.

Failure to follow all warnings and instructions could increase the risk of the SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH if an accident occurs.

WARNING

If the vehicle headrest prevents proper installation of a child seat (as described in the child seat system manual, the head- rest of the respective seating position shall be readjusted or entirely removed.

WARNING

OAE036028

2-40

Safety system of your vehicle

After selecting a proper child seat for your child, check to make sure it fits properly in your vehicle. Follow the instructions provided by the manu- facturer when installing the child seat. Note these general steps when installing the seat to your vehicle: Properly secure the child restraint

to the vehicle. All child restraints must be secured to the vehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt or with the LATCH system.

Make sure the child restraint is firmly secured. After installing a child restraint to the vehicle, push and pull the seat forward-and-back and side-to-side to verify that it is securely attached to the seat. A child restraint secured with a seat belt should be installed as firmly as possible. However, some side-to- side movement can be expected.

Secure the child in the child restraint. Make sure the child is properly strapped in the child restraint according to the manufac- turer instructions.

Lower Anchors and Tether for Children (LATCH System) The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving and in an acci- dent. This system is designed to make installation of the child restraint easier and reduce the possibility of improperly installing your child restraint. The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and attach- ments on the child restraint. The LATCH system eliminates the need to use seat belts to secure the child restraint to the rear seats. Lower anchors are metal bars built into the vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating position that will accommodate a child restraint with lower attachments. To use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you must have a child restraint with LATCH attachments. The child seat manufacturer will pro- vide you with instructions on how to use the child seat with its attachments for the LATCH lower anchors.

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot.To prevent burns, check the seat- ing surface and buckles before placing your child in the child restraint.

CAUTION

2-41

Safety system of your vehicle

2

LATCH anchors have been provided in the left and right outboard rear seating positions. Their locations are shown in the illustration. There are no LATCH anchors provided for the cen- ter rear seating position.

The lower anchor position indicator symbols are located on the left and right rear seat backs to identify the position of the lower anchors in your vehicle (see arrows in illustration). The LATCH anchors are located between the seatback and the seat cushion of the rear seat left and right outboard seating positions.

Do not attempt to install a child restraint system using LATCH anchors in the rear center seat- ing position.There are no LATCH anchors provided for this seat. Using the outboard seat anchors can damage the anchors which may break or fail in a collision resulting in serious injury or death.

WARNING

OAE036063 OAE036031

Lower Anchor Position Indicator

Lower Anchor

2-42

Safety system of your vehicle

Securing a child restraint with the LATCH anchors system To install a LATCH-compatible child restraint in either of the rear outboard seating positions: 1. Move the seat belt buckle away from

the lower anchors. 2. Move any other objects away from

the anchors that could prevent a secure connection between the child restraint and the lower anchors.

3. Place the child restraint on the vehi- cle seat, then attach the seat to the lower anchors according to the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.

4. Follow the child restraint instructions for properly adjusting and tightening the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors.

The recommended weight for the LATCH system is under 65 lb (30 kg). How to determine an appropriate child restraint weight: Child weight + Child restraint weight < 65 lb (30kg)

NOTICE

Take the following precautions when using the LATCH system: Read and follow all installation

instructions provided with your child restraint system.

To prevent the child from reaching and taking hold of unretracted seat belts, buckle all unused rear seat belts and retract the seat belt webbing behind the child. Children can be strangled if a shoulder belt becomes wrapped around their neck and the seat belt tightens.

NEVER attach more than one child restraint to a single anchor. This could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or break.

Always have the LATCH sys- tem inspected by your author- ized HYUNDAI dealer after an accident. An accident can damage the LATCH system and may not properly secure the child restraint.

WARNING

2-43

Safety system of your vehicle

2

Securing a child restraint seat with "Tether Anchor" system

First secure the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors or the seat belt. If the child restraint manufactur- er recommends that the top tether strap be attached, attach and tighten the top tether strap to the top tether strap anchor. Child restraint hook holders are located on the rear of the seatbacks.

To install the tether anchor: 1. Route the child restraint tether strap

over the child restraint seatback. Route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, or route the tether strap over the top of the vehi- cle seatback. Make sure the strap is not twisted.

2. Connect the tether strap hook to the tether anchor, then tighten the teth- er strap according to the child seat manufacturers instructions to firmly secure the child restraint to the seat.

3. Check that the child restraint is securely attached to the seat by pushing and pulling the seat for- ward-and-back and side-to-side.

Take the following precautions when installing the tether strap: Read and follow all installation

instructions provided with your child restraint system.

NEVER attach more than one child restraint to a single teth- er anchor. This could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or break.

Do not attach the tether strap to anything other than the cor- rect tether anchor. It may not work properly if attached to something else.

Do not use the tether anchors for adult seat belts or harness- es, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

WARNING

OAE036030

OAEE036029N

2-44

Safety system of your vehicle

Securing a child restraint with lap/shoulder belt When not using the LATCH system, all child restraints must be secured to a vehicle rear seat with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

Automatic locking mode

Since all passenger seat belts move freely under normal conditions and only lock under extreme or emer- gency conditions (emergency locking mode), you must manually pull the seat belt all the way out to shift the retractor to the "Automatic Locking" mode to secure a child restraint. The "Automatic Locking" mode will help prevent the normal movement of the child in the vehicle from caus- ing the seat belt to loosen and com- promise the child restraint system. To secure a child restraint system, use the following procedure.

To install a child restraint system on the rear seats, do the following: 1. Place the child restraint system on

a rear seat and route the lap/ shoulder belt around or through the child restraint, following the restraint manufacturer's instruc- tions. Be sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.

When using the rear center seat belt, you should also refer to the "Rear Seat Belt Passenger's 3- point system" section in this chapter.

NOTICE

ALWAYS place a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat of the vehicle. Placing a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the child restraint is struck by an inflating air bag.

WARNING

OLMB033044

2-45

Safety system of your vehicle

2

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into the buckle. Listen for the dis- tinct "click" sound.

Information Position the release button so that it is easy to access in case of an emergency.

3. Pull the shoulder portion of the seat belt all the way out.When the shoul- der portion of the seat belt is fully extended, it will shift the retractor to the "Automatic Locking" (child restraint) mode.

4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of the seat belt to retract and listen for an audible "clicking" or "ratcheting" sound. This indicates that the retractor is in the "Automatic Locking" mode. If no distinct sound is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.

i

OLMB033045 OLMB033097 OLMB033098

2-46

Safety system of your vehicle

5. Remove as much slack from the belt as possible by pushing down on the child restraint system while feeding the shoulder belt back into the retractor.

6. Push and pull on the child restraint system to confirm that the seat belt is holding it firmly in place. If it is not, release the seat belt and repeat steps 2 through 6.

7. Double check that the retractor is in the "Automatic Locking" mode by attempting to pull more of the seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot, the retractor is in the "Automatic Locking" mode.

If your CRS manufacturer instructs or recommends you to use a tether anchor with the lap/shoulder belt, refer to the previous pages for more information.

When the seat belt is allowed to retract to its fully stowed position, the retractor will automatically switch from the "Automatic Locking" mode to the emergency lock mode for normal adult usage.

To remove the child restraint, press the release button on the buckle and then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of the restraint and allow the seat belt to retract fully.

NOTICE

If the retractor is not in the "Automatic Locking" mode, the child restraint can move when your vehicle turns or stops sud- denly. A child can be seriously injured or killed if the child restraint is not properly anchored in the car, including manually pulling the seat belt all the way out to shift the rectractor to the "Automatic Locking" mode.

WARNING

2-47

Safety system of your vehicle

2

AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

OAEE036035

The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Driver's front air bag

2. Passenger's front air bag

3. Side air bag

4. Curtain air bag

5. Driver's knee air bag

2-48

Safety system of your vehicle

This vehicle is equipped with an Advanced Supplemental Air Bag System for the driver's seat and front passenger's seats. The front air bags are designed to supplement the three-point seat belts. For these air bags to provide protection, the seat belts must be worn at all times when driving. You can be severely injured or killed in an accident if you are not wearing a seat belt. Air bags are designed to supplement seat belts, but do not replace them. Also, air bags are not designed to deploy in every collision. In some accidents, the seat belts are the only restraint protecting you.

AIR BAG SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ALWAYS use seat belts and child restraints - every trip, every time, everyone! Even with air bags, you can be seriously injured or killed in a collision if you are improperly belted or not wearing your seat belt when the air bag inflates. NEVER place a child in any child restraint or booster seat in the front passenger seat. An inflating air bag could forcefully strike the infant or child causing serious or fatal injuries. ABC - Always Buckle Children under age 13 in the back seat. It is the safest place for children of any age to ride. If a child age 13 or older must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted and the seat should be moved as far back as possible. All occupants should sit upright with the seatback in an upright posi- tion, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs com- fortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked and turned off. If an occupant is out of position during an accident, the rapidly deploying air bag may forcefully contact the occupant causing serious or fatal injuries. You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily close to the air bags or lean against the door or center console. Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still maintaining control of the vehicle. The U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest.

WARNING

2-49

Safety system of your vehicle

2

Where Are the Air Bags? Driver's and passenger's front air bags Your vehicle is equipped with a Advanced Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and passenger seating positions. The SRS consists of air bags which are located in the center of the steer- ing wheel, in the driver's side lower crash pad below the steering wheel column and the passenger's side front panel pad above the glove box. The air bags are labeled with the let- ters "AIR BAG" embossed on the pad covers.

The purpose of the SRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and front passen- gers with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt system alone. The advanced SRS offers the ability to control the air bag inflation within two levels. A first stage level is provided for moderate-severity impacts. A second stage level is pro- vided for more severe impacts. According to the impact severity, the SRS Control Module (SRSCM) con- trols the air bag inflation. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an acci- dent.

OAE036032

OAE036033

OAE036036

Driver's knee air bag

Driver's front air bag

Passenger's front air bag

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating front air bags, take the following precautions: Seat belts must be worn at all

times to help keep occupants positioned properly.

(Continued)

WARNING

2-50

Safety system of your vehicle

Side air bags ]

Your vehicle is equipped with a side air bag in each front seat. The pur- pose of the air bag is to provide the vehicle's driver and the front passen- ger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt alone.

The side air bags are designed to deploy only during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity. The side and curtain air bags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy if a rollover or possible rollover is detected. The side air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situations.

OAE036037

OAE036038

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating side air bag, take the following precautions: Seat belts must be worn at all

times to help keep occupants positioned properly.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued) Move your seat as far back as

possible from front air bags, while still maintaining control of the vehicle.

Never lean against the door or center console.

Do not allow the front passen- ger to place their feet or legs on the dashboard.

No objects (such as crash pad cover, cellular phone holder, cup holder, perfume or stick- ers) should be placed over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, windshield glass, and the front passenger's panel above the glove box. Such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the air bags to deploy.

Do not attach any objects on front windshield and inside mirror.

2-51

Safety system of your vehicle

2

Curtain air bags

Curtain air bags are located along both sides of the roof rails above the front and rear doors.

(Continued) Do not allow passengers to

lean their heads or bodies onto doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window, or place objects between the doors and seats.

Hold the steering wheel at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock posi- tions, to minimize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms.

Do not use any accessory seat covers.This could reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system.

Do not place any objects over the air bag or between the air bag and yourself. Also, do not attach any objects around the area the air bag inflates such as the door, side door glass, front and rear pillar.

(Continued)

(Continued) Do not place any objects

between the door and the seat. They may become dan- gerous projectiles if the side air bag inflates.

Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side air bags.

Do not put any objects between the side airbag label and seat cushion. It could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the air bags to deploy.

Do not cause impact to the doors when the POWER but- ton is in the ON position or this may cause the side air bags to inflate.

If the seat or seat cover is damaged, have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OAE036041

OAE036042

2-52

Safety system of your vehicle

They are designed to help protect the heads of the front seat occupants and the rear outboard seat occupants in certain side impact collisions. The curtain air bags are designed to deploy only during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity. The side and curtain air bags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy if a rollover or possible rollover is detected. The curtain air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situations.

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating curtain air bags, take the follow- ing precautions: All seat occupants must wear

seat belts at all times to help keep occupants positioned properly.

(Continued)

(Continued) Properly secure child

restraints as far away from the door as possible.

Do not place any objects over the air bag. Also, do not attach any objects around the area the air bag inflates such as the door, side door glass, front and rear pillar, roof side rail.

Do not hang other objects except clothes, especially hard or breakable objects. In an accident, it may cause vehicle damage or personal injury.

Do not allow passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window, or place objects between the doors and seats.

(Continued)

(Continued) Do not open or repair the side

curtain air bags.

WARNING

2-53

Safety system of your vehicle

2

How Does the Air Bag System Operate?

The SRS consists of the following components: 1. Driver's front air bag module/

Drivers knee airbag module 2. Passenger's front air bag module 3. Side air bag modules/

Side impact sensors 4. Curtain air bag modules 5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies 6. Air bag warning light 7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/

Rollover sensor 8. Front impact sensors

9. Side pressure sensors 10. Emergency Fastening Device

System 11. Occupant classification system

The SRSCM (Supplemental Restraint System Control Module) continually monitors all SRS components while the POWER button is in the ON posi- tion to determine if a crash impact is severe enough to require air bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat belt deployment.

SRS warning light

The SRS (Supplement Restraint System) air bag warning light on the instrument panel displays the air bag symbol depicted in the illustration. The system checks the air bag elec- trical system for malfunctions. The light indicates that there is a potential malfunction with your air bag system, which could include your side and curtain air bags used for rollover pro- tection.

OAEE036075N

2-54

Safety system of your vehicle

During a frontal collision, sensors will detect the vehicle's deceleration. If the rate of deceleration is high enough, the control unit will inflate the front air bags. The front air bags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which seat belts alone cannot pro- vide adequate restraint. When need- ed, the side air bags help provide protection in the event of a side impact or rollover. Air bags are activated (able to

inflate if necessary) only when the POWER button is in the ON posi- tion.

Air bags inflate in the event of cer- tain frontal or side collisions to help protect the occupants from serious physical injury.

Generally, air bags are designed to inflate based upon the severity of a collision, its direction, etc. These two factors determine whether the sensors produce an electronic deployment/inflation signal.

Air bag deployment depends on a number of factors including vehicle speed, angles of impact and the density and stiffness of the vehicles or objects which your vehicle impacts during a collision. The determining factors are not limited to those mentioned above.

The front air bags will completely inflate and deflate in an instant. It is virtually impossible for you to see the air bags inflate during an acci- dent. It is much more likely that you will simply see the deflated air bags hanging out of their storage com- partments after the collision.

In addition to inflating in certain side collisions, vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side and curtain air bags will inflate if the sensing system detects a rollover. When a rollover is detected, side and curtain air bags will remain inflated longer to help provide pro- tection from ejection, especially when used in conjunction with the seat belts.

If your SRS malfunctions, the air bag may not inflate properly dur- ing an accident increasing the risk of serious injury or death. If any of the following condi- tions occur, your SRS is mal- functioning: The light does not turn on for

approximately six seconds when the POWER button is in the ON position.

The light stays on after illumi- nating for approximately six seconds.

The light comes on while the vehicle is in motion.

The light blinks when the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode.

Have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect the SRS as soon as possible if any of these con- ditions occur.

WARNING

2-55

Safety system of your vehicle

2

To help provide protection, the air bags must inflate rapidly.The speed of air bag inflation is a consequence of extremely short time in which to inflate the air bag between the occupant and the vehicle structures before the occupant impacts those structures. This speed of inflation reduces the risk of serious or life- threatening injuries and is thus a necessary part of air bag design. However, the rapid air bag inflation can also cause injuries which can include facial abrasions, bruises and broken bones because the inflation speed also causes the air bags to expand with a great deal of force.

There are even circumstances under which contact with the air bag can cause fatal injuries, espe- cially if the occupant is positioned excessively close to the air bag.

You can take steps to help reduce the risk of being injured by an inflat- ing air bag. The greatest risk is sitting too close to the air bag. An air bag needs about 10 inches (25 cm) of space to inflate. NHTSA recom- mends that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest.

When the SRSCM detects a suffi- ciently severe impact to the front of the vehicle, it will automatically deploy the front air bags.

OHM039102N

Drivers front air bag (1)

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating air bag, take the following pre- cautions: NEVER place a child restraint

in the front passenger seat. Always properly restrain chil- dren under age 13 in the rear seats of the vehicle.

Adjust the front passengers and driver's seats as far to the rear as possible while allow- ing you to maintain full con- trol of the vehicle.

Hold the steering wheel with hands at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions.

Never place anything or any- one between the air bag and the seat occupant.

Do not allow the front passen- ger to place their feet or legs on the dashboard.

WARNING

2-56

Safety system of your vehicle

Upon deployment, tear seams mold- ed directly into the pad covers will separate under pressure from the expansion of the air bags. Further opening of the covers allows full inflation of the air bags. A fully inflated air bag, in combina- tion with a properly worn seat belt, slows the driver or the front passen- ger forward motion, reducing the risk of head and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the air bag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibili- ty and the ability to steer or operate other controls.

OHM039103N

Drivers front air bag (2)

OHM039104N

Drivers front air bag (3)

OLMB033057

Passengers front air bag

To prevent objects from becom- ing dangerous projectiles when the passenger's air bag inflates: Do not install or place any

objects (drink holder, CD holder, stickers, etc.) on the front passenger's panel above the glove box where the pas- senger's air bag is located.

Do not install a container of liquid air freshener near the instrument cluster or on the instrument panel surface.

WARNING

2-57

Safety system of your vehicle

2

What to Expect After an Air Bag Inflates After a frontal or side air bag inflates, it will deflate very quickly. Air bag inflation will not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer. Curtain air bags may remain partially inflated for some time after they deploy.

Noise and smoke from inflating air bag When the air bags inflate, they make a loud noise and may produce smoke and powder in the air inside of the vehicle. This is normal and is a result of the ignition of the air bag inflator. After the air bag inflates, you may feel substantial discomfort in breathing because of the contact of your chest with both the seat belt and the air bag, as well as from breathing the smoke and powder. The powder may aggravate asthma for some people. If you experience breathing problems after an air bag deploy- ment, seek medical attention imme- diately. Though the smoke and powder are nontoxic, they may cause irritation to the skin, eyes, nose, throat, etc. If this is the case, wash and rinse with cold water immediately and seek medical attention if the symptoms persist.

(Continued) Always wash exposed skin

areas thoroughly with cold and mild soap.

Always have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace the air bag immediately after deployment. Air bags are designed to be used only once.

After an air bag inflates, take the following precautions: Open your windows and doors

as soon as possible after impact to reduce prolonged exposure to the smoke and powder released by the inflat- ing air bag.

Do not touch the air bag stor- age area's internal compo- nents immediately after an air bag has inflated. The parts that come into contact with an inflating air bag may be very hot.

(Continued)

WARNING

2-58

Safety system of your vehicle

Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Your vehicle is equipped with an Occupant Classification System (OCS) in the front passenger's seat.

Main components of the Occupant Classification System A detection device located within

the front passenger seat cushion. Electronic system to determine

whether the passenger air bag systems should be activated or deactivated.

An indicator light located on the instrument panel which illuminates the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicating the front passen- ger air bag system is deactivated.

The instrument panel air bag indi- cator light is interconnected with the OCS.

The OCS is designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated front passenger and determine if the pas- senger's front air bag should be enabled (may inflate) or not. The purpose is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflat- ing air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be automati- cally turned OFF.

For example, if a child restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat, the occupant classification sensor can detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF. Front passenger seat adult occu- pants who are properly seated and wearing the seat belt properly, should not cause the passenger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat properly (for exam- ple, by not sitting upright, by sitting on the edge of the seat, or by other- wise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. You will find the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator on the center facia panel. This system detects the conditions 1-4 in the following table and activates or deactivates the front passenger air bag based on these conditions.

OAEE036040N

2-59

Safety system of your vehicle

2

Always be sure that you and all vehi- cle occupants are seated properly and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the air bag and the seat belt. The OCS may not function properly if the passenger takes actions which can affect the classification system. These include: Failing to sit in an upright position. Leaning against the door or center

console. Sitting towards the sides of the

front of the seat. Putting their legs on the dashboard

or resting them on other locations which reduce the passenger weight on the front seat.

Wearing the seat belt improperly. Reclining the seatback. Wearing a thick cloth like ski wear

or hip protection wear. Putting an additional thick cushion

on the seat. Putting electrical devices (e.g.

notebook, satellite radio) on the seat with inverter charging.

Condition and operation in the front passenger Occupant Classification System

Condition detected by the occupant classification system

Indicator/Warning light Devices

"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator light

SRS warning light

Front passenger air bag

1. Adult *1 Off Off Activated

2. Infant *2 or child restraint system with 12 months old *3 *4

On Off Deactivated

3. Unoccupied On Off Deactivated

4. Malfunction in the system Off On Activated

*1 The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

*2 Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a larger child who has out- grown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending upon his/her physique or sitting position.

*3 Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. *4 The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above 12 months

to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the front passenger seat. This is a normal condition.

2-60

Safety system of your vehicle

Riding in an improper position or placing weight on the front passengers seat when it is unoccupied by a passenger adversely affects the OCS. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death:

WARNING

OVQ036013NB

OLMB033100

OLMB033101

OLMB033103

OLMB033102

OLMB033104

NEVER put a heavy load in the front seat or seatback pocket, or hang any items on the front passenger seat.

NEVER place your feet on the front passenger seat- back.

NEVER sit with your hips shifted towards the front of the seat.

NEVER ride with the seat- back reclined when the vehicle is moving.

NEVER place your feet or legs on the dashboard.

NEVER lean on the door or center console or sit on one side of the front pas- senger seat.

(continued)

2-61

Safety system of your vehicle

2

ODH035900K

ODH035901K

ODH035902K

ODH035903K

Do not sit on the passen- ger seat wearing heavily padded clothes such as ski wear and hip protector.

Do not use car seat accessories such as thick blankets and cushions which cover up the car seat surface.

Do not place electronic devices such as laptops, DVD player, or conductive materials such as water bottles on the passenger seat.

Do not use electronic devices such as laptops and satellite radios which use inverter chargers.

If large quantity of liquid has been spilled on the passenger seat, the air bag warning light may illuminate or malfunction. Therefore, make sure the seat has been completely dried before driving the vehicle.

Do not place sharp objects on the front passenger seat.These may damage the occupant detection sys- tem, if they puncture the seat cushion.

Do not place any items under the front passenger seat. When changing or replacing the seat or seat cover, use original items only. The OCS has been devel-

oped based on using original HYUNDAI car seats only. Altering or changing the authentic parts may result in system malfunction and increase risk of injury when in collision. Any of the above could inter- fere with the proper operation of the OCS sensor thereby increasing the risk of an injury in an accident.

(continued)

2-62

Safety system of your vehicle

Proper seated position for OCS

If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator is on when an adult is seat- ed in the front passenger seat, place the POWER button in the OFF posi- tion and ask the passenger to sit properly (sitting upright with the seat back in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor). Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in that position. This will allow the system to detect the person and to enable the passenger air bag. If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator is still on, ask the passen- ger to move to the rear seat.

The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator illuminates for approxi- mately 4 seconds after the POWER button is in the ON position or after the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode. If the front passenger seat is occupied, the OCS will then classi- fy the front passenger after several more seconds.

Do Not Install a Child Restraint in the Front Passenger's Seat

Even though your vehicle is equipped with the OCS, never install a child restraint in the front passengers seat. An inflating air bag can forcefully strike a child or child restraint result- ing in serious or fatal injury.NOTICE

B990A01O

Never allow an adult passenger to ride in the front passenger seat when the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator is illuminat- ed. During a collision, the air bag will not inflate if the indicator is illuminated. Have your passen- ger reposition himself in the seat. If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator remains illu- minated after the passenger repositions himself properly and the vehicle is restarted, have the passenger move to the rear seat because the air bag will not inflate.

WARNING

1JBH3051

2-63

Safety system of your vehicle

2

Why Didn't My Air Bag Go Off in a Collision? Air bags are not designed to inflate in every collision. There are certain types of accidents in which the air bag would not be expected to provide additional protection. These include rear impacts, second or third colli- sions in multiple impact accidents, as well as low speed impacts. Damage to the vehicle indicates a collision energy absorption, and is not an indi- cator of whether or not an air bag should have inflated.

Air bag collision sensors

NEVER place a rear-facing or front-facing child restraint in the front passengers seat of the vehicle.

An inflating frontal air bag could forcefully strike a child resulting in serious injury or death.

Always properly restrain chil- dren in an appropriate child restraint in the rear seat of the vehicle.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of an air bag deploying unexpectedly and causing serious injury or death: Do not hit or allow any objects

to impact the locations where air bags or sensors are installed.

Do not perform maintenance on or around the air bag sen- sors. If the location or angle of the sensors is altered, the air bags may deploy when they should not or may not deploy when they should.

Do not install bumper guards or replace the bumper with a non-genuine HYUNDAI parts. This may adversely affect the collision and air bag deploy- ment performance.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued) Place the POWER button in

the OFF or ACC position when the vehicle is being towed to prevent inadvertent air bag deployment.

Have all air bag repairs conduct- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

2-64

Safety system of your vehicle

1. SRS control module/Rollover sensor

2. Front impact sensor

3. Side pressure sensor

4. Side impact sensor

OAEE036005N/OAE036044/OAEE036006N/OAE036046/OAE036047

2-65

Safety system of your vehicle

2

Air bag inflation conditions

Front air bags

Front air bags and the drivers knee air bag are designed to inflate in a frontal collision depending on the the severity of impact of the front colli- sion.

Side and curtain air bags

Side and curtain air bags are designed to inflate when an impact is detected by side collision sensors depending on the severity of impact resulting from a side impact collision.

Although the drivers and front pas- sengers air bags are designed to inflate only in frontal collisions, they also may inflate in other types of col- lisions if the front impact sensors detect a sufficient impact. Side and curtain air bags are designed to inflate only in side impact collisions or rollover situations, but they may inflate in other collisions if the side impact sensors detect a sufficient impact. If the vehicle chassis is impacted by bumps or objects on unimproved roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive carefully on unimproved roads or on surfaces not designed for vehicle traffic to prevent unintended air bag deployment.

OAEE036007

OAE036050

OAE036048

2-66

Safety system of your vehicle

Air bag non-inflation conditions

In certain low-speed collisions the air bags may not deploy. The air bags are designed not to deploy in such cases because they may not provide benefits beyond the protection of the seat belts.

Front air bags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions, because occupants are moved backward by the force of the impact. In this case, inflated air bags would not provide any additional benefit.

Front air bags may not inflate in side impact collisions, because occupants move in the direction of the collision, and thus in side impacts, front air bag deployment would not provide addi- tional occupant protection. However, side and curtain air bags may inflate depending on the severi- ty of impact.

OAE036052

OAE036051

OAEE036008

2-67

Safety system of your vehicle

2

In an angled collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in a direction where the air bags would not be able to provide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not deploy any air bags.

Just before impact, drivers often brake heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the front portion of the vehicle causing it to "ride" under a vehicle with a higher ground clearance. Air bags may not inflate in this "under- ride" situation because deceleration forces that are detected by sensors may be significantly reduced by such "underride" collisions.

Front air bags may not inflate in rollover accidents because air bag deployment could not provide protec- tion to the occupants. However, side and curtain air bags may inflate when the vehicle is rolled over by a side impact collision.

OAE036061 OAE036054 OAE036055

2-68

Safety system of your vehicle

Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is concentrated and the colli- sion energy is absorbed by the vehi- cle structure.

SRS Care The SRS is virtually maintenance- free and there are no parts you can safely service by yourself. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illumi- nate when the POWER button is in the ON position, or continuously remains on, have your vehicle imme- diately inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. Any work on the SRS system, such as removing, installing, repairing, or any work on the steering wheel, the front passenger's panel, front seats and roof rails must be performed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. Improper handling of the SRS system may result in serious personal injury.

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death, take the follow- ing precautions: Do not attempt to modify or

disconnect the SRS compo- nents or wiring, including the addition of any kind of badges to the pad covers or modifica- tions to the body structure.

Do not place objects over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, or the front passen- gers panel above the glove box.

Clean the air bag pad covers with a soft cloth moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the air bag covers and proper deployment of the sys- tem.

Always have inflated air bags replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

WARNING

OAEE036009L

2-69

Safety system of your vehicle

2

Additional Safety Precautions Passengers should not move out of or change seats while the vehicle is moving. A passenger who is not wearing a seat belt during a crash or emergency stop can be thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against other occupants, or be ejected from the vehicle. Do not use any accessories on seat belts. Devices claiming to improve occupant comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the protection provided by the seat belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash Do not modify the front seats. Modification of the front seats could interfere with the operation of the sup- plemental restraint system sensing components or side air bags. Do not place items under the front seats. Placing items under the front seats could interfere with the opera- tion of the supplemental restraint sys- tem sensing components and wiring harnesses. Do not cause impact to the doors. Impact to the doors when the POWER button is in the ON position may cause the air bags to inflate.

Modifications to accommodate disabilities. If you require modifica- tion to your vehicle to accommodate a disability, contact the HYUNDAI Customer Connect Center at 1-877- 378-8727.

Adding equipment to or modify- ing your air bag equipped vehicle If you modify your vehicle by changing your vehicles frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet metal or ride height, this may affect the operation of your vehicles air bag system.

(Continued) If components of the air bag

system must be discarded, or if the vehicle must be scrapped, certain safety precautions must be observed. Consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for the necessary information. Failure to follow these precau- tions could increase the risk of personal injury.

Air Bag Warning Labels

Air bag warning labels, required by the U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), are attached to alert the driver and pas- sengers of potential risks of the air bag system. Be sure to read all of the information about the air bags that are installed on your vehicle in this Owners Manual.

Safety system of your vehicle

2-70

OAD035053N

Convenient features of your vehicle

Accessing Your Vehicle .........................................3-3 Smart Key............................................................................3-3 Immobilizer System ...........................................................3-8

Door Locks..............................................................3-9 Operating Door Locks from Outside the Vehicle......3-9 Operating Door Locks from Inside the Vehicle .......3-10 Auto Door Lock/Unlock Features...............................3-12 Child-Protector Rear Door locks ................................3-12

Theft-Alarm System............................................3-13 Driver Position Memory System........................3-14

Storing Positions into Memory ..................................3-14 Recalling positions from memory ...............................3-15 Easy Access Function ....................................................3-15

Steering Wheel .....................................................3-16 Electric Power Steering (EPS) .....................................3-16 Tilt Steering / Telescope Steering..............................3-16 Horn....................................................................................3-17 Heated Steering Wheel (for Canada).........................3-17

Mirrors...................................................................3-18 Inside Rearview Mirror ..................................................3-18 Side View Mirrors ...........................................................3-34 Reverse Parking Aid Function......................................3-37

Windows ................................................................3-38 Power Windows...............................................................3-39

Sunroof..................................................................3-42 Sunroof Opening and Closing ......................................3-43 Sliding the Sunroof.........................................................3-43 Tilting the Sunroof .........................................................3-44 Sunshade...........................................................................3-44 Resetting the Sunroof ...................................................3-45

Exterior Features.................................................3-46 Hood ...................................................................................3-46 Liftgate ..............................................................................3-48 Charging Door..................................................................3-50

Instrument Cluster ...............................................3-51 Instrument Cluster Control............................................3-52 Gauges and Meters ........................................................3-52 Warning and Indicator lights ........................................3-58 LCD Display Messages...................................................3-68

LCD Display...........................................................3-80 LCD Display Control ........................................................3-80 LCD Display Modes.........................................................3-81

Trip Computer .......................................................3-90 Light .......................................................................3-94

Exterior Lights .................................................................3-94 Interior Lights...................................................................3-99 Welcome System...........................................................3-102

3

Wipers and Washers..........................................3-103 Windshield Wipers ........................................................3-103 Windshield Washers .....................................................3-104

Driver Assist System .........................................3-105 Rear View Camera ........................................................3-105

Defroster.............................................................3-106 Rear Window Defroster ..............................................3-106

Automatic Climate Control System..................3-107 Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning.................3-108 Manual Heating and Air Conditioning......................3-109 System Operation .........................................................3-117 System Maintenance....................................................3-118

Windshield Defrosting and Defogging............3-120 To Defog Inside Windshield........................................3-120 To Defrost Outside Windshield..................................3-121 Defogging Logic ............................................................3-121 Auto Defogging System ..............................................3-121

Climate Control Additional Features ...............3-123 Automatic Ventilation...................................................3-123

Storage Compartment .......................................3-123 Center Console Storage ..............................................3-123 Glove Box........................................................................3-124 Sunglass Holder.............................................................3-124 Multi Box.........................................................................3-125

Interior Features ................................................3-125 Cup Holder ......................................................................3-125 Sunvisor...........................................................................3-126 Power Outlet ..................................................................3-127 Wireless Cellular Phone Charging System..............3-128 Clock.................................................................................3-129 Clothes Hanger ..............................................................3-130 Floor Mat Anchor(s).....................................................3-130 Cargo Security Screen.................................................3-131

3

3-3

Convenient features of your vehicle

Smart Key

Your HYUNDAI uses a Smart Key, which you can use to lock or unlock a door (and liftgate) and even start the vehicle. 1. Door Lock 2. Door Unlock 3. Liftgate Unlock 4. Panic

Locking

To lock : 1. Close all doors, hood and liftgate. 2. Either press the door handle but-

ton or press the Door Lock button (1) on the smart key.

3. The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound once. Also, the outer side view mirror will fold, if the side view mir- ror folding switch is in the AUTO position (if equipped).

4. Make sure the doors are locked by checking the position of the door lock button inside the vehicle.

Information The door handle button will only operate when the smart key is within 28~40 inches (0.7~1 m) from the out- side door handle.

Even though you press the outside door handle button, the doors will not lock and the chime will sound for three seconds if any of the following occur: The Smart Key is in the vehicle. The POWER button is in ACC or

ON position. Any door except the liftgate is

open.

i ACCESSING YOUR VEHICLE

3

OAE046029 OAE046001

Do not leave the Smart Key in your vehicle with unsupervised children. Unattended children could press the POWER button and may operate power win- dows or other controls, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in serious injury or death.

WARNING

3-4

Convenient features of your vehicle

Unlocking

To unlock: 1. Carry the Smart Key. 2. Either press the driver's outside

door handle button or press the Door Unlock button (2) on the smart key.

3. The driver's door will unlock. The hazard warning lights will blink two times. Also, the outer side view mirror will unfold, if the side view mirror folding switch is in the AUTO position (if equipped). If you press the driver's outside door handle button or Door Unlock button on the smart key again within four seconds, then all the doors will unlock. Two press unlock setting: Two press unlock setting can be changed according to owner's preference. Select or deselect the 'Two Press Unlock' menu in the User Settings mode on the LCD display (User Settings Door and select or deselect Two Press Unlock).

Information The door handle button will only

operate when the smart key is with- in 28~40 inches (0.7~1 m) from the outside door handle and other peo- ple can also open the doors.

If you press the front passenger's outside door handle, while carrying the Smart Key, all doors will unlock.

After unlocking the doors, the doors will lock automatically after 30 sec- onds unless a door is opened.

Either the driver or front passenger door can be opened with the door handle button when the smart key is within this range.

i

OAE046001

3-5

Convenient features of your vehicle

Liftgate unlocking To open: 1. Carry the smart key. 2. Either press the liftgate handle

button or press and hold the Liftgate Unlock button (3) on the smart key for more than one sec- ond.

3. The hazard warning lights will blink two times.

Once the liftgate is opened and then closed, the liftgate will lock automati- cally.

Information The liftgate handle button will only operate when the smart key is within 28 inches (0.7 m) from the liftgate handle.

Panic button Press and hold the Panic button (4) for more than one second. The horn sounds and hazard warning lights blink for about 30 seconds. To cancel the panic mode, press any button on the Smart Key.

Start-up You can start the vehicle without inserting the key.

For more information, refer to the "Power Button" section in chapter 5.

To prevent damaging the smart key: Keep the smart key away from

any liquid or fire. Internal circuits may malfunction if the inside of the smart key gets damp (from liquids or moisture) or if it is heat- ed. This can exclude the smart key from warranty coverage.

Avoid dropping or throwing the smart key.

Protect the smart key from extreme temperatures.

Always have the smart key with you when leaving the vehicle. If the smart key is left near the vehi- cle, the vehicle battery may be dis- charged.

NOTICE

NOTICE i

3

3-6

Mechanical key

If the Smart Key does not operate normally, you can lock or unlock the door by using the mechanical key. Press and hold the release button (1) and remove the mechanical key (2). Insert the mechanical key into the key hole on the door. To reinstall the mechanical key, put the key into the hole and push it until a click sound is heard.

Loss of a smart key A maximum of two Smart Keys can be registered to a single vehicle. If you happen to lose your smart key, you should immediately take the vehicle and remaining keys to your authorized HYUNDAI dealer or tow the vehicle, if necessary.

Smart key precautions The smart key will not work if any of the following occur: The smart key is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the trans- mitter.

The smart key is near a mobile two way radio system or a cellular phone.

Another vehicle's smart key is being operated close to your vehicle.

When the smart key does not work correctly, open and close the door with the mechanical key. If you have a problem with the smart key, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

If the smart key is in close proximity to your mobile phone, the signal could be blocked by your mobile phones normal operational signals. This is especially important when the phone is active such as making and receiving calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails. Avoid placing the smart key and your mobile phone in the same pants or jacket pocket and always try to main- tain an adequate distance between the two devices.

Convenient features of your vehicle

Keep the smart key away from electromagnetic materials that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.

CAUTION OAEE046001

3-7

Convenient features of your vehicle

Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following three conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter- ference received, including interfer- ence that may cause undesired operation.

3. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

Battery replacement

If the Smart Key is not working prop- erly, try replacing the battery with a new one. Battery Type: CR2032 To replace the battery: 1. Pry open the rear cover of the

smart key. 2. Remove the old battery and insert

the new battery. 3. Reinstall the rear cover of the

smart key.

If you suspect your smart key might have sustained some damage, or you feel your smart key is not work- ing correctly, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Information An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) and regulation(s).

i

i

3

OLF044008

3-8

Convenient features of your vehicle

Immobilizer System (if equipped) The immobilizer system helps pro- tects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is used, the power system is disabled. When the POWER button is placed in the ON position, the immobilizer sys- tem indicator should come on briefly, then go off. If the indicator starts to blink, the system does not recognize the coding of the key. Place the POWER button to the OFF position, then place the POWER button to the ON position again. The system may not recognize your keys coding if another immobilizer key or other metal object (i.e., key chain) is near the key. The vehicle may not start because the metal may interrupt the transponder signal from transmitting normally. If the system repeatedly does not recognize the coding of the key, it is recommended that you contact your HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems could result that may make your vehicle inoperable.

The transponder in your key is an important part of the immobilizer system. It is designed to give years of trouble-free service, how- ever you should avoid exposure to moisture, static electricity and rough handling. Immobilizer sys- tem malfunction could occur.

Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following three conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

3. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the device.

i

NOTICE

In order to prevent theft of your vehicle, do not leave spare keys anywhere in your vehicle. Your immobilizer password is a cus- tomer unique password and should be kept confidential.

WARNING

3-9

Convenient features of your vehicle

Operating Door Locks from Outside the Vehicle Mechanical key

To remove the cover: 1. Pull out the door handle (1). 2. Press the lock (2) located inside

the bottom part of the cover with a key or flat-head screwdriver.

3. Push out the cover while pressing the lock.

To install the cover: 1. Pull out the door handle. 2. Install the cover.

If you lock the drivers door with a mechanical key, all vehicle doors will lock. If you unlock the drivers door with a mechanical key, the driver's door will unlock and the passenger doors will unlock according to the current two press unlock setting. Once the doors are unlocked, they may be opened by pulling the door handle. When closing the door, push the door by hand. Make sure that doors are closed securely.

Smart key

Press the button on the drivers out- side door handle while carrying the Smart Key with you or press the Door Unlock button on the Smart Key, the drivers door will unlock. If you press the button on the front passengers outside door, all doors will unlock.

DOOR LOCKS

3

OAEE046188N

Lock

Unlock

OAE046001

OLF044003

Door Unlock

Door Lock

3-10

Convenient features of your vehicle

Once the doors are unlocked, they may be opened by pulling the door handle. When closing the door, push the door by hand. Make sure that doors are closed securely.

Information In cold and wet climates, door lock

and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

If the door is locked/unlocked multi- ple times in rapid succession with either the vehicle key or door lock switch, the system may stop operat- ing temporarily in order to protect the circuit and prevent damage to system components.

Two press unlock setting can be changed with the smart key or in the User Settings mode on the cluster.

Operating Door Locks from Inside the Vehicle With the door lock button

To unlock a door, pull the door lock button (1) to the "Unlock" position. The red mark (2) on the door lock button will be visible.

To lock a door, push the door lock button (1) to the "Lock" position. If the door is locked properly, the red mark (2) on the door lock button will not be visible.

To open a door, pull the door han- dle (3) outward.

If the inner door handle of the dri- ver's (or front passenger's) door is pulled when the door lock button is in the lock position, the button is unlocked and door opens.

Doors cannot be locked if the smart key is in the vehicle and any door is open.

Information If a power door lock ever fails to func- tion while you are in the vehicle try one or more of the following tech- niques to exit:

Operate the door unlock feature repeatedly (both electronic and manual) while simultaneously pulling on the door handle.

Operate the other door locks and handles, front and rear.

Lower a front window and use the mechanical key to unlock the door from outside.

i

i

OAE046004

Unlock

Lock

3-11

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

With the central door lock switch

When pressing the ( ) switch (1), all vehicle doors will lock. When pressing the ( ) switch (2), all vehicle doors will unlock. If the smart key is in the vehicle and any door is opened, the doors will not lock even though the lock button (1) of the central door lock switch is pressed.

Drivers door

OAE046005/OAEE046509N

Passengers door The doors should always be fully closed and locked while the vehicle is in motion. If the doors are unlocked, the risk of being thrown from the vehicle in a crash is increased.

Do not pull the inner door handle of driver's or passen- ger's door while the vehicle is moving.

WARNING

Do not leave children or animals unattended in your vehicle. An enclosed vehicle can become extremely hot, causing death or serious injury to unattended children or animals who cannot escape the vehicle. Children might operate features of the vehicle that could injure them, or they could encounter other harm, possibly from someone gaining entry to the vehicle.

WARNING

Always secure your vehicle. Leaving your vehicle unlocked increases the potential risk to you or others from someone hiding in your vehicle. To secure your vehicle, while depressing the brake, shift to the P (Park) position, engage the parking brake, and place the POWER button in the OFF posi- tion, close all windows, lock all doors, and always take the key with you.

WARNING

If you stay in the vehicle for a long time while the weather is very hot or cold, there are risks of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when someone is in the vehicle.

WARNING

3-12

Convenient features of your vehicle

Auto Door Lock/Unlock Features Impact sensing door unlock All doors will be automatically unlocked when an impact causes the air bags to deploy.

Speed sensing door lock All doors will be automatically locked (when set on cluster) when vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph (15 km/h). All of the doors will be automatically unlocked after the vehicle is turned off.

Shift lever auto door lock All doors will be automatically locked when shifted out of P (Park) with the vehicle in the ready ( ) mode.

You can activate or deactivate the Auto Door Lock/Unlock features from the User Settings mode on the LCD display.

For more information, refer to the "LCD Display" section in this chapter.

Child-Protector Rear Door locks

The child safety lock is provided to help prevent children seated in the rear from accidentally opening the rear doors.The rear door safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle. The child safety lock is located on the edge of each rear door. When the child safety lock is in the lock posi- tion, the rear door will not open if the inner door handle is pulled.

OAEE046002N

Opening a door when something is approaching may cause dam- age or injury. Be careful when opening doors and watch for vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles or pedestrians approaching the vehicle in the path of the door.

CAUTION

3-13

Convenient features of your vehicle

To lock the child safety lock, insert a key (or screw driver) (1) into the hole and turn it to the lock position. To allow a rear door to be opened from inside the vehicle, unlock the child safety lock.

This system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables. The horn will sound and the hazard warning lights will blink continuously if any of the following occurs: - A door is opened without using the

smart key. - The liftgate is opened without

using the smart key. - The hood is opened. The alarm continues for 30 seconds, then the system resets. To turn off the alarm, unlock the doors with the smart key. The Theft Alarm System automati- cally sets 30 seconds after you lock the doors and the liftgate. For the system to activate, you must lock the doors and the liftgate from outside the vehicle with the smart key or by pressing the button on the outside of the door handles with the smart key in your possession. The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound once to indicate the system is armed.

Once the security system is set, opening any door, the liftgate, or the hood without using the smart key will cause the alarm to activate. The Theft Alarm System will not set if the hood, the liftgate, or any door is not fully closed. If the system will not set, check the hood, the liftgate, or the doors are fully closed. Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it.

Information Do not lock the doors until all pas-

sengers have left the vehicle. If the remaining passenger leaves the vehicle when the system is armed, the alarm will be activated.

If the vehicle is not disarmed with the smart key, open the doors by using the mechanical key and start the vehicle ( indicator ON) by directly pressing the POWER button with the smart key.

When the system is disarmed but a door or liftgate is not opened within 30 seconds, the system will be rearmed.

i

3 If children accidently open the rear doors while the vehicle is in motion, they could fall out of the vehicle.The rear door safety locks should always be used whenever children are in the vehicle.

WARNING

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM

3-14

Convenient features of your vehicle

The Driver Position Memory System is provided to store and recall the fol- lowing memory settings with a sim- ple button operation. - Drivers seat position - Side view mirror position - Instrument panel illumination intensity If the battery is disconnected, the position memory will be lost and the driving positions must be stored in the system again. If the Driver Position Memory System does not operate normally, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Storing Positions into Memory 1. Shift to P (Park) while the POWER

button is in the ON position. 2. Adjust the driver's seat position,

side view mirror position and instrument panel illumination intensity to positions comfortable for the driver.

3. Press the SET button. The system will beep once and notify you "Press button to save settings" on the LCD display.

4. Press one of the memory buttons (1 or 2) within 4 seconds. The sys- tem will beep twice when the mem- ory has been successfully stored.

5. "Driver 1 (or 2) settings saved" will appear on the LCD display.

DRIVER POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OAE046036L

Never attempt to operate the driv- er position memory system while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of con- trol, and an accident causing death, serious injury, or property damage.

WARNING

3-15

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Recalling positions from mem- ory 1. Shift to P (Park) while the POWER

button is in the ON position. 2. Press the desired memory button

(1 or 2). The system will beep once, and then the drivers seat position, side view mirror position and instrument panel illumination intensity will automatically adjust to the stored positions.

3. "Driver 1(or 2) settings is applied" will appear on the LCD display.

While recalling the "1" memory position, pressing the SET or 1 button temporarily stops the adjustment of the recalled memo- ry position. Pressing the 2 button recalls the "2" memory position.

While recalling the "2" memory position, pressing the SET or 2 button temporarily stops the adjustment of the recalled memo- ry position. Pressing the 1 button recalls the "1" memory position.

While recalling the stored posi- tions, pressing one of the con- trol buttons for the drivers seat, side view mirror or instrument panel illumination will cause the movement of that component to stop and move in the direction that the control button is pressed.

Easy Access Function When exiting the vehicle the drivers seat will move rearward when the vehicle is turned off, and the gear in P (Park). When entering the vehicle the dri- ver's seat will move forward when the smart key is detected with the POWER button in the ACC/ON/ START position. You can activate or deactivate the Easy Access Function from the User Settings mode on the LCD display.

For more information, refer to the "LCD Display" section in this chapter.

NOTICE

3-16

Convenient features of your vehicle

STEERING WHEEL Electric Power Steering (EPS) The system assists you with steering the vehicle. If the vehicle is turned off or if the power steering system becomes inoperative, you may still steer the vehicle, but it will require increased steering effort. Should you notice any change in the effort required to steer during normal vehicle operation, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Information The following symptoms may occur during normal vehicle operation:

The steering effort may be high immediately after placing the POWER button in the ON position.

This happens as the system performs the EPS system diagnostics. When the diagnostics is completed, the steering wheel will return to its nor- mal condition.

A click noise may be heard from the EPS relay after the POWER button is in the ON or OFF position.

Motor noise may be heard when the vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving speed.

When you operate the steering wheel in low temperature, abnormal noise may occur. If temperature rises, the noise will disappear. This is a normal condition.

When an error is detected from the EPS, the assistant function of steer- ing effort will not be activated in order to prevent fatal accidents. Instrument cluster warning lights may be on or the steering effort may be high. When the following symp- toms occur, immediately drive the vehicle to a safe area and check it.

Tilt Steering / Telescope Steering Adjust the steering wheel so it points toward your chest, not toward your face. Make sure you can see the instrument cluster warning lights and gauges. After adjusting, push the steering wheel both up and down to be certain it is locked in position. Always adjust the position of the steering wheel before driving.

i

If the Electric Power Steering System does not operate nor- mally, the warning light ( ) will illuminate on the instrument cluster. You may steer the vehi- cle, but it will require increased steering efforts. Take your vehi- cle to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked as soon as possible.

CAUTION NEVER adjust the steering wheel while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

WARNING

3-17

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

To change the steering wheel angle and height: 1. Pull down the lock-release lever (1). 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the

desired angle (2) and height (3). 3. Pull up the lock-release lever to

lock the steering wheel in place.

Information After adjustment, sometimes the lock release lever may not lock the steering wheel. It is not a malfunction. This occurs when two gears are not engaged correctly. In this case, adjust the steering wheel again and then lock the steering wheel.

Horn

To sound the horn, press the area indicated by the horn symbol on your steering wheel (see illustration). The horn will operate only when this area is pressed.

Do not strike the horn severely to operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do not press on the horn with a sharp-pointed object.

Heated Steering Wheel (for Canada, if equipped)

When the POWER button is in the ON position or when the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode, press the heated steering wheel button to warm the steering wheel. The indica- tor on the button will illuminate. To turn the heated steering wheel off, press the button again. The indicator on the button will turn off. The heated steering wheel will auto- matically turn off after approximately 30 minutes.

NOTICE i

OAEE046014

OAE046009

OAEE046003N

3-18

Do not install any cover or acces- sory on the steering wheel. The cover or accessory could cause damage to the heated steering wheel system.

Inside Rearview Mirror Before you start driving, adjust the rearview mirror to the center on the view through the rear window.

When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

NOTICE

NOTICE

Convenient features of your vehicle

Make sure your line of sight is not obstructed. Do not place objects in the rear seat, cargo area, or behind the rear head- rests which could interfere with your vision through the rear window.

WARNING

NEVER adjust the mirror while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

WARNING

To prevent serious injury during an accident or deployment of the air bag, do not modify the rearview mirror and do not install a wide mirror.

WARNING

MIRRORS

3-19

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Day/night rearview mirror (if equipped)

Make this adjustment before you start driving and while the day/night lever is in the day position. Pull the day/night lever toward you to reduce glare from the headlights of the vehicles behind you during night driving. Remember that you lose some rearview clarity in the night position.

Blue Link center (if equipped)

For details, refer to the Blue Link

Owners Guide, Navigation Manual or Audio Manual.

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with HomeLink system, compass and Blue Link

(for U.S.A) Your vehicle may be equipped with a Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror with a Z-Nav Electronic Compass Display and an Integrated HomeLink

Wireless Control System. During nighttime driving, this feature will automatically detect and reduce rearview mirror glare while the com- pass indicates the direction the vehi- cle is pointed. The HomeLink

Universal Transceiver allows you to activate your garage door(s), electric gate, home lighting, etc.

OAD045011N

OAE046010 Day

Night

3-20

Convenient features of your vehicle

(1) Telematics button (2) Telematics button (3) Telematics button (4) Compass control button &

Dimming ON/OFF button (5) Status indicator LED (6) Channel 1 button (7) Channel 2 button (8) Channel 3 button (9) Compass display (10) Rear light sensor

Automatic-Dimming Night Vision Safety (NVS) Mirror (if equipped)

The NVS Mirror automatically reduces glare by monitoring light lev- els in the front and the rear of the vehicle. Any object that obstructs either light sensor will degrade the automatic dimming control feature.

For more information regarding NVS mirrors and other applica- tions, please refer to the Gentex website: www.gentex.com

Your mirror will automatically dim upon detecting glare from the vehi- cles traveling behind you. The auto- dimming function can be controlled by pressing the Dimming ON/OFF button:

1. Pressing and holding the button for 3 seconds turns the auto-dim- ming function OFF which is indi- cated by the green Status Indicator LED turning off.

2. Pressing and holding the button for 3 seconds again turns the auto- dimming function ON which is indi- cated by the green Status Indicator LED turning on.

The mirror defaults to the ON posi- tion each time the vehicle is started.

Z-Nav Compass Display

The NVS Mirror in your vehicle is also equipped with a Z-Nav Compass that shows the vehicle Compass heading in the Display Window using the 8 basic cardinal headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).

OAD045045N

3-21

Convenient features of your vehicle

Compass function The Compass can be turned ON and OFF and will remember the last state when the vehicle is cycled. To turn the display feature ON/OFF: 1. Press and release the button

within 1 second to turn the display feature OFF.

2. Press and release the button again within 1 second to turn the display back ON.

Additional options can be set with press and hold sequences of the button and are detailed below.

There is a difference between mag- netic north and true north. To com- pensate for this difference you will need to adjust the Zone setting based on where you live.

3

B520C05NF

3-22

Convenient features of your vehicle

To adjust the Zone setting: 1. Determine the desired Zone

Number based upon your current location on the Zone Map.

2. Press and hold the button for 6 seconds, the current Zone Number will appear on the display.

3. Pressing and holding the button again will cause the numbers to increment (Note: they will repeat 13, 14, 15, 1, 2, ). Releasing the button when the desired Zone Number appears on the display will set the new Zone.

4. Within about 5 seconds the com- pass will start displaying a com- pass heading again.

There are some conditions that can cause changes to the vehicle mag- nets, such as installing a ski rack or a CB antenna. Body repair work on the vehicle can also cause changes to the vehicles magnetic field. In these situations, the compass will need to be re-calibrated to quickly correct these changes.

If you need to recalibrate the com- pass: 1. Press and hold the button for

more than 9 seconds. When the compass memory is cleared a "C" will appear in the display.

2. Drive the vehicle in 2 complete cir- cles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Integrated HomeLink Wireless Control System

The HomeLink Wireless Control System can replace up to three hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters with a single built-in device. This innovative feature will learn the radio frequency codes of most current transmitters to operate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems, even home lighting. Both standard and rolling code-equipped transmitters can be programmed by following the out- lined procedures. Additional HomeLink information can be found at: www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515. Retain the original transmitter of the RF device you are programming for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink programming. It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes.

3-23

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Programming HomeLink

Please note the following: When programming a garage door

opener, it is advised to park the vehicle outside of the garage.

It is recommended that a new bat- tery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being pro- grammed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

Some vehicles may require the POWER button to be placed in the ACC (or "Accessories") position for programming and/or operation of HomeLink.

In the event that there are still pro- gramming difficulties or questions after following the programming steps listed below, contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

Programming

To train most devices, follow these instructions: 1. For first-time programming, press

and hold the two outside buttons ( , ), HomeLink Channel 1 and Channel 3, until the indicator light begins to flash (after 10 sec- onds). Release both buttons. Do not hold the buttons for longer than 20 seconds.

ODH044413N

FlashingBefore programming HomeLink

to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. Do not use the HomeLink with any garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse features required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that can- not detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse - does not meet current U.S. feder- al safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death.

WARNING

3-24

Convenient features of your vehicle

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink and hand- held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid blinking light. Now you may release both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons.

Information Some devices may require you to replace this Programming step 3 with procedures noted in the "Gate Operator/Canadian Programming" chapter. If the HomeLink indicator light does not change to a rapidly blinking light after performing these steps, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com.

4. Press and hold for 5 seconds and release the programmed HomeLink

button up to two separate times to activate the door. If the door does not activate, press and hold the just- trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light. If the indicator light stays on con-

stantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released.

If the indicator light blinks rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns to a constant light, continue with "Programming" steps 5-7 to com- plete the programming of a rolling code equipped device (most com- monly a garage door opener).

5. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the "learn" or "smart" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit.

i

ODH044414N

Flashing

3-25

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

6. Firmly press and release the "learn" or "smart" button. (The name and color of the button vary by manufacturer). There are 30 seconds to initiate step 7.

7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for 2 seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button. Repeat the "press/hold/release" sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming process.

HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device.

Gate operator & Canadian program- ming During programming, your handheld transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press the Integrated HomeLink Wireless Control System button (note steps 2 through 3 in the Programming portion of this document) while you press and re-press ("cycle") your handheld transmitter every two seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful training.

Operating HomeLink

To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security sys- tem, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.

Reprogramming a single HomeLink

button To program a device to HomeLink

using a HomeLink button previously trained, follow these steps: 1. Press and hold the desired

HomeLink button. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with "Programming" step 2.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.

3-26

Convenient features of your vehicle

Erasing HomeLink buttons Individual buttons cannot be erased. However, to erase all three pro- grammed buttons: 1. Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink buttons until the indi- cator light begins to flash after 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.

The Integrated HomeLink Wireless Control System is now in the training (learn) mode and can be pro- grammed at any time following the appropriate steps in the Programming chapters above.

NVS is a registered trademark and Z-Nav is a trademark of the Gentex Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan. HomeLink is a registered trademark owned by Johnson Controls, Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin. FCC ID: NZLTLMHL4 IC: 4112A-TLMHL4

Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following three conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter- ference received, including interfer- ence that may cause undesired operation.

3. The transceiver has been tested and complies with FCC and Industry Canada rules. Changes or modifica- tions not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with compass and HomeLink

system (for Canada) Your vehicle may be equipped with a Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror with a Z-Nav Electronic Compass Display and an Integrated HomeLink

Wireless Control System. During nighttime driving, this feature will automatically detect and reduce rearview mirror glare while the com- pass indicates the direction the vehi- cle is pointed. The HomeLink

Universal Transceiver allows you to activate your garage door(s), electric gate, home lighting, etc.

i

3-27

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

(1) Channel 1 button (2) Channel 2 button (3) Status indicator LED (4) Channel 3 button (5) Rear light sensor (6) Dimming ON/OFF button (7) Compass control button (8) Compass display

Automatic-Dimming Night Vision Safety (NVS) Mirror (if equipped)

The NVS Mirror automatically reduces glare by monitoring light lev- els in the front and the rear of the vehicle. Any object that obstructs either light sensor will degrade the automatic dimming control feature.

For more information regarding NVS mirrors and other applica- tions, please refer to the Gentex website: www.gentex.com

The auto-dimming function can be controlled by pressing the ON/OFF button:

1. Pressing the button turns the auto- dimming function OFF which is indicated by the green Status Indicator LED turning off.

2. Pressing the button again turns the auto-dimming function ON which is indicated by the green Status Indicator LED turning on.

The mirror defaults to the ON posi- tion each time the vehicle is started.

Z-Nav Compass Display

The NVS Mirror in your vehicle is also equipped with a Z-Nav Compass that shows the vehicle Compass heading in the Display Window using the 8 basic cardinal headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).

OAD045046N

3-28

Convenient features of your vehicle

B520C05NF

Compass function The Compass can be turned ON and OFF and will remember the last state when the vehicle is cycled. To turn the display feature ON/OFF: 1. Press and release the button to

turn the display feature OFF. 2. Press and release the button

again to turn the display back ON. Additional options can be set with press and hold sequences of the but- ton and are detailed below.

There is a difference between mag- netic north and true north. To com- pensate for this difference you will need to adjust the Zone setting based on where you live.

3-29

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

To adjust the Zone setting: 1. Determine the desired Zone

Number based upon your current location on the Zone Map.

2. Press and hold the button for more than 3 but less than 6 sec- onds, the current Zone Number will appear on the display.

3. Pressing and holding the button again will cause the numbers to increment (Note: they will repeat 13, 14, 15, 1, 2, ). Releasing the button when the desired Zone Number appears on the display will set the new Zone.

4. Within about 5 seconds the com- pass will start displaying a com- pass heading again.

There are some conditions that can cause changes to the vehicle mag- nets, such as installing a ski rack or a CB antenna. Body repair work on the vehicle can also cause changes to the vehicles magnetic field. In these situations, the compass will need to be re-calibrated to quickly correct these changes.

If you need to recalibrate the com- pass: 1. Press and hold the button for

more than 6 seconds. When the compass memory is cleared a "C" will appear in the display.

2. Drive the vehicle in 2 complete cir- cles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

3-30

Convenient features of your vehicle

Integrated HomeLink Wireless Control System

The HomeLink Wireless Control System can replace up to three hand- held radio-frequency (RF) transmit- ters with a single built-in device. This innovative feature will learn the radio frequency codes of most current transmitters to operate devices such as gate operators, garage door open- ers, entry door locks, security sys- tems, even home lighting. Both stan- dard and rolling code-equipped trans- mitters can be programmed by fol- lowing the outlined procedures. Additional HomeLink information can be found at: www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515. Retain the original transmitter of the RF device you are programming for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink programming. It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes.

Programming HomeLink

Please note the following: When programming a garage door

opener, it is advised to park the vehicle outside of the garage.

It is recommended that a new bat- tery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being pro- grammed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

Some vehicles may require the POWER button to be placed in the ACC (or "Accessories") position for programming and/or operation of HomeLink.

In the event that there are still pro- gramming difficulties or questions after following the programming steps listed below, contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

Before programming HomeLink

to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. Do not use the HomeLink with any garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse features required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that can- not detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse - does not meet current U.S. feder- al safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death.

WARNING

3-31

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Rolling code programming Rolling code devices which are "code-protected" and manufactured after 1996 may be determined by the following: Reference the device owner's

manual for verification. The handheld transmitter appears to

program the HomeLink Universal Transceiver but does not activate the device.

Press and hold the trained HomeLink button. The device has the rolling code feature if the indi- cator light flashes rapidly and then turns solid after 2 seconds.

To train rolling code devices, follow these instructions: 1. At the garage door opener receiv-

er (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the "learn" or "smart" but- ton. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit. Exact location and color of the but- ton may vary by garage door opener brand. If there is difficulty locating the training button, refer- ence the device owners manual or please visit our Web site at www.homelink.com.

2. Firmly press and release the "learn" or "smart" button (which activates the "training light"). You will have 30 seconds to initiate step 3.

3. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and then release the desired HomeLink button. Repeat the "press/hold/release" sequence a second time to complete the pro- gramming. (Some devices may require you to repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming.)

4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink button and observe the red Status Indicator LED. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate.

5. To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, follow either steps 1 through 4 above for other Rolling Code devices or steps 2 through 5 in Standard Programming for standard devices.

3-32

Convenient features of your vehicle

Standard programming To train most devices, follow these instructions: 1. For first-time programming, press

and hold the two outside buttons, HomeLink Channel 1 and Channel 3 Buttons, until the indi- cator light begins to flash (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons. Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm) away from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink and hand- held transmitter button. DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed.

4. While continuing to hold the but- tons the red Indicator Status LED will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink successfully trains to the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons.

5. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink button and observe the red Status Indicator LED. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released.

6. To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, follow steps 2 through 5.

Gate operator & Canadian program- ming During programming, your handheld transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press the Integrated HomeLink Wireless Control System button (note steps 2 through 4 in the Standard Programming portion of this docu- ment) while you press and re-press ("cycle") your handheld transmitter every two seconds until the frequen- cy signal has been learned. The indi- cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful training.

Operating HomeLink

To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security sys- tem, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.

3-33

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Reprogramming a single HomeLink button To program a new device to a previ- ously trained HomeLink button, fol- low these steps: 1. Press and hold the desired

HomeLink button. Do NOT release until step 4 has been com- pleted.

2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after 20 seconds), position the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 inches away from the HomeLink surface.

3. Press and hold the handheld transmitter button. The HomeLink

indicator light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.

4. When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly, release both buttons.

5. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink button and observe the red Status Indicator LED. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your new device should activate.

Erasing HomeLink buttons Individual buttons cannot be erased. However, to erase all three pro- grammed buttons: 1. Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink buttons until the indi- cator light begins to flash-after 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds.

The Integrated HomeLink Wireless Control System is now in the training (learn) mode and can be pro- grammed at any time following the appropriate steps in the Programming chapters above.

NVS is a registered trademark and Z-Nav is a trademark of the Gentex Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan. HomeLink is a registered trademark owned by Johnson Controls, Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin. FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3 IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3

Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following three conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

3. The transceiver has been tested and complies with FCC and Industry Canada rules. Changes or modifica- tions not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the device.

i

3-34

Convenient features of your vehicle

Side View Mirrors

Be sure to adjust mirror angles before driving. Your vehicle is equipped with both left-hand and right-hand side view mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted remotely with the remote switch. The mirror heads can be folded to pre- vent damage during an automatic car wash or when passing through a narrow street. The right side view mirror is convex. Objects seen in the mirror are closer than they appear.

Use your interior side view mirror or direct observation to determine the actual distance of following vehicles when changing lanes.

Do not scrape ice off the mirror face; this may damage the sur- face of the glass.

If the mirror is jammed with ice, do not adjust the mirror by force. Use an approved spray de-icer (not radiator antifreeze) spray, or a sponge or soft cloth with very warm water, or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

Blind spot mirror

The Blind Spot Mirror (BSM) is a supplemental mirror that reduces the drivers blind spot by showing the rear side area of the vehicle. The blind spot mirror is equipped on the left-hand side view mirror.

NOTICE

OLF044477N

OLF044478N

Do not adjust or fold the side view mirrors while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle con- trol resulting in an accident.

WARNING

OAE046013

3-35

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Do not clean the mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products.

Side view mirror control

Adjusting the side mirrors: 1. Press either the L (driver's side) or

R (passenger's side) button (1) to select the side view mirror you would like to adjust.

2. Use the mirror adjustment control switch to position the selected mir- ror up, down, left or right.

3. After adjustment, put the button into neutral (center) position to prevent inadvertent adjustment.

The mirrors stop moving when they reach the maximum adjust- ing angles, but the motor contin- ues to operate while the switch is pressed. Do not press the switch longer than necessary, the motor may be damaged.

Do not attempt to adjust the side view mirrors by hand or the motor may be damaged.

NOTICE

NOTICE

Always check the road condi- tion while driving for unex- pected situations even though the vehicle is equipped with a blind spot mirror.

The blind spot mirror is a device made for convenience. Do not solely rely on the mir- ror but always pay attention to traffic around you.

WARNING

OAE046014

3-36

Convenient features of your vehicle

Folding the side view mirrors

Manual type (if equipped)

To fold the side view mirrors, grasp the housing of the mirror and then fold it toward the rear of the vehicle.

Electric type (if equipped)

Left : The mirror will unfold. Right : The mirror will fold. Center (AUTO) : The mirror will fold or unfold automatically as follows: - The mirror will fold or unfold when

the door is locked or unlocked by the smart key.

- The mirror will fold or unfold when the door is locked or unlocked by the button on the outside door han- dle.

The electric type outside rearview mirror operates even though the POWER button is in the OFF posi- tion. However, to prevent unnec- essary battery discharge, do not adjust the mirrors longer than necessary while the vehicle is not in the ready ( ) mode.

Do not fold the electric type side view mirror by hand. It could cause motor failure.

NOTICE

NOTICE

OAE046015

OAE046016

3-37

Convenient features of your vehicle

Reverse Parking Aid Function (if equipped)

When you shift the vehicle to R (Reverse) position, the side view mir- ror(s) will rotate downwards to aid with driving in reverse. The position of the side view mirror switch (1) determines whether or not the mir- rors will move: Left/Right : When either the L (Left) or

R (Right) switch is select- ed, both side view mirrors will move.

Neutral : When neither switch is select- ed, the side view mirrors will not move.

The side view mirrors will automati- cally revert to their original positions if any of the following occur: The POWER button is placed to

either the OFF position or the ACC position.

The vehicle is shifted to any posi- tion except R (Reverse).

The remote control side view mir- ror switch is not selected.

3

OAEE046512N

3-38

Convenient features of your vehicle

(1) Drivers door power window switch

(2) Front passengers door power window switch

(3) Rear door (left) power window switch

(4) Rear door (right) power window switch

(5) Window opening and closing (6) Automatic power window (7) Power window lock switch

WINDOWS

OAEE046508N

3-39

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Power Windows The POWER button must be in the ON position to be able to raise or lower the windows. Each door has a Power Window switch to control that doors window. The driver has a Power Window Lock switch which can block the operation of passenger windows. The power windows will operate for approximately 30 sec- onds after the POWER button is placed in the ACC or OFF position. However, if the front doors are opened, the Power Windows cannot be operated even within the 30 sec- ond period.

Information In cold and wet climates, power win-

dows may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

While driving with the rear win- dows down or with the sunroof (if equipped) opened (or partially opened), your vehicle may demon- strate a wind buffeting or pulsation noise. This noise is normal and can be reduced or eliminated by taking the following actions. If the noise occurs with one or both of the rear windows down, partially lower both front windows approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm). If you experience the noise with the sunroof open, slightly close the sunroof.

Window opening and closing

To open: Press the window switch down to the first detent position (5). Release the switch when you want the window to stop.

To close: Pull the window switch up to the first detent position (5). Release the win- dow switch when you want the win- dow to stop.

i

To avoid serious injury or death, do not extend your head, arms or body outside the windows while driving.

WARNING

OAE046020

3-40

Convenient features of your vehicle

Auto up/down window (if equipped) Pressing or pulling up the power win- dow switch momentarily to the sec- ond detent position (6) completely lowers or lifts the window even when the switch is released. To stop the window at the desired position while the window is in operation, pull up or press down and release the switch.

To reset the power windows If the power windows do not operate normally, the automatic power win- dow system must be reset as follows: 1. Place the POWER button to the

ON position. 2. Close the window and continue

pulling up on the power window switch for at least one second.

If the power windows do not operate properly after resetting, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Automatic reverse (if equipped)

If a window senses any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will stop and lower approximately 12 inches (30 cm) to allow the object to be cleared. If the window detects the resistance while the power window switch is pulled up continuously, the window will stop upward movement then lower approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm). If the power window switch is pulled up continuously again within 5 sec- onds after the window is lowered by the automatic window reverse fea- ture, the automatic window reverse will not operate.

OLF044032

The automatic reverse feature doesn't activate while resetting power window system. Make sure body parts or other objects are safely out of the way before closing the windows to avoid injuries or vehicle damage.

WARNING

3-41

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Information The automatic reverse feature is only active when the "Auto Up" feature is used by fully pulling up the switch to the second detent.

Do not install any accessories on the windows. The automatic reverse feature may not operate.

Power window lock switch

The driver can disable the power window switches on the rear passen- ger's doors by pressing the power window lock switch. When the power window lock switch is pressed: The driver's master control can

operate all the power windows. The front passenger's control can

operate the front passenger's power window.

The rear passenger's control can- not operate the rear passenger's power window.

To prevent possible damage to the power window system, do not open or close two windows or more at the same time. This will also ensure the longevity of the fuse.

Never try to operate the main switch on the driver's door and the individual door window switch in opposite directions at the same time. If this is done, the window will stop and cannot be opened or closed.

NOTICE

NOTICE

i

OAE046021

Do not allow children to play with the power windows. Keep the driver's door power window lock switch in the LOCK posi- tion. Serious injury or death can result from unintentional win- dow operation by a child.

WARNING

Make sure body parts or other objects are safely out of the way before closing the windows to avoid injuries or vehicle damage. Objects less than 0.16 inch (4 mm) in diameter caught between the window glass and the upper win- dow channel may not be detected by the automatic reverse window and the window will not stop and reverse direction.

WARNING

3-42

Convenient features of your vehicle

If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the sunroof control switch located on the overhead con- sole. The sunroof can be opened, closed, or tilted when the POWER button is in the ON position. The sunroof can be operated for approximately 30 seconds after the POWER button is in the ACC or OFF position. However, if the front door is opened, the sunroof cannot be operated even within 30 seconds.

Information In cold and wet climates, the sun-

roof may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

After the vehicle is washed or in a rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before operating it.

Do not continue to move the sunroof control lever after the sunroof is fully opened, closed, or tilted. Damage to the motor or system components could occur.

Make sure the sunroof is closed fully when leaving your vehicle. If the sunroof is open, rain or snow may leak through the sun- roof and wet the interior as well as cause theft.

NOTICE

i SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

OAD045022

Never adjust the sunroof or sunshade while driving. This could result in loss of control and an accident that may cause death, serious injury, or property damage.

Make sure heads, other body parts or objects are out of the way before using the sunroof.

Do not extend your head, arms or body outside the sun- roof while driving, to avoid serious injury.

(Continued)

(Continued) Do not leave the engine run-

ning and the key in your vehi- cle with unsupervised chil- dren. Unattended children could operate the sunroof, which could result in serious injury.

Do not sit on the top of the vehicle. It may cause injuries or vehicle damage.WARNING

3-43

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Sunroof opening and closing

To open: Press the sunroof control lever back- ward to the first detent position. Release the switch when you want the sunroof to stop. To close: Press the sunroof control lever forward to the first detent position. Release the switch when you want the sunroof to stop.

Sliding the sunroof Pressing the sunroof control lever backward or forward momentarily to the second detent position complete- ly opens or closes the sunroof even when the switch is released. To stop the sunroof at the desired position while the sunroof is in operation, press the sunroof control lever back- ward or forward and release the switch.

Information To minimize wind noise while driving, it is recommended that you drive with the sunroof slightly closed (stop the sunroof about 3 inch (7 cm) before the maximum slide open position).

Automatic reverse (if equipped)

If the sunroof senses any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will reverse direction then stop to allow the object to be cleared. The auto reverse function does not work if a small obstacle is between the sliding glass and the sunroof sash. You should always check that all pas- sengers and objects are away from the sunroof before closing it.

iOAD045023 OLFC044035CN

3-44

Convenient features of your vehicle

Tilting the sunroof

Tilt the sunroof open: Push the sunroof control lever upward until the sunroof moves to the desired position.

To close the sunroof: Push the sunroof control lever forward until the sunroof moves to the desired position.

Sunshade

The sunshade will open automatical- ly with the sunroof when the glass panel moves. If you want it closed, move the sunshade manually.

The sunroof is made to slide together with the sunshade. Do not leave the sunshade closed while the sunroof is open.

NOTICE

OAD045024

Small objects that can get caught between the sunroof glass and the front glass chan- nel may not be detected by the automatic reverse system. In this case, the sunroof glass will not detect the object and will not reverse direction.

WARNING

OAD045037

3-45

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Resetting the sunroof Sunroof needs to be reset if the fol- lowing occurs : - Battery is discharged or discon-

nected or the related fuse has been replaced or disconnected

- The one-touch sliding function of the sunroof does not normally oper- ate

Reset procedure : 1. Place the POWER button to the

ON position or start the vehicle ( indicator ON). It is recom- mended to reset the sunroof while the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode.

2. Push the control lever forward.The sunroof will close completely or tilt depending on the condition of the sunroof.

3. Release the control lever when the sunroof stops moving.

4. Push the control lever forward about 10 seconds. - When the sunroof is in the closed

position : The glass will tilt and slightly move up and down.

- When the sunroof is in the tilt position: The glass will slightly move up and down.

Do not release the lever until the operation is completed. If you release the lever during opera- tion, start the procedure again from step 2.

5. Within 3 seconds, push and hold the control lever forward until the sunroof operates as follows:

Tilt down Slide Open Slide Close.

Do not release the lever until the operation is completed. If you release the lever during opera- tion, start the procedure again from step 2.

6. Release the sunroof control lever after all steps have completed. (The sunroof system has been reset.)

Information If the sunroof is not reset when the

vehicle battery is disconnected or discharged, or the sunroof fuse is blown, the sunroof may not operate normally.

For more detailed information, con- tact an authorized HYUNDAI deal- er.

i

3-46

Convenient features of your vehicle

Hood Opening the hood

1. Park the vehicle and set the park- ing brake.

2. Pull the release lever to unlatch the hood. The hood should pop open slightly.

3. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the hood slightly, push up the sec- ondary latch (1) inside of the hood center and lift the hood (2).

4. Pull out the support rod and hold the hood open with the support rod (1).

EXTERIOR FEATURES

OAEE046011

OAEE046005 OAD045039

3-47

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Closing the hood 1. Before closing the hood, check the

following: All filler caps in motor compart-

ment must be correctly installed. Gloves, rags or any other com-

bustible material must be removed from the motor com- partment.

2. Lower the hood halfway (lifted approximately 12 inches (30 cm) from the closed position) and push down to securely lock in place. Then double check to be sure the hood is secure. If the hood can slightly be raised, it is not secure- ly locked. Open it again and close it with more force.

Before closing the hood, ensure all obstructions are removed from around hood opening.

Always double check to be sure that the hood is firmly latched before driving away. Check there is no hood open warning light or message dis- played on the instrument clus- ter. Driving with the hood opened may cause a total loss of visibility, which might result in an accident.

Do not move the vehicle with the hood in the raised posi- tion, as vision is obstructed, which might result in an acci- dent, and the hood could fall or be damaged.

WARNING

Grasp the support rod in the area wrapped in rubber. The rubber will help prevent you from being burned by hot metal when the parts in the motor compartment is hot.

The support rod must be inserted completely into the hole provided whenever you inspect the motor compart- ment. This will prevent the hood from falling and possi- bly injuring you.

WARNING

3-48

Convenient features of your vehicle

Liftgate Opening the liftgate

1. Make sure the vehicle is in P (Park).

2. Then do one of the following : - Press the button on the liftgate

itself with the Smart Key in your possession.

- Press the Smart Key Liftgate Unlock button for more than one second.

Closing the liftgate

Lower the liftgate lid and press down until it locks. To be sure the liftgate lid is securely fastened, always check by trying to pull it up again.

In cold and wet climates, door lock and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing con- ditions.

NOTICE

OAEE046007

The liftgate swings upward. Make sure no objects or people are near the rear of the vehicle when opening the liftgate.

WARNING

Make certain that you close the liftgate before driving your vehi- cle. Possible damage may occur to the liftgate lift cylinders and attached hardware if the liftgate is not closed prior to driving.

CAUTION OAEE046006

3-49

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Emergency liftgate safety release

Your vehicle is equipped with an Emergency Liftgate Safety Release lever located inside the liftgate. When someone is inadvertently locked in the luggage compartment, the lift- gate can be opened manually from inside the luggage compartment by performing the following steps : 1. Input the mechanical key into the

hole. 2. Push the mechanical key to the

right. 3. Push up the liftgate.

OAEE046008

For emergencies, be fully aware of the location of the emergency liftgate safety release lever in this vehicle and how to open the liftgate if you are accidentally locked in the luggage compartment.

No one should be allowed to occupy the luggage compart- ment of the vehicle at any time. The luggage compartment is a very dangerous location in the event of a crash.

Use the release lever for emergencies only. Use extreme caution, especially while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING

Do not hold the part (gas lifter) that supports the liftgate. Be aware that the deformation of the part may cause vehicle damage and a risk of safety accident.

WARNING

OHYK047009

3-50

Convenient features of your vehicle

Charging Door Opening the charging door

The charging door must be opened from inside the vehicle by pushing the charging door open button. 1.Depress the brake pedal and apply

the parking brake. 2.Turn OFF all switches, shift to P

(Park), and turn OFF the vehicle. 3.Press the charging door open but-

ton ( ) to open the charging door.

Closing the charging door 1. After recharging, install the charg-

ing inlet cover. 2. Close the charging door until it is

latched securely.

For more details, refer to the Electric Vehicle Guide provided in the front of the owners manual.

Unlock Charging Door in Emergency

If the charging door does not open due to battery discharge and failure of the electric wires, open the liftgate and slightly pull the emergency cable as shown above. The charging door will then open.

OAEE046010

OAEEQ016063N

3-51

Convenient features of your vehicle

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

3 1. ECO guide

2. Speedometer

3. Warning and indicator lights

4. LCD display (including Trip computer)

5. Battery SOC (State of Charge) gauge

OAEE047100N

The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

3-52

Convenient features of your vehicle

Instrument Cluster Control Adjusting instrument cluster illumination

When the vehicles parking lights or headlights are on, press the illumina- tion control button to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel illumination. When pressing the illumination con- trol button, the interior switch illumi- nation intensity is also adjusted.

The brightness of the instrument panel illumination is displayed.

If the brightness reaches the maxi- mum or minimum level, a chime will sound.

Gauges and Meters Speedometer

The speedometer indicates the speed of the vehicle and is calibrated in miles per hour (mph) and/or kilo- meters per hour (km/h).

OAE046113L

OAEE046412N

OAEE046196N

NORMAL/ECO mode selected

OAEE046501N

SPORT mode selected

3-53

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

The speedometer is displayed differ- ently according to the selected drive mode in the Drive Mode Integrated Control System. For more information, refer to Drive Mode Integrated Control System in chapter 5.

ECO guide

The ECO guide shows the energy consumption rate of the vehicle and the charge/discharge status of the regenerative brakes. POWER : It shows the energy consumption rate of the vehicle when driving uphill or accelerating. The more electric ener- gy is used, the higher the gauge level.

ECO : It shows the energy consumption rate during normal driving condition.

CHARGE : It shows the charging status of the battery when it is being charged by the regenerative brakes (decelerat- ing or driving on a downhill road). The more electric energy is charged, the lower the gauge level.

OAEQ046008

3-54

Convenient features of your vehicle

State of Charge (SOC) gauge for high voltage battery

The SOC gauge shows the charging status of the high voltage battery. "L (Low)" position on the indicator indicates that there is not enough energy in the high voltage battery. "H (High)" position indicates that the driving battery is fully charged. When driving on highways or motor- ways, make sure to check in advance if the driving battery is charged enough.

When there are 2~3 gauge bars (near the "L (Low)" area) on the SOC gauge, the warning lamp turns ON to alert you of the battery level. When the warning lamp turns ON, the vehicle can drive an additional 12~18 miles (20~30 km) depending on the driving speed, heater/air con- ditioner, weather, driving style, and other factors. Charging is required.

When there are 1-2 gauge bars left for the high voltage battery, the vehicle speed is limited and then eventually the vehicle will turn OFF. Charge the vehicle immediately.

NOTICE

OAEE046144

OAEE046102

3-55

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Odometer

The odometer indicates the total dis- tance that the vehicle has been driv- en and should be used to determine when periodic maintenance should be performed.

Distance to Empty

The distance to empty is the esti- mated distance the vehicle can be driven with remaining level of the high voltage battery. For more information, refer to "Distance to Empty" in the Electric Vehicle Guide.

The distance to empty is displayed differently according to the select- ed drive mode in the Drive Mode Integrated Control System. For more information, refer to "Drive Mode Integrated Control System" in chapter 5.

Outside temperature gauge

This gauge indicates the current out- side air temperatures by 1F (1C). - Temperature range : -40F ~ 140F

(-40C ~ 60C) The outside temperature on the dis- play may not change immediately like a general thermometer (to avoid distracting the driver). To change the temperature unit from F to C or C to F:

OAEE046154N OAEE046141N/OAEE046503N

NORMAL/ ECO mode selected

SPORT mode selected

OAEE046502N

3-56

Convenient features of your vehicle

- Go to User Settings Mode Other Features Temperature Unit.

- Press the AUTO button for 3 sec- onds while pressing the OFF button.

Both the temperature unit on the cluster LCD display and climate con- trol screen will change.

Gear shift indicator

This indicator displays which gear is selected.

Shift indicator pop-up (if equipped)

The pop-up displays the current gear position selected for 2 seconds (P/R/N/D).

OAEE046103

OAEE046104

3-57

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Regenerative braking rate indi- cator

While using the regenerative brakes, you may select the regenerative braking rate from 0 to 3 by pulling the paddle shifter.

For more information, refer to "Paddle Shifter (Regenerative Braking Control)" in chapter 5.

Icy road warning light (if equipped)

This warning light is to warn the driv- er the road may be icy. When the temperature on the out- side temperature gauge is approxi- mately below 40F (4C), the Icy Road Warning Light and Outside Temperature Gauge blinks, and then illuminates. Also, the warning chime is sound.

Information If the icy road warning light appears while driving, you should drive more attentively and safely refraining from over-speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden braking or sharp turning, etc.

i

OAEE056100L OAE046099L

3-58

Convenient features of your vehicle

Warning and Indicator lights

Information Make sure that all warning lights are OFF after starting the vehicle. If any light is still ON, this indicates a situa- tion that needs attention.

Ready Indicator

This indicator illuminates :

When the vehicle is ready to be driven. - ON : Normal driving is possible. - OFF : Normal driving is not possible,

or a problem has occurred. - Blinking : Emergency driving.

When the ready indicator goes OFF or blinks, there is a problem with the system. In this case, have your vehi- cle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Service Warning Light

This warning light illuminates :

When the POWER button is in the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off. When there is a problem with relat-

ed parts of the electric vehicle con- trol system, such as sensors, etc.

When the warning light illuminates while driving, or does not go OFF after starting the vehicle, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Power Down Warning Light

This warning light illuminates :

When the power is limited for the safety of the electric vehicle. The power is limited for the following reasons. - The high voltage battery level is

below a certain level or voltage is decreasing

- The temperature of the motor or high voltage battery is too high or too low

- There is a problem with the cooling system, or a failure that may inter- rupt normal driving

Do not accelerate or start the vehi- cle suddenly when the power down warning light is ON. Charge the battery immediately when the high voltage battery level is not enough.

NOTICE

i

3-59

Convenient features of your vehicle

Charging Indicator Light

This warning light illuminates :

[Red] When charging the high volt- age battery.

High Voltage Battery Low Level Warning Light

This warning light illuminates :

When the high voltage battery level is low. When the warning light turns ON, charge the battery immediately.

Supplemental Restraint System Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

When the POWER button is in the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 6

seconds and then goes off. When there is a malfunction with

the SRS. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Seat Belt Warning Light

This warning light informs the driver that the seat belt is not fastened.

For more information, refer to the "Seat Belts" in chapter 2.

Regenerative Brake Warning Light

This warning light illuminates :

When the regenerative brake does not operate and the brake does not perform well. This causes the Brake Warning light (red) and Regenerative Brake Warning Light (yellow) to illu- minate simultaneously. In this case, drive safely and have your vehicle inspected by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer. The operation of the brake pedal may be more difficult than normal and the braking distance can increase.

3

(yellow)

3-60

Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

When the POWER button is in the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds. - It remains on if the parking brake

is applied. When the parking brake is applied. When the brake fluid level in the

reservoir is low. - If the warning light illuminates

with the parking brake released, it indicates the brake fluid level in reservoir is low.

If the brake fluid level in the reser- voir is low:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle.

2. With the vehicle turned off, check the brake fluid level immediately and add fluid as required (For more information, refer to "Brake Fluid" in chapter 7). After adding brake fluid, check all brake compo- nents for fluid leaks. If a brake fluid leak is found, or if the warning light remains on, or if the brakes do not operate properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Dual-diagonal braking system

Your vehicle is equipped with dual- diagonal braking systems. This means you still have braking on two wheels even if one of the dual sys- tems should fail. With only one of the dual systems working, more than normal pedal travel and greater pedal pressure is required to stop the vehicle.

Also, the vehicle will not stop in as short a distance with only a portion of the brake system working.

Convenient features of your vehicle

Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Light

Driving the vehicle with a warn- ing light ON is dangerous. If the Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Light illuminates with the parking brake released, it indicates that the brake fluid level is low. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

3-61

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

When the POWER button is in the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off. When there is a malfunction with

the ABS (The normal braking sys- tem will still be operational without the assistance of the anti-lock brake system). In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) System Warning Light

These two warning lights illuminate at the same time while driving:

When the ABS and regular brake sys- tem may not work normally. In this case, have your vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Information - Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) System Warning Light

When the ABS Warning Light is on or both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on, the speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter may not work. Also, the EPS Warning Light may illuminate and the steering effort may increase or decrease.

In this case, have your vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) System Warning Light

When both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on, the brake system will not work normally and you may experience an unexpected and dangerous situation during sudden braking. In this case, avoid high speed driving and abrupt braking. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

3-62

Convenient features of your vehicle

Electric Power Steering (EPS) Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

When the POWER button is in the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off. When there is a malfunction with

the EPS. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Charging System Warning Light (for 12-volt battery)

This warning light illuminates:

When the 12-volt battery level is low or a failure occurs on the charging system such as LDC.

If the warning light turns on while driving, move the vehicle to a safe location, turn off and turn on the vehicle again, and check if the warning light turns off. If the warn- ing light remains on, have the vehi- cle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Even if the warning light turns off, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. If you drive the vehicle while the warning light is on, vehicle speed may be limited and the 12-volt bat- tery may be discharged.

LDC : Low voltage DC-DC Converter.

Low Tire Pressure Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

When the POWER button is in the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off. When one or more of your tires are

significantly underinflated (The location of each underinflated tire is displayed on the LCD display).

For more information, refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in chapter 6.

3-63

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

This warning light remains ON after blinking for approximately 60 seconds, or repeatedly blinks ON and OFF in 3 second intervals:

When there is a malfunction with the TPMS. In this case, have your vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

For more information, refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in chapter 6.

Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

When the POWER button is in the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off. When there is a malfunction with

the EPB. In this case, have the vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal- er.

Information The Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) Warning Light may illuminate when the Electronic Stability control (ESC) Indicator Light comes on to indicate that the ESC is not working properly (This does not indicate malfunction of the EPB).

AUTO HOLD Indicator Light

This indicator light illuminates:

[White] When you activate the auto hold system by pressing the AUTO HOLD switch.

[Green] When you stop the vehicle completely by depressing the brake pedal with the auto hold sys- tem activated.

[Yellow] When there is a malfunc- tion with the auto hold system. In this case, have the vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal- er.

For more information, refer to "Auto Hold" in chapter 5.

i Safe Stopping

The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tire damage caused by external factors.

If you notice any vehicle insta- bility, immediately take your foot off the accelerator pedal, apply the brakes gradually with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.

WARNING

EPB

3-64

Convenient features of your vehicle

Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB) Warning Light (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates :

When the POWER button is in the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off. When the AEB system is turned off. When the radar sensor or cover is

blocked with dirt or snow. Check the sensor and cover and clean them by using a soft cloth.

When there is a malfunction with AEB. In this case, have your vehi- cle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator Light (if equipped) This indicator light illuminates:

[Green] When you activate the lane departure warning system by pressing the LKAS button and all of the system operating conditions are satisfied.

[White] When system operating conditions are not satisfied or when the sensor does not detect the lane line.

[Yellow] When there is a malfunc- tion with the lane keeping assist system.

In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

For more information, refer to "Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)" in chapter 5.

LED Headlamp Warning Light (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

When the POWER button is in the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off. When there is a malfunction with

the LED headlamp. In this case, have the vehicle inspect- ed by an an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

This warning light blinks:

When there is a malfunction with a LED headlamp related part. In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Continuous driving with the LED Headlamp Warning Light on or blinking can reduce LED head- lamp life.

NOTICE

3-65

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFLS) Warning Light (if equipped)

This warning light blinks:

When the POWER button is in the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off. When there is a malfunction with

the AFLS.

If there is a malfunction with the AFLS:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle.

2. Turn the vehicle off and restart the vehicle ( indicator ON). If the warning light remains on, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Master Warning Light

This indicator light illuminates:

When there is a malfunction in oper- ation in any of the following systems: - Autonomous Emergency Braking

(AEB) malfunction (if equipped) - Advanced Smart Cruise Control

malfunction (if equipped) - Blind Spot Detection (BSD) mal-

function (if equipped) - Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) malfunction - Service reminder To identify the details of the warning, look at the LCD display.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light

This indicator light illuminates:

When the POWER button is in the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off. When there is a malfunction with

the ESC system. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

This indicator light blinks:

While the ESC is operating.

For more information, refer to "Electronic Stability Control (ESC)" in chapter 5.

AFLS

3-66

Convenient features of your vehicle

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light

This indicator light illuminates:

When the POWER button is in the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off. When you deactivate the ESC sys-

tem by pressing the ESC OFF but- ton.

For more information, refer to "Electronic Stability Control (ESC)" in chapter 5.

Immobilizer Indicator Light

This indicator light illuminates for up to 30 seconds:

When the vehicle detects the smart key in the vehicle with the POWER button in the ACC or ON position. - At this time, you can start the vehi-

cle ( indicator ON). - The indicator light goes off after

starting the vehicle ( indicator ON).

This indicator light blinks for a few seconds:

When the smart key is not in the vehicle. - At this time, you cannot start the

vehicle.

This indicator light illuminates for 2 seconds and goes off:

If the smart key is in the vehicle and the POWER button is ON, but the vehicle cannot detect the smart key. In this case, have your vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

This indicator light blinks:

When the battery voltage of the smart key is low. - At this time, you can not start the

vehicle. However, you can start the ( indicator ON) if you press the POWER button with the smart key. (For more information, refer to "Starting the vehicle" in chapter 5).

When there is a malfunction with the immobilizer system. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

3-67

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Turn Signal Indicator Light

This indicator light blinks:

When you operate the turn signal indicator.

If any of the following occurs, there may be a malfunction with the turn signal system.

- The turn signal indicator light illu- minates but does not blink

- The turn signal indicator light blinks rapidly

- The turn signal indicator light does not illuminate at all

If either of these conditions occur, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

High Beam Indicator Light

This indicator light illuminates:

When the headlights are on and in the high beam position.

When the turn signal lever is pulled into the Flash-to-Pass position.

Light ON Indicator Light

This indicator light illuminates:

When the tail lights or headlights are on.

Cruise Indicator Light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

When the cruise control system is enabled.

For more information, refer to "Cruise Control System" in chap- ter 5.

Cruise SET Indicator Light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

When the cruise control speed is set.

For more information, refer to "Cruise Control System" in chap- ter 5.

3-68

Convenient features of your vehicle

SPORT Mode Indicator Light

This indicator light illuminates:

When you select "SPORT" mode as drive mode.

For more information, refer to "Drive Mode Integrated Control System" in chapter 5.

ECO Mode Indicator Light

This indicator light illuminates :

When you select "ECO" mode as drive mode.

For more information, refer to "Drive Mode Integrated Control System" in this chapter.

LCD Display Messages Shift to P This warning message is displayed if you try to turn off the vehicle with the gear in the N (Neutral) position. At this time, the POWER button changes to the ACC position (If you press the POWER button once more, it will turn to the ON position).

Low Key Battery This warning message is displayed if the battery of the smart key is dis- charged while changing the POWER button to the OFF position.

3-69

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Press POWER button while turning wheel This warning message is displayed if the steering wheel does not unlock normally when the POWER button is pressed. You should press the POWER button while turning the steering wheel right and left.

Check Steering Wheel Lock System This warning message is displayed if the steering wheel does not lock nor- mally while the POWER button changes to the OFF position.

Press brake pedal to start vehicle This warning message is displayed if the POWER button changes to the ACC position twice by pressing the button repeatedly without depressing the brake pedal. You can start the vehicle by depress- ing the brake pedal.

Key not in vehicle This warning message is displayed if the smart key is not in the vehicle when you press the POWER button. When attempting to start the vehicle, always have the smart key with you.

Key not detected This warning message is displayed if the smart key is not detected when you press the POWER button.

Press POWER button again This message is displayed if you were unable to start the vehicle when the POWER button was pressed. If this occurs, attempt to start the vehicle by pressing the POWER but- ton again. If the warning message appears each time you press the POWER button, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

3-70

Convenient features of your vehicle

Press POWER button with key This warning message is displayed if you press the POWER button while the warning message "Key not detected" is displayed. At this time, the immobilizer indicator light blinks.

Check BRAKE SWITCH fuse This warning message is displayed if the brake switch fuse is disconnected. You need to replace the fuse with a new one before starting the vehicle. If that is not possible, you can start the vehicle by pressing the POWER but- ton for 10 seconds in the ACC posi- tion.

Shift to P to start vehicle This warning message is displayed if you try to start the vehicle without shifting to the P (Park) position.

Unplug vehicle to start

This message is displayed when you start the vehicle without unplugging the charging cable. Unplug the charg- ing cable, and then start the vehicle.

Low Washer Fluid (if equipped) This warning message is displayed if the washer fluid level in the reservoir is nearly empty. Have the washer fluid reservoir refilled.

Door / Hood / Liftgate open

This warning is displayed indicating which door, or the hood, or the lift- gate is open. If the door/hood/liftgate open warning message is blocked with another warning message, an icon will appear on the top of the LCD display.

OAEE046131L OAEE046113/OAE046181

3-71

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Sunroof open

This warning is displayed if you turn off the vehicle when the sunroof is open.

Turn on FUSE SWITCH

This warning message is displayed if the fuse switch under the steering wheel is OFF. If this message is displayed, turn the fuse switch on.

For more information, refer to "Fuses" in chapter 7.

Before driving the vehicle, you should confirm that the door/ hood/liftgate is fully closed. Also, check there is no door/ hood/liftgate open warning light or message displayed on the instrument cluster.

CAUTION

OAEE046114 OLFH044149L

3-72

Convenient features of your vehicle

Low Pressure

This warning message is displayed if the tire pressure is low. The corre- sponding tire on the vehicle will be illuminated.

For more information, refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in chapter 6.

Check headlight

This warning message is displayed if the headlamps are not operating properly. The headlamp bulb may need to be replaced.

Information Make sure to replace the burned out bulb with a new one of the same wattage rating.

For more information, refer to "Bulb Wattage" in chapter 8.

Check headlamp LED

This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with the LED headlamp. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i

OAEE046115N OAD045142L OAEE046119L

3-73

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Check headlamp FAN

This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with headlamp fan. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Lights Mode

This indicator displays which exterior light is selected using the lighting control.

Wiper

This indicator displays which wiper speed is selected using the wiper control.

OAEE046118L OAEE046504N OAE046118L

3-74

Convenient features of your vehicle

Shift to P to charge

This message is displayed if you connect the charging cable without the gear in the P (Park) position. Shift to P (Park) before connecting the charging cable.

Remaining time

This message is displayed to notify the remaining time to fully charge the battery.

Charging Door Open

This message is displayed when the vehicle is driven with the charging door opened. Close the charging door and then start driving.

OAEE046192L OAEE046193L OAEE046194L

3-75

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Charger Error! / Quick Charger Error!

This warning message is displayed when there is a problem with the charger.

Aux. Battery Saver+ used while parked

This message is displayed when the Aux. Battery Saver+ function has been completed.

For more information, refer to "Aux. Battery Saver+" in the Electric Vehicle Guide.

Stop vehicle and check brakes

This warning message is displayed when a failure occurs in the brake system. In this case, park the vehicle in a safe location and tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the vehicle inspected.

OAEE046134LOAEE046135L OAEE046143L

OLFH044234L

3-76

Check brakes

This warning message is displayed when the brake performance is low or the regenerative brake does not work properly due to a failure in the brake system. In this case, it may take longer for the brake pedal to operate and the brak- ing distance may become longer.

Low Battery

When the high voltage battery level reaches below 13%, this warning message is displayed. The warning light on the instrument cluster ( ) will turn ON simultane- ously. Charge the high voltage battery immediately.

Charge immediately. Power limited

When the high voltage battery level reaches below 5%, this warning message is displayed. The warning light on the instrument cluster ( ) and the power down warning light ( ) will turn on simul- taneously. The vehicle's power will be reduced to minimize the energy consumption of the high voltage battery. Charge the battery immediately.

Convenient features of your vehicle

OLFH044250L OAEE046123L

OAEE046125L

3-77

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Low Battery. Charge immediately

When the high voltage battery level reaches below 4%, this warning message is displayed. The warning light on the instrument cluster ( ) and the power down warning light ( ) will turn ON simul- taneously and the distance to empty gauge will be displayed as "---". The vehicle's power will be reduced to minimize the energy consumption of the high voltage battery. Charge the battery immediately.

Low Battery Temp. Power limited

This warning message is displayed to protect battery and electric vehicle system when the high voltage bat- tery temperature is too low.

If this warning message is still dis- played even after the ambient tem- perature has increased, have the vehicle inspected by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer.

Battery Overheated! Stop vehicle

This warning message is displayed to protect battery and electric vehicle system when the high voltage bat- tery temperature is too high. Turn off the POWER button and stop the vehicle so that the battery tem- perature decreases.

NOTICE

OAEE046124L

OAEE046128L OAEE046129L

3-78

Convenient features of your vehicle

Power limited

In the following cases, this warning message is displayed when the vehi- cles power is limited for safety. When the high voltage battery is

below a certain level, or voltage is decreasing.

When the temperature of the motor or high voltage battery is too high or too low.

When there is a problem with the cooling system or a failure that may interrupt normal driving.

When this warning message is displayed, do not accelerate or start the vehicle suddenly. Charge the battery immediately when the high voltage battery level is not enough.

Stop vehicle and check power supply

This warning message is displayed when a failure occurs in the power supply system. In this case, park the vehicle in a safe location and tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the vehicle inspect- ed.

NOTICE

OAEE046127L

OLFH044230L

3-79

Convenient features of your vehicle

Check Virtual Engine Sound System

This message is displayed when there is a problem with the Virtual Engine Sound System (VESS). In this case, have your vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Check electric vehicle system

This warning message is displayed when there is a problem with the electric vehicle control system. Refrain from driving when the warn- ing message is displayed. In this case, have your vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

3

OAEE046149L

OLFH044543L

3-80

Convenient features of your vehicle

LCD Display Control The LCD display modes can be changed by using the control buttons on the steering wheel. (1) : MODE button for changing

modes (2) , : MOVE switch for

changing items (3) OK : SELECT/RESET button for

setting or resetting the selected item

LCD DISPLAY

OAE046402

Type A

Type B

Type C

3-81

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

LCD Display Modes

Modes Symbol Explanation

Trip Computer This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, etc. For more information, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.

Turn By Turn (TBT) (if equipped)

This mode displays the state of the navigation.

Assist

This mode displays the state of the Advanced Smart Cruise Control (SCC) and Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS). For more information, refer to "Advanced Smart Cruise Control (SCC)" and "Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)" in chapter 5.

This mode displays information related to Tire Pressure. For more information, refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in chapter 6.

User Settings In this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, etc.

Warning This mode displays warning messages related to the Blind Spot Detection system, etc.

The information provided differs according to the items applied to your vehicle.

3-82

Convenient features of your vehicle

Edit settings after shifting to P

This warning message appears if you try to adjust the User Settings while driving.

Quick guide help Press and hold the OK button in the User Settings Mode, the explanation about the selected item is displayed.

Trip computer mode

The trip computer mode displays information related to vehicle driving parameters including range, fuel economy, trip meter information and vehicle speed.

For more information, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.

Turn By Turn (TBT) mode

This mode displays the state of the navigation.

OAE046132L OAEE046191N OAEE046505N

3-83

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Assist mode

SCC/LKAS mode (if equipped)

This mode displays the state of the Smart Cruise Control (SCC) and Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).

For more information, refer to "Smart Cruise Control (SCC)" and "Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)" in chapter 5.

Tire Pressure

This mode displays information relat- ed to Tire Pressure.

For more information, refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in chapter 6.

Warning mode If one of followings occurs, warning messages will be displayed on the LCD display for several seconds. - Lower washer fluid (if equipped) - Blind Spot Detection (BSD) mal-

function (if equipped) - Autonomous Emergency Braking

(AEB) malfunction - Advanced Smart Cruise Control

malfunction - Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) malfunction (if equipped) OAEE046137R

OAEE046138N

3-84

Convenient features of your vehicle

User Settings Mode In this mode, you can change setting of the instrument cluster, doors, lamps, etc.

Driving Assist

Items Explanation

Smart Cruise Control Response

To adjust the sensitivity (Slow/Normal/Fast) of the Smart Cruise Control system.

For more information, refer to "Advanced Smart Cruise Control" in chapter 5.

Autonomous Emergency Braking

To activate or deactivate the AEB system.

For more information, refer to "Autonomous (Automatic) Emergency Braking (AEB)" in chap- ter 5.

Forward Collision Warning

To adjust the initial warning alert time for the Autonomous Emergency Braking system.

The option settings are Late, Normal, or Early.

For more information, refer to "Autonomous (Automatic) Emergency Braking (AEB)" in chap- ter 5.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert To activate or deactivate the RCTA system.

For more information, refer to "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" in chapter 5.

Blind Spot Detection Sound To activate or deactivate the Blind Spot Detection sound.

For more information, refer to "Blind Spot Detection" in chapter 5.

The information provided differs according to the items applied to your vehicle.

3-85

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Door

Items Explanation

Auto Lock

Disable: The auto door lock operation will be canceled.

Enable on Speed: All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds 9.3mph (15km/h).

Enable on Shift: All doors will be automatically locked if the gear is shifted from the P (Park) posi- tion to R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.

Auto Unlock

Disable : The auto door unlock operation will be canceled.

Vehicle Off: All doors will be automatically unlocked when the POWER button is set to the OFF position.

On Shift to P: All doors will be automatically unlocked if the gear is shifted to the P (Park) posi- tion.

Two Press Unlock

Off : The two press unlock function will be deactivated. Therefore, all doors will unlock if the door unlock button is pressed.

On : Only the driver's door will unlock if the door unlock button is pressed. When the door unlock button is pressed again within 4 seconds, the remaining doors will unlock.

The information provided differs according to the items applied to your vehicle.

3-86

Convenient features of your vehicle

The information provided differs according to the items applied to your vehicle.

Items Explanation

One Touch Turn Signal

Off : The one touch turn signal function will be deactivated. 3, 5, 7 Flashes : The turn signal indicator will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when the turn signal lever is

moved slightly.

For more information, refer to "Light" in this chapter.

Headlamp Delay To activate or deactivate the headlamp delay function.

For more information, refer to "Light" in this chapter.

Welcome Light To activate or deactivate the welcome light function.

For more information, refer to "Welcome System" in this chapter.

Lights

Sound

Items Explanation

Welcome Sound To activate or deactivate the welcome sound function.

3-87

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Items Explanation

Seat Easy Access

Off : The seat easy access function is deactivated.

Normal/Extended:

- When you turn off the vehicle, the driver's seat will automatically move rearward short (Normal) or long (Extended) for you to enter or exit the vehicle more comfortably.

- If you change the POWER button from OFF position to the ACC, ON, or START position, the drivers seat will return to the original position.

For more information, refer to "Driver Position Memory System" in this chapter.

Wireless Charging System To activate or deactivate the wireless charging system in the front seat.

For more information, refer to "Wireless Charging System" in this chapter.

Wiper/Lights Display To activate or deactivate the Wiper/Light mode. When activated, the LCD display shows the selected Wiper/Light mode whenever you change the mode.

Gear Position Pop-up (if equipped)

To activate or deactivate the gear position pop-up. When activated, the gear position will be dis- played on the LCD display.

Convenience

The information provided differs according to the items applied to your vehicle.

3-88

Convenient features of your vehicle

Items Explanation

Service Interval To activate or deactivate the service interval function.

Adjust Interval If the service interval menu is activated, you may adjust the time and distance.

Service interval

If the service interval is activated and the time and distance is adjusted, messages are displayed in the following situations each time the vehicle is turned on.

- Service in

: Displayed to inform the driver the remaining mileage and days to service.

- Service required

: Displayed when the mileage and days to service has been reached or passed.

If any of the following conditions occur, the mileage and number of days to service may be incorrect.

- The battery cable is disconnected.

- The fuse switch is turned off.

- The battery is discharged.

Information To use the service interval menu, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

The information provided differs according to the items applied to your vehicle.

i

3-89

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Items Explanation

Aux. Battery Saver+

To activate or deactivate the Aux. Battery Saver+ function.

When activated, the high voltage battery is used to keep the 12V battery charged.

For more information, refer to "Aux. Battery Saver+" in the Electric Vehicle Guide

Fuel Economy Auto Reset

Off : The average fuel economy will not reset automatically whenever recharging.

After Ignition : The average fuel economy will reset automatically whenever it has passed 4 hours after turning OFF the vehicle.

After Recharging : The average fuel economy will reset automatically when recharging.

For more details, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.

Fuel Economy Unit To select the fuel economy unit.. (km/kWh, kWh/100km, mi/kWh)

Temperature Unit To select the temperature unit. (C,F)

Tire Pressure Unit To select the tire pressure unit. (psi, kPa, Bar)

Other features

The information provided differs according to the items applied to your vehicle.

3-90

Convenient features of your vehicle

TRIP COMPUTER The trip computer is a microcomput- er-controlled driver information sys- tem that displays information related to driving.

Information Some driving information stored in the trip computer (for example Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is disconnected.

Trip modes

To change the trip mode, toggle the UP/DOWN arrow switch " , " on the steering wheel.

i

Tripmeter

Average Vehicle Speed

Timer

Average Fuel Economy

Instant Fuel Economy

Digital Speedometer

Energy Flow

OAE046402

3-91

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Average fuel economy/ Instant fuel economy

Average Fuel Economy (1)

The average fuel economy is calcu- lated by the total driving distance and the high voltage battery con- sumption since the last average fuel economy reset. - Fuel economy range:

0.0 ~ 99.9 MPG or L/100km or km/L

The average fuel economy can be reset both manually and automati- cally.

Manual reset To clear the average fuel economy manually, press the OK button on the steering wheel for more than 1 sec- ond when the average fuel economy is displayed.

For more information on the OK button, refer to the "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.

Automatic reset To automatically reset the average fuel economy after recharging, select the "After Recharging" mode in User Settings menu on the LCD display (Refer to "LCD Display" in this chap- ter). Under "After Recharging" mode, the average fuel economy will be cleared to zero (----), when the driving dis- tance exceeds 0.19 miles (300m) after recharging more than 10%.

Instant Fuel Economy (2)

This mode displays the instanta- neous fuel economy while driving.

Tripmeter/Average vehicle speed/ Timer

Information If you press and hold the OK button when viewing the tripmeter, the mileage, the average vehicle speed, and the timer will be reset simultane- ously.

i

OAEE046190N OAEE046191N

3-92

Convenient features of your vehicle

Tripmeter (1)

The tripmeter is the total driving distance since the last tripmeter reset.

To reset the tripmeter, press the OK button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the tripmeter is displayed.

Average Vehicle Speed (2)

The average vehicle speed is cal- culated by the total driving dis- tance and driving time since the last average vehicle speed reset.

To reset the average vehicle speed, press the OK button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the average vehicle speed is dis- played.

Information The average vehicle speed is not dis-

played if the driving distance is less than 0.19 miles (300 meters) or the driving time is less than 10 seconds, after resetting the vehicle speed.

The average vehicle speed will con- tinue to be calculated and will start to decrease if the vehicle is stopped while the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode.

Timer (3)

The timer is the total driving time since the last timer reset.

To reset the timer, press the OK button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the timer is displayed.

Information The timer will continue to be counted while the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode.

Digital speedometer

This message shows the speed of the vehicle (in mph).

i

i

OAEE046153R

3-93

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Driving info display

At the end of each driving cycle, the Driving Info message is displayed. This display shows the trip distance (1), average fuel economy (2), remaining vehicle range (3), charging time status (4) and climate time sta- tus (5). This information is displayed for a few seconds when you turn off the vehi- cle, and then goes off automatically. The information is calculated for each time the vehicle is turned on.

Information If sunroof open warning is displayed

in the cluster, the Driving Information message may not be displayed.

To set the charging time and/or cli- mate time, refer to a separately sup- plied Multimedia System manual for detailed information.

Energy flow

The electric vehicle system informs the drivers its energy flow in various operating modes. While driving, the current energy flow is specified in 3 modes. For more information, refer to "Energy Flow" in the Electric Vehicle Guide provided in front of the owner's manual.

i

OAEE046195N OAEQ046001L

3-94

Convenient features of your vehicle

LIGHT Exterior Lights Lighting control To operate the lights, turn the knob at the end of the control lever to one of the following positions:

1. DRL (Daytime Running Lights) OFF position

2. AUTO light position 3. Parking lamp position 4. Headlamp position

Daytime running light (DRL) (if equipped)

The Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day, especially after dawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will turn the dedi- cated lamp OFF when : The light switch is in the DRL OFF

position. The headlights are ON. The vehicle is turned off.

AUTO light position (if equipped)

The parking lamp and headlamp will be turned ON or OFF automatically depending on the amount of light outside the vehicle.

Even with the AUTO light feature in operation, it is recommended to manually turn ON the lamps when driving at night or in a fog, driving in the rain, or when you enter dark areas, such as tunnels and parking facilities.

OLF044084N

OAEE046510N

3-95

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Do not cover or spill anything on the sensor (1) located in front of the instrument panel.

Do not clean the sensor using a window cleaner, the cleanser may leave a light film which could interfere with sensor operation.

If your vehicle has window tint or other types of metallic coat- ing on the front windshield, the AUTO light system may not work properly.

Parking lamp position ( )

The parking lamp, license plate lamp and instrument panel lamp are turned ON.

Headlamp position ( )

The headlamp, parking lamp, license plate lamp and instrument panel lamp are turned ON.

Information The POWER button must be in the ON position to turn on the headlamp.

i

NOTICE

OLF044086N OLF044087N

3-96

Convenient features of your vehicle

High beam operation

To turn on the high beam headlamp, push the lever away from you. The lever will return to its original position. The high beam indicator will light when the headlamp high beams are switched on. To turn off the high beam headlamp, pull the lever towards you. The low beams will turn on.

To flash the high beam headlamp, pull the lever towards you, then release the lever. The high beams will remain ON as long as you hold the lever towards you.

Turn signals and lane change signals

To signal a turn, push down on the lever for a left turn or up for a right turn in position (A). If an indicator stays on and does not flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out and will require replacement.

Do not use high beam when there are other vehicles approaching you. Using high beam could obstruct the other drivers vision.

WARNING

OLF044089N

OLF044088N

OLF044091N

3-97

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Onetouch turn signal function

To activate the One Touch Turn Signal function, push the turn signal lever up or down to position (B) and then release it. The lane change signals will blink 3, 5 or 7 times. You can activate or deactivate the One Touch Turn Signal function or choose the number of blinking (3, 5, or 7) from the User Settings mode (Light) on the LCD display.

For more information, refer to the "LCD Display" section in this chapter.

Battery saver function The purpose of this feature is to pre- vent the battery from being dis- charged. The system automatically turns off the parking lamp when the driver turns the vehicle off and opens the driver-side door. With this feature, the parking lamps will turn off automatically if the driver parks on the side of road at night. If necessary, to keep the lamps on when the the vehicle is turned off, per- form the following: 1) Open the driver-side door. 2) Turn the parking lamps OFF and

ON again using the light switch on the steering column.

Headlamp delay function (if equipped) If the POWER button is placed in the ACC position or the OFF position with the headlamps ON, the head- lamps (and/or parking lamps) remain on for about 5 minutes. However, if the drivers door is opened and closed, the headlights are turned off after 15 seconds. Also, with the vehi- cle off if the driver's door is opened and closed, the headlamps (and/or parking lamps) are turned off after 15 seconds. The headlamps (and/or parking lamps) can be turned off by pressing the lock button on the smart key twice or turning the light switch to the OFF or AUTO position. You can activate or deactivate the Headlamp Delay function from the User Settings mode (Light) on the LCD display. For more information, refer to the "LCD Display" section in this chapter.

3-98

Convenient features of your vehicle

If the driver gets out of the vehicle through other doors (except dri- vers door), the battery saver func- tion does not operate and the headlamp delay function does not turn off automatically. Therefore, It causes the battery to be dis- charged. In this case, make sure to turn off the lamp before getting out of the vehicle.

AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System) a.k.a. DBL (Dynamic Bending Light) (if equipped)

Adaptive front lighting system uses the steering angle and vehicle speed, to keep your field of vision wide by swiveling and leveling the headlamp.

Change the switch to the AUTO posi- tion when the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode. The adaptive front light- ing system will operate when the headlamp is ON. To turn off the AFLS, change the switch to other positions. After turning the AFLS off, headlamp swiveling no longer occurs, but leveling operates contin- uously. If the AFLS malfunction indicator comes on, the AFLS is not working properly. Drive to the nearest safe location and restart the vehicle ( indicator ON). If the indicator contin- uously remains on, have the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

OAEE046510N

3-99

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Interior Lights

Do not use the interior lights for extended periods when the vehi- cle is turned off or the battery will discharge.

Interior lamp AUTO cut The interior lamps will automatically go off approximately 20 minutes after the vehicle is turned off and the doors closed. If a door is opened, the lamp will go off 40 minutes after the vehicle is turned off. If the doors are locked by the smart key and the vehi- cle enters the armed stage of the theft alarm system, the lamps will go off five seconds later.

Front lamps

(1) Front Map Lamp (2) Front Door Lamp (3) Front Room Lamp ON (4) Front Room Lamp OFF

Front Map Lamp :

Press either of these lenses to turn the map lamp on or off. This light pro- duces a spot beam for convenient use as a map lamp at night or as a personal lamp for the driver and the front passenger.

Front Door Lamp ( ):

The front or rear room lamps come on when the front or rear doors are opened.When doors are unlocked by the smart key, the front and rear lamps come on for approximately 30 seconds as long as any door is not opened. The front and rear room lamps go out gradually after approxi- mately 30 seconds if the door is closed. However, if the POWER but- ton is in the ON position or all doors are locked, the front and rear lamps will turn off. If a door is opened with the POWER button in the ACC posi- tion or the OFF position, the front and rear lamps stay on for about 20 minutes.

NOTICE

Do not use the interior lights when driving in the dark.The inte- rior lights may obscure your view and cause an accident.

WARNING

OAD045405

3-100

Convenient features of your vehicle

Front room lamp

: Press the button to turn ON the room lamp for the front/rear seats. Re-press the button to turn OFF the room lamp.

: Press the button to turn OFF the room lamp for the front/rear seats regardless of front or rear door open position.

Rear lamp

Rear Room Lamp ( ):

Press this switch to turn the room lamp on and off.

Luggage room lamp

The luggage room lamp comes on when the liftgate is opened.

The luggage room lamp comes on as long as the liftgate is open. To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, close the liftgate securely after using the luggage room.

NOTICE

Type A

Type B OAE046445

OAEE046421

OAEE046401N

3-101

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)

Push the switch to turn the light on or off. : The lamp will turn on if this

button is pressed. : The lamp will turn off if this

button is pressed.

Always have the switch in the off position when the vanity mirror lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor is closed without the lamp off, it may discharge the battery or dam- age the sunvisor.

Puddle lamp (if equipped)

Welcome light

When all doors (and tailgate) are closed and locked, the puddle lamp will come on for 15 seconds if the door is unlocked by the smart key or outside door handle button. For more details, refer to "Welcome System" in this chapter.

Escort light

When the POWER button is in the OFF position and the driver's door is opened, the puddle lamp will come on for 30 seconds. If the driver's door is closed within the 30 seconds, the puddle lamp will turn off after 15 sec- onds. If the driver's door is closed and locked, the puddle lamp will turn off immediately. The Puddle Lamp Escort Light will turn on only the first time the driver's door is opened after the vehicle is turned off.

NOTICE

OAE046419OAD045410

3-102

Convenient features of your vehicle

Welcome System (if equipped) Welcome light (if equipped)

Puddle lamp (if equipped)

When all the doors (and liftgate) are closed and locked, the puddle lamp will come on for about 15 seconds if any of the below is performed. When the door unlock button is

pressed on the smart key. When the button of the outside

door handle is pressed with the smart key in possession.

When the vehicle is approached with the smart key in possession.

Door handle lamp (if equipped)

When all the doors (and liftgate) are closed and locked, the door handle lamp will come on for about 15 sec- onds if any of the below is performed. When the door unlock button is

pressed on the smart key. When the button of the outside door

handle is pressed with the smart key in possession.

When the vehicle is approached with the smart key in possession.

Headlamp and parking lamp

When the headlamp (lamp switch in the headlamp or AUTO position) is on and all doors (and tailgate) are locked and closed, the parking lamp and head- lamp will come on for 15 seconds if/or any of the below is performed. When the door unlock button is

pressed on the smart key. At this time, if you press the door lock or unlock button, the parking lamp and headlamp will turn off immediately.

You can activate or deactivate the Welcome Light from the User Settings mode on the LCD display. For more details, refer to "LCD Display" in this chapter.

Interior lamp

When the interior lamp switch is in the DOOR position and all doors (and tailgate) are closed and locked, the room lamp will come on for 30 sec- onds if any of the below is performed. When the door unlock button is

pressed on the smart key. When the button of the outside

door handle is pressed. At this time, if you press the door lock or unlock button, the room lamp will turn off immediately.

OAEE046400N

3-103

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

A : Wiper speed control MIST Single wipe OFF Off INT Intermittent wipe LO Low wiper speed HI High wiper speed

B : Intermittent control wipe time adjustment

C : Wash with brief wipes

Windshield Wipers Operates as follows when the POWER button is in the ON position. MIST : For a single wiping cycle,

push the lever upward and release. The wipers will oper- ate continuously if the lever is held in this position.

OFF : Wiper is not in operation. INT : Wiper operates intermittently at

the same wiping intervals. To vary the speed setting, move the speed control lever. The top most setting will run the wipers most frequently (for more rain). The bottom setting will run the wipers the least frequently (for less rain).

LO : The wiper runs at a lower speed. HI : The wiper runs at a higher speed.

Information If there is heavy accumulation of snow or ice on the windshield, defrost the windshield for about 10 minutes, or until the snow and/or ice is removed before using the windshield wipers to ensure proper operation.

If you do not remove the snow and/or ice before using the wiper and washer, it may damage the wiper and washer system.

i WIPERS AND WASHERS

OLF044278

3-104

Convenient features of your vehicle

Windshield Washers

In the OFF position, pull the lever gently toward you to spray washer fluid on the windshield and to run the wipers 1-3 cycles. The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever. If the washer does not work, you may need to add wash- er fluid to the washer fluid reservoir.

To prevent possible damage to the washer pump, do not oper- ate the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty.

To prevent possible damage to the wipers or windshield, do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.

To prevent damage to the wiper arms and other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.

To prevent possible damage to the wipers and washer system, use anti-freezing washer fluids in the winter season or cold weather.

NOTICE

When the outside temperature is below freezing, ALWAYS warm the windshield using the defroster to help prevent the washer fluid from freezing on the windshield and obscuring your vision which could result in an accident and serious injury or death.

WARNING

OLF044095N

3-105

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

DRIVER ASSIST SYSTEM Rear View Camera

The Rear View Camera will activate when the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode and when you shift to the R (Reverse) position.

This is a supplemental system that provides a view of the area behind the vehicle through the A/V display while the vehicle is in the R (Reverse) position.

Always keep the camera lens clean. The camera may not work normally if the lens is covered with dirt or snow.

NOTICE

The Rear View Camera is not a safety device. It only serves to assist the driver in identifying objects directly behind the mid- dle of the vehicle. The camera does NOT cover the complete area behind the vehicle.

WARNING

Never rely solely on the Rear View Camera when backing- up.

ALWAYS look around your vehicle to make sure there are no objects or obstacles before moving the vehicle in any direction to prevent a collision.

Always pay close attention when the vehicle is driven close to objects, particularly pedestrians, and especially children.

WARNING

OAEE046417L

OAEE046416N

3-106

Convenient features of your vehicle

DEFROSTER

To prevent damage to the conduc- tors bonded to the inside surface of the rear window, never use sharp instruments or window cleaners containing abrasives to clean the window.

If you want to defrost and defog the front windshield, refer to the "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging" section in this chapter.

Rear Window Defroster

The defroster heats the window to remove frost, fog and thin ice from the interior and exterior of the rear window while the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode. To activate the rear window

defroster, press the rear window defroster button located in the center facia switch panel. The indicator on the rear window defroster button illu- minates when the defroster is ON.

To turn off the defroster, press the rear window defroster button again.

Information If there is heavy accumulation of

snow on the rear window, brush it off before operating the rear defroster.

The rear window defroster automat- ically turns off after approximately 20 minutes or when the POWER button is in the OFF position.

Side view mirror defroster If your vehicle is equipped with the side view mirror defrosters, they will operate at the same time you turn on the rear window defroster.

iNOTICE

OAEE046322L

3-107

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

OAEE046300N/OAEE046301N

1. Temperature control knob

2. Fan speed control knob

3. AUTO (automatic control) button

4. OFF button

5. Front windshield defrost button

6. Rear window defrost button

7. Air conditioning button

8. Air intake control button

9. Mode selection button

10. Driver only button

11. HEAT button

12. EV button

13. Climate control information screen

Type A

Type B

3-108

Convenient features of your vehicle

Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning

The Automatic Climate Control System is controlled by setting the desired temperature. 1. Press the AUTO button. The modes, fan speeds, air intake and air-conditioning will be controlled automatically by the temperature set- ting you select.

2. Turn the temperature control knob to the desired temperature. If the temperature is set to the lowest setting (Lo), the air conditioning system will operate continuously.

To turn the automatic operation off, select any button of the following:

- Mode selection button - Front windshield defroster button

(Press the button one more time to deselect the front windshield defroster function. The 'AUTO' sign will illuminate on the infor- mation screen once again.)

- Fan speed control knob The selected function will be con- trolled manually while other functions operate automatically. For your convenience and to improve the effectiveness of the climate con- trol, use the AUTO button and set the temperature to 73F (23C). To change the temperature unit from F to C or C to F: Press and hold the AUTO and OFF buttons on the climate control unit for 3 seconds.

OAEE046305

OAEE046323L

3-109

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Never place anything near the sensor to ensure better control of the heating and cooling system.

Manual Heating and Air Conditioning The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually by pushing buttons other than the AUTO button. In this case, the system works sequentially according to the order of buttons selected. When pressing any button except the AUTO button while using automatic operation, the functions not selected will be controlled automatically. 1. Start the vehicle ( indicator

ON). 2. Set the mode to the desired posi-

tion. To improve the effectiveness of heating and cooling: - Heating: - Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.

7. Press the AUTO button in order to convert to full automatic control of the system.

NOTICE

OAEE046302N

3-110

Convenient features of your vehicle

Mode selection

The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.

OAEE046320

OAEE046303

3-111

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

The air flow outlet direction is cycled as follows:

Face-Level (B, D, F)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)

Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor.

Floor & Defrost (A, C, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.

Floor-Level (A, C, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side window defrosters.

Defrost-Level (A)

Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters.

OAEE046304

MODE DOWN ( )

MODE UP ( )

3-112

Convenient features of your vehicle

Interior panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed ( ) using the vent control lever. Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivered from these vents using the vent control lever as shown.

Temperature control

Turn the knob to the right to increase the fan temperature and airflow. Turn the knob to the left to decrease fan temperature. The temperature will increase or decrease by 1F/0.5C.

Temperature conversion

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, the temperature mode display will reset to Fahrenheit. To change the temperature unit from F to C or C to F: - On the instrument cluster, go to

User Settings Mode Other Features Temperature Unit.

- Press the AUTO button for 3 sec- onds while pressing the OFF button.

Both the temperature unit on the cluster LCD display and climate con- trol information screen will change.

OAEE046321

OAE046309

Front

Rear

OAEE046305

3-113

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Air intake control This button is used to select the out- side (fresh) air position or recirculat- ed air position.

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air position selected, air from the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heat- ing system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air position selected, air from the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heat- ing system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Information Prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

i

OAEE046306

Type A

OAEE046314

Type B

3-114

Convenient features of your vehicle

Fan speed control

The fan speed can be set to the desired speed by turning the fan speed control knob. The higher the fan speed is, the more air is delivered. Pressing the OFF button turns off the fan.

Information For better voice recognition, fan speed may automatically slow down for a couple of minutes when you activate voice recognition or hands free.

Operating the fan when the POWER button is in the ON posi- tion could cause the battery to discharge. Operate the blower when the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode.

NOTICE

i

Continued use of the climate control system operation in the recirculated air position can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, that may cause loss of vehicle control result- ing in an accident. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position as much as possible while driving.

Continued use of the climate control system operation in the recirculated air position (without the air conditioning selected) may allow humidity to increase inside the vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.

Do not sleep in a vehicle with the air conditioning or heating system on. It may cause seri- ous injury or death due to a drop in the oxygen level and/or body temperature.

WARNING

OAEE046307

3-115

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Driver only

If you press the DRIVER ONLY but- ton( ) and the indicator light illuminates, cold air mostly blows in the direction of the drivers seat. However, some of the cold air may come out of other seating position ducts to keep indoor air pleasant. If you use the button with no passen- ger in the front passenger seat, ener- gy consumption will be reduced. DRIVER ONLY button will be turned off under the following conditions: 1) Defrost on (the DRIVER ONLY

button indicator is not turned off) 2) DRIVER ONLY button re-push

Air conditioning

Push the A/C button to manually turn the system on (indicator light will illu- minate) and off.

HEAT button

Push the HEAT button to turn the heater on (indicator light will illumi- nate). Push the button again to turn the heater off.

DRIVER ONLY

OAE046314 OAEE046308

OAEE046310

OAEE046313

Type A

Type B

3-116

Convenient features of your vehicle

Air conditioner/Heater uses energy from the battery. If you use the heater or air conditioner for too long, dis- tance to empty can be reduced due to increased power consumption. Turn off the heater and air conditioner if not necessary.

EV mode (if equipped)

Push the EV button to enter the EV mode on the AVN screen. The EV mode has a total of 7 menus including Range, Nearby Stations, Energy Information, Drive Mode, ECO Driving, Charging/Climate Settings and EV Settings.

For details on EV mode, refer to the Multimedia System manual that is provided separately.

OFF mode

Push the OFF button to turn the cli- mate control system off. You can still operate the mode and air intake but- tons as long as the POWER button is in the ON position.

OAEE046311 OAEE046309

3-117

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

System Operation Ventilation 1. Select the Face Level mode. 2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position. 3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position. 4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

Heating 1. Select the Floor Level mode. 2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position. 3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position. 4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed. 5. If dehumidified heating is desired,

turn the air conditioning system on. If the windshield fogs up, select the Floor & Defrost mode or press the Front Defrost mode.

Operation Tips

To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the car through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control to the recircu- lated air position. Return the con- trol to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed. This will help keep the driver alert and com- fortable.

To prevent the inside of the wind- shield from fogging, set the air intake control to the fresh air posi- tion and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to desired temperature.

Air conditioning All HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are filled with environmen- tally friendly R-134a refrigerant. 1. Start the vehicle. 2. Push the air conditioning button. 3. Set the mode to the Face Level

mode. 4. Set the air intake control to the

recirculated air position. However, prolonged operation of the recircu- lated air position will excessively dry the air. In this case, change the air position.

5. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum comfort.

When maximum cooling is desired, set the temperature control to the extreme left position then set the fan speed control to the highest speed.

3-118

Convenient features of your vehicle

Air conditioning system operation tips

If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape.

After sufficient cooling has been achieved, switch back from the recirculated air to the fresh outside air position.

To help reduce moisture inside of the windows on rainy or humid days, decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning system with the win- dows and sunroof closed.

Use the air conditioning system every month only for a few minutes to ensure maximum system per- formance.

If you operate air conditioner excessively, the difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, causing loss of visibility. In this case, set the mode selection knob or button to the position and fan speed control to the lower speed.

System Maintenance Climate control air filter

This filter is installed behind the glove box. It filters the dust or other pollu- tants that enter the vehicle through the heating and air conditioning system. Have the climate control air filter replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to the maintenance schedule. If the car is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty or rough roads, more frequent air condi- tioner filter inspections and changes are required. If the air flow rate suddenly decreas- es, the system should be checked at an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

1LDA5047

Outside air

Recirculated air

Climate control air filter

Blower

Evaporator core

Heater core

3-119

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant When the amount of refrigerant is low, the performance of the air con- ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also has a negative influence on the air conditioning system. Therefore, if abnormal operation is found, have the system inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrig- erant is used. Otherwise, damage to the compressor and abnormal system operation may occur.

The air conditioning system should be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Air conditioning refrigerant label

The actual Air Conditioning refriger- ant label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. Each symbols and specification on air conditioning refrigerant label means as below : 1. Classification of refrigerant 2. Amount of refrigerant 3. Classification of Compressor lubri-

cant

Refer to chapter 8 for more detail location of the air conditioning refrig- erant label.

NOTICE

Because the refriger- ant is at very high pressure, the air con- ditioning system should only be serv-

iced by trained and certified technicians. It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used, oth- erwise damage to the vehicle and personal injury may occur.

WARNING

POE

OLFP046583N

Example

3-120

Convenient features of your vehicle

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

Windshield heating

Do not use the or posi- tion during cooling operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temper- ature of the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the wind- shield to fog up, causing loss of visibility could cause an acci- dent resulting in serious injury or death. In this case, set the mode selection knob or button to the position and fan speed control knob or button to a lower speed.

WARNING For maximum defrosting, set the

temperature control to the extreme right/hot position and the fan speed control to the highest speed.

If warm air to the floor is desired while defrosting or defogging, set the mode to the floor-defrost position.

Before driving, clear all snow and ice from the windshield, rear win- dow, side view mirrors, and all side windows.

Clear all snow and ice from the hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve heater and defroster effi- ciency and to reduce the probability of fogging up the inside of the wind- shield.

To Defog Inside Windshield

1. Select desired fan speed. 2. Select desired temperature. 3. Press the defroster button ( ). 4. The outside (fresh) air position will

be selected automatically. If the outside (fresh) air position is not selected automatically, adjust the corresponding button manually. If the position is selected, lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.

OAEE046317L

Type A

Type B

3-121

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

To Defrost Outside Windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highest (extreme right) position.

2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot (HI) position.

3. Press the defroster button ( ). 4. The outside (fresh) air position will

be selected automatically. If the position is selected, lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.

Defogging Logic To reduce the probability of fogging up the inside of the windshield, the air intake or air conditioning are con- trolled automatically according to certain conditions such as or position. To cancel or return the defogging logic, do the following.

1. Turn the POWER button to the ON position.

2. Press the defroster button ( ). 3. While pressing the air conditioning

button (A/C), press the air intake control button at least 5 times with- in 3 seconds.

The air intake control button indicator will blink 3 times. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it resets to the defog logic status.

Auto Defogging System

Auto defogging system reduces the possibility of fogging up the inside of the windshield by automatically sensing the moisture of inside the windshield. The auto defogging system operates when the heater or air conditioning is on.

Information The auto defogging system may not operate normally, when the outside temperature is below 50 F (10 C).

i

OAEE046318L OAEE046312N

Type A

Type B

3-122

Convenient features of your vehicle

When the Auto Defogging System operates, the indi- cator will illuminate.

If higher level of moisture are sensed in the vehicle, the Auto Defogging System will operate in the following order: Step 1 : Outside air position Step 2 : Operating the air conditioning Step 3 : Blowing air toward the wind-

shield Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward

the windshield If the air conditioning is off or recircu- lated air position is manually select- ed while Auto Defogging System is ON, the Auto Defogging System Indicator will blink 3 times to signal that the manual operation has been canceled.

To cancel or reset the Auto Defogging System

Press the front windshield defroster button for 3 seconds when the POWER button is in the ON position. When the Auto Defogging System is canceled, ADS OFF symbol will blink 3 times and the ADS OFF will be dis- played on the climate control infor- mation screen. When the Auto Defogging System is reset, ADS OFF symbol will blink 6 times without a signal.

Information When the air conditioning is turned

on by Auto defogging system, if you try to turn off the air conditioning, the indicator will blink 3 times and the air conditioning will not be turned off.

For efficiency, do not select recircu- lated air position while Auto defog- ging system is operating.

When Auto defogging mode is selected, fan speed, temperature and intake mode which is adjusted man- ually are canceled for better defog- ging result.

Do not remove the sensor cover located on the upper end of the windshield glass. Damage to system parts could occur and may not be covered by your vehicle warranty.

NOTICE

i

3-123

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Automatic Ventilation (if equipped) When the POWER button is in the ON position or when the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode and tempera- ture is below 59F (15C) with the recirculated air position selected more than five minutes, the air intake position will automatically change to the outside (fresh) air position.

To cancel or reset the Automatic Ventilation

When the air conditioning system is on, select Face Level mode, press the recirculated air position button for three seconds.

To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage compartments.

Center Console Storage

To open : Grab and hold the latch (1) on the arm rest then lift the lid.

NOTICE

CLIMATE CONTROL ADDITIONAL FEATURES (IF EQUIPPED)

STORAGE COMPARTMENT

Never store cigarette lighters, propane cylinders, or other flammable/explosive materials in the vehicle. These items may catch fire and/or explode if the vehicle is exposed to hot tem- peratures for extended periods.

WARNING

ALWAYS keep the storage com- partment covers closed secure- ly while driving. Items inside your vehicle are moving as fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, the items may fly out of the compartment and may cause an injury if they strike the driver or a passenger.

WARNING OAEE046418

3-124

Convenient features of your vehicle

Glove Box

To open: Pull the lever (1).

Sunglass Holder

To open: Push and release the cover and the holder will slowly open. Place your sunglasses in the compartment door with the lenses facing out. To close: Push back into position. Make sure the sunglass holder is closed while driving.

ALWAYS close the glove box door after use. An open glove box door can cause serious injury to the pas- senger in an accident, even if the passenger is wearing a seat belt.

WARNING

OAEE046427 OAD045413

Do not keep objects except sunglasses inside the sun- glass holder. Such objects can be thrown from the holder in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle.

Do not open the sunglass holder while the vehicle is moving. The rear view mirror of the vehicle can be blocked by an open sunglass holder.

Do not put the glasses forcibly into a sunglass holder. It may cause personal injury if you try to open it forcibly when the glasses are jammed in holder.

WARNING

3-125

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Multi Box

Use the multi box to keep small objects.

Cup Holder

Cups or small beverages cups may be placed in the cup holders.

Rear (if equipped) Pull the armrest down to use the cup holders.

OAEE046402L

OAEE046403

Do not keep objects that can be thrown from the multi box and severely injure passengers in the vehicle in the event of a sud- den stop or an accident.

WARNING

INTERIOR FEATURES

OAE046424

Front

Rear OAEE046404L

Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is in use to prevent spilling your drink. If hot liquid spills, you could be burned. Such a burn to the driver could cause loss of vehicle control result- ing in an accident.

Do not place uncovered or unsecured cups, bottles, cans, etc., in the cup holder containing hot liquid while the vehicle is in motion. Injuries may result in the event of sud- den stop or collision.

Only use soft cups in the cup holders. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.

WARNING

3-126

Convenient features of your vehicle

Keep your drinks sealed while driving to prevent spilling your drink. If liquid spills, it may get into the vehicle's electrical/elec- tronic system and damage elec- trical/electronic parts.

When cleaning spilled liquids, do not dry the cup holder at high temperature. This may damage the cup holder.

Sunvisor

To use a sunvisor, pull it downward. To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from the bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2). To use the vanity mirror, pull down the sunvisor and slide the mirror cover (3). Adjust the sunvisor forward or back- ward (4) as needed (if equipped). Use the ticket holder (5) to hold tickets (if equipped).

Close the vanity mirror cover securely and return the sunvisor to its original position after use.

Do not put several tickets in the ticket holder at one time. This could cause damage to the ticket holder.

NOTICE

NOTICE

NOTICE

Keep cans or bottles out of direct sun light and do not put them in a hot vehicle. It may explode.

WARNING

OAEE046511N

For your safety, do not block your view when using the sunvi- sor.

WARNING

3-127

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

Power Outlet (if equipped)

The power outlet is designed to pro- vide power for mobile telephones or other devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems. The devices should draw less than 180 W (Watts) with the vehicle in the ready ( ) mode.

To prevent damage to the Power Outlets : Use the power outlet only when

the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode and remove the accessory plug after use. Using the acces- sory plug for prolonged periods of time with the vehicle off could cause the battery to discharge.

Only use 12V electric acces- sories which are less than 180 W (Watts) in electric capacity.

Adjust the air-conditioner or heater to the lowest operating level when using the power outlet.

Close the cover when not in use. (Continued)

(Continued) Some electronic devices can

cause electronic interference when plugged into a vehicles power outlet.These devices may cause excessive audio static and malfunctions in other elec- tronic systems or devices used in your vehicle.

Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat and the fuse may open.

Plug in battery equipped electri- cal/electronic devices with reverse current protection. The current from the battery may flow into the vehicle's electrical/ electronic system and cause system malfunction.

NOTICE

OAEE046405L

Avoid electrical shocks. Do not place your fingers or foreign objects (pin, etc.) into a power outlet or touch the power outlet with a wet hand.

WARNING

3-128

Convenient features of your vehicle

Wireless Cellular Phone Charging System (if equipped)

There is a wireless cellular phone charger inside the front console. The system is available when all doors are closed, and when the POWER button is in the ACC/ ON/START position.

To charge a cellular phone The wireless cellular phone charging system charges only the Qi-enabled cellular phones ( ). Read the label on the cellular phone accessory cover or visit your cellular phone manufacturers website to check whether your cellular phone supports the Qi technology. The wireless charging process starts when you put a Qi-enabled cellular phone on the wireless charging unit.

1. Remove other items, including the smart key, from the wireless charg- ing unit. If not, the wireless charg- ing process may be interrupted.

2. The indicator illuminates in orange during the charging process. The indicator color changes to green, when the charging process is completed.

3. You can turn ON or OFF the wire- less charging function in the user settings mode on the instrument cluster. (For further information, refer to the "LCD Display Modes" in this chapter.)

Slightly change the cellular phone position, when the cellular phone is not being charged. Make sure that the indicator illuminates in orange. The indicator color may not change to green depending on the cellular phone type, even though the charg- ing process has been completed. The indicator blinks orange for 10 seconds when there is a malfunction with the wireless charging system. In this case, temporarily stop the charging process, and re-attempt to wirelessly charge your cellular phone again. The system warns you with a mes- sage on the LCD display if you do not remove the cellular phone from the wireless charging unit, when the front door is open and the POWER button is in the OFF position.

The wireless cellular phone charging system may not sup- port certain cellular phones, which are not verified for the Qi specification ( ).

(Continued)

NOTICE

OAEE046407L

3-129

Convenient features of your vehicle

3

(Continued) Locate your cell phone well in

the middle of the wireless cellu- lar phone charging system. Even when your cell phone locates slightly to one side, the charging speed may decrease.

The wireless charging process may temporarily stop, when a smart key function operates (i.e. starting the vehicle, opening the doors, closing the doors).

For certain cell phones, the indi- cator color may not change to green, even when the wireless charging process is properly completed.

The wireless charging process may temporarily stop, when tem- perature abnormally increases inside the wireless cellular phone charging system. The wireless charging process restarts, when temperature falls to a proper level.

The wireless charging process may temporarily stop when there is any metallic item, such as a coin, between the wireless cellular phone charging system and a cellular phone.

Clock Vehicles with Audio system Select the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Date/Time]. Set time : Set the time displayed on

the audio screen. Time format : Choose between 12-

hour and 24-hour time formats.

Vehicles with Navigation system Select the Settings menu on the Navigation system Select [Date/Time]. GPS time : Displays time according

to the received GNSS time. 24-hour : Switches to 12 hour or 24

hour.

Do not adjust the clock while driving, you may lose your steering control and cause an accident that results in severe personal injury or death.

WARNING

3-130

Convenient features of your vehicle

Clothes Hanger (if equipped)

These hangers are not designed to hold large or heavy items.

Floor Mat Anchor(s)

ALWAYS use the Floor Mat Anchors to attach the front floor mats to the vehicle. The anchors on the front floor carpet keep the floor mats from sliding forward.

OAEE046434

Do not overlay additional mats or liners over the floor mats. If using All Weather mats, remove the carpeted floor mats before installing them. Only use floor mats designed to connect to the anchors.

WARNING

Do not hang other objects such as hangers or hard objects except clothes. Also, do not put heavy, sharp or breakable objects in the clothes pockets. In an accident or when the cur- tain air bag is inflated, it may cause vehicle damage or per- sonal injury.

WARNING

OGSB047265L OAE046430

3-131

Convenient features of your vehicle

Cargo Security Screen (if equipped)

Use the cargo security screen to hide items stored in the cargo area.

To use the cargo security screen

1. Pull the cargo security screen towards the rear of the vehicle by the handle (1).

2. Insert the guide pin into the guide (2).

Pull out the cargo security screen with the handle in the center to prevent the guide pin from falling out of the guide.

NOTICE

3

The following must be observed when installing ANY floor mat to the vehicle. Ensure that the floor mats are

securely attached to the vehi- cle's floor mat anchor(s) before driving the vehicle.

Do not use ANY floor mat that cannot be firmly attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchors.

Do not stack floor mats on top of one another (e.g. all-weath- er rubber mat on top of a car- peted floor mat). Only a single floor mat should be installed in each position.

IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was manufactured with drivers side floor mat anchors that are designed to securely hold the floor mat in place. To avoid any interference with pedal opera- tion, HYUNDAI recommends that the HYUNDAI floor mat designed for use in your vehicle be installed.

WARNING

OAEE046422

OAEE046423

3-132

Convenient features of your vehicle

When the cargo security screen is not in use: 1. Pull the cargo security screen

backward and up to release it from the guides.

2. The cargo security screen will automatically slide back in.

The cargo security screen may not automatically slide back in if the cargo security screen is not fully pulled out. Fully pull it out and then let go.

To remove the cargo security screen

1. Push out the lower part of guide pins in both sides.

2. While pushing in one side of the guide pin, pull out the cargo secu- rity screen.

3. Open the luggage tray and keep the cargo security screen in the tray.

NOTICE

OAEE046424L

OAEE046409N

Multimedia System

Multimedia System.................................................4-2 AUX, USB and iPod port ...............................................4-2 Antenna ...............................................................................4-2 Steering Wheel Audio Controls......................................4-3 Bluetooth Wireless Technology Hands-Free...........4-4 Audio (Display Audio) / Video / Navigation System (AVN).................................................4-4 How Vehicle Audio Works ...............................................4-5 Features of Your Vehicle.................................................4-7

Audio (with Touch Screen).................................4-10 Feature of Your Audio ...................................................4-11 Radio...................................................................................4-16 SiriusXM ............................................................................4-18 Media..................................................................................4-19 Phone .................................................................................4-32 Setup ..................................................................................4-41

Declaration of Conformity..................................4-44 FCC .....................................................................................4-44

4

4-2

Multimedia System

If you install an aftermarket HID head lamp, your vehicle's audio and electronic devices may not function properly.

Prevent chemicals such as per- fume, cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and air freshener from contacting the interior parts because they may cause damage or discoloration.

AUX, USB and iPod Port

You can use an AUX port or USB cable to connect audio devices to the vehicle AUX or USB port.

Information When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet, noise may occur during playback. If this happens, use the power source of the portable audio device.

iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Antenna Shark fin antenna

The shark fin antenna will receive the transmit data (example: AM/FM, SXM signal, GPS).

i

NOTICE

MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM

OAEE046411N

OAEE046410/Q

4-3

M ultim

edia System

4

Roof antenna

The roof antenna receives both AM and FM broadcast signals. Rotate the roof antenna in a counterclock- wise direction to remove it. Rotate it in a clockwise direction to reinstall it.

Before entering a place with a low height clearance or a car wash, remove the antenna by rotating it counterclockwise. If not, the antenna may be damaged.

When reinstalling your antenna, it is important that it is fully tightened and adjusted to the upright position to ensure prop- er reception.

Steering Wheel Audio Control

Do not operate multiple audio remote control buttons simultane- ously.

VOLUME (VOL + / - ) (1) Press the VOLUME switch up to

increase volume. Press the VOLUME switch down to

decrease volume.

SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2) If the SEEK/PRESET switch is pressed up or down and held for 0.8 second or more, it will function in the following modes:

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK select button. It will SEEK until you release the button.

MEDIA mode

It will function as the FF/RW button.

If the SEEK/PRESET switch is pressed up or down, it will function in the following modes:

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STA- TION UP/DOWN button.

MEDIA mode

It will function as the TRACK UP/ DOWN button.

NOTICE

NOTICE

OAE046481L

OAE046437

OAE046438

Type A

Type B

4-4

Multimedia System

MODE (3) Press the MODE button to toggle through Radio, SXM, or AUX modes.

MUTE ( ) (4) Press the MUTE button to mute the

sound. Press the MUTE button again to

activate the sound.

Information Detailed information for audio control buttons is described later in this chap- ter or in the Car Multimedia User's Manual that was supplied with this vehicle

Bluetooth Wireless Technology Hands-Free

You can use the phone wirelessly by using the Bluetooth Wireless Technology. (1) Call / Answer button (2) Call end button

(3) Microphone Detailed information for the Bluetooth Wireless Technology hands-free is described later in this chapter or in the Car Multimedia User's Manual.

Audio (Display Audio) / Video / Navigation System (AVN) (if equipped) Detailed information for the AVN sys- tem is described in the Car Multimedia User's Manual.

i OAE046440

OAE046447

How Vehicle Audio Works

AM and FM radio signals are broad- casted from transmitter towers locat- ed around your city. They are inter- cepted by the radio antenna on your vehicle.This signal is then processed by the radio and sent to your vehicle speakers. When a strong radio signal has reached your vehicle, the precise engineering of your audio system ensures the best possible quality reproduction. However, in some cases the signal coming to your vehi- cle may not be strong and clear.

This can be due to factors, such as the distance from the radio station, closeness of other strong radio sta- tions or the presence of buildings, bridges or other large obstructions in the area.

AM broadcasts can be received at greater distances than FM broad- casts. This is because AM radio waves are transmitted at low fre- quencies. These long distance, low frequency radio waves can follow the curvature of the earth rather than travelling straight. In addition, they curve around obstructions resulting in better signal coverage.

4-5

M ultim

edia System

4 JBM001

FM reception

JBM002

AM reception

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequencies and do not bend to follow the earth's surface. Because of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade within short distances from the station. Also, FM signals are easily affected by buildings, moun- tains, and obstructions. This can lead to undesirable or unpleasant listen- ing conditions which might lead you to believe a problem exists with your radio. The following conditions are normal and do not indicate radio trouble:

Fading - As your vehicle moves away from the radio station, the sig- nal will weaken and sound will begin to fade. When this occurs, we suggest that you select another stronger station.

Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or large obstructions between the transmitter and your radio can dis- turb the signal causing static or flut- tering noises to occur. Reducing the treble level may lessen this effect until the disturbance clears.

Station Swapping - As an FM signal weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency may begin to play. This is because your radio is designed to lock onto the clearest signal. If this occurs, select another station with a stronger signal.

Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio sig- nals being received from several directions can cause distortion or fluttering. This can be caused by a direct and reflected signal from the same station, or by signals from two stations with close frequencies. If this occurs, select another station until the condition has passed.

4-6

Multimedia System

JBM003

FM radio station

JBM004 JBM005

Features of Your Vehicle Satellite radio reception You may experience difficulties in receiving SiriusXM satellite radio signals in the following situations.

If you are driving in a tunnel or a covered parking area.

If you are driving beneath the top level of a multi-level freeway.

If you are driving under a bridge. If you are driving next to a tall vehi-

cle (such as a truck or a bus) that blocks the signal.

If you are driving in a valley where the surrounding hills or peaks block the signal from the satellite.

If you are driving on a mountain road where is the signal blocked by mountains.

If you are driving in an area with tall trees that block the signal (30 ft. /10m or more), for example on an road that goes through a dense for- est.

The signal can become weak in some areas that are not covered by the SiriusXM repeater network.

Information There may also be additional unfore- seen circumstances leading to recep- tion problems with the SiriusXM

satellite radio signal.

Advisory Messages, such as 'CH Unavailable' may occur when starting SiriusXM Radio.

i

4-7

M ultim

edia System

4

SATELLITE2

SATELLITE1

Using a cellular phone or a two- way radio When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, noise may be produced from the audio system. This does not mean that something is wrong with the audio equipment. In such a case, try to operate mobile devices as far from the audio equipment as possible.

NOTE: Order of playing files (folders) : 1. Song playing order : to

sequentially. 2. Folder playing order : If no song file is contained in the

folder, that folder is not displayed.

4-8

Multimedia System

When using a communication system such as a cellular phone or a radio set inside the vehicle, a separate external antenna must be fitted. When a cellular phone or a radio set is used with an internal antenna alone, it may interfere with the vehicle's electri- cal system and adversely affect safe operation of the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not use a cellular phone while driving. Stop at a safe location to use a cellular phone or set up the hands-free calling feature.

WARNING

4-9

M ultim

edia System

4

iPod

iPod is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.

Bluetooth Wireless Technology The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by HYUNDAI is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

Pandora

Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc. Used with permission. Pandora is only available in certain countries. Please visit http://www.pandora.com/legal for more information.

4-10

Multimedia System

G2H4G0000EU/G2H4G0001EU

Type A

(With Bluetooth Wireless Technology)

Type B

AUDIO (With Touch Screen)

4-11

M ultim

edia System

4

Feature of Your Audio

Head unit

The actual features in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

(1) LCD screen Tap the screen to select a button.

(2) POWER/VOL knob Turn to adjust the volume. Press to turn the device on or off.

(3) RADIO Start FM, AM and SiriusXM*. * if equipped

(4) MEDIA Select USB(iPod), Bluetooth

Wireless Technology(BT) Audio, AUX and My Music or Pandora.

Display the media menu when two or more media are connected or when the [MEDIA] button is pressed in media mode.

(5) SEEK/TRACK Search for next station in FM or AM

radio mode. Search for next station in SiriusXM*

radio mode. Change the current song in media

mode. * if equipped

(6) RESET Shutdown and restart the system.

Type B

Type A

4-12

Multimedia System

(7) PHONE Start Bluetooth Wireless Technology

Phone mode.

(8) SETUP Access Display, Sound, Date/Time,

Bluetooth, System, Screen Saver and Display Off settings.

(9) TUNE knob Turn to navigate through the sta-

tions/songs list. Press to select an item. Type B

Type A

4-13

M ultim

edia System

4

M ultim

edia System

Steering wheel remote control

The actual features in the may dif- fer from the illustration.

(1) VOICE Pressing the button

- If Siri is not active: Starts Siri. - If Siri is active: Re-starts Siri.

Pressing and holding the button: Siri is deactivated.

(2) MODE Press the button to change the

mode in the following order: Radio Media.

Press and hold the button to turn off.

(3) MUTE Press to mute audio output.

(4) VOLUME Press to adjust the volume.

(5) SEEK/TRACK Press the button in radio mode to

search Presets. Press and hold the button in radio

mode to search frequencies. Press the button in media mode to

change the current song. Press and hold the button in media

mode to quick search through songs.

(6) CALL Pressing the button

- If not in Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree mode or receiving a phone call. First press: Display Dial Number screen. Second press: Automatically dis- play the most recently Dialed Call number.

Third press: Dial the phone num- ber entered.

- Press in the Incoming Call notifica- tion screen to accept the phone call.

- Press in Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree mode to switch to the waiting call.

Pressing and holding the button - If not in Bluetooth Wireless

Technology Handsfree mode or receiving a phone call, the most recently Dialed Call number is dialed.

- Press in Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree mode to transfer the call to your cell phone.

- Press in cell phone mode to switch to Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree mode.

(7) END Press in Bluetooth Wireless

Technology Handsfree mode to end the phone call.

Press in the incoming call screen to reject the call.

4-14

Multimedia System

Do not stare at the screen while driving. Staring at the screen for prolonged periods of time could lead to traffic accidents.

Do not disassemble, assemble, or modify the audio system. Such acts could result in acci- dents, fire, or electric shock.

Using the phone while driving may lead to a lack of attention of traffic conditions and increase the likelihood of accidents. Use the phone fea- ture after parking the vehicle.

Exercise caution not to spill water or introduce foreign objects into the device. Such acts could lead to smoke, fire, or product malfunction.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued) Please refrain from use if the

screen is blank or no sound can be heard as these signs may indicate product malfunc- tion. Continued use in such conditions could lead to acci- dents (fires, electric shock) or product malfunctions.

Do not touch the antenna dur- ing thunder or lightening as such acts may lead to light- ning induced electric shock.

Do not stop or park in park- ing-restricted areas to operate the product. Such acts could lead to traffic accidents.

Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle con- trol that may lead to an acci- dent, severe personal injury, and death. The drivers primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehicle sys- tems which take the drivers eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permis- sible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

WARNING

4-15

M ultim

edia System

4

Information If you want to change the position of

device installation, please inquire with your place of purchase or serv- ice maintenance center. Technical expertise is required to install or dis- assemble the device.

Turn on the car ignition before using this device. Do not operate the audio system for long periods of time with the ignition turned off as such operations may lead to battery discharge.

Do not subject the device to severe shock or impact. Direct pressure onto the front side of the monitor may cause damage to the LCD or touch screen.

When cleaning the device, make sure to turn off the device and use a dry and smooth cloth. Never use tough materials, chemical cloths, or solvents (alcohol, benzene, thinners, etc.) As such materials may damage the device panel or cause color/quality deterioration.

Do not place beverages close to the audio system. Spilling bever- ages may lead to system mal- function.

Placing the audio system within an electromagnetic environment may result in noise interference.

Information In this case of product malfunction, please contact your dealer or vehicle service center.

Information on status icons Icons showing audio status are shown in the upper-right corner of the screen.

i

NOTICEi

Icon Description

Mute Mute engaged

Battery Remaining battery life of a connected Bluetooth

device

Handsfree + Audio stream- ing connection

Bluetooth Handsfree call and audio stream- ing available

Handsfree connection

Bluetooth Handsfree call available

Bluetaooth

audio streaming Bluetooth audio streaming available

Downloading contacts

Downloading contacts through Bluetooth wire- less communications

Downloading call history

Downloading call history through Bluetooth wire- less communications

Line busy Phone call in progress

Mute mic Mic muted during a call (caller cannot hear your voice)

Phone signal strength

Display the phone signal strength for a cell phone connected by Bluetooth

4-16

Multimedia System

Radio

You can listen to FM, AM and SiriusXM* radio.

(1) Band

Switch between FM, AM and SiriusXM*. * if equipped

(2) Presets

Change the preset number on the main screen.

(3) List

Display all available stations.

(4) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

(5) Presets 1~40

Save or listen to favorite stations.

Switching between FM, AM and SiriusXM*

Press the [RADIO] button on the audio system to switch between FM, AM and SiriusXM*.

Select [Band] on the screen to switch between FM, AM and SiriusXM*.

* if equipped

Searching stations

Searching stations by pressing the [SEEK/TRACK] button on the prod- uct.

< Presets >

By selecting [< Presets >], the but- tons for Presets 1~40 displayed on the screen can be changed.

Presets 1~40

Press the button to listen to a preset. Press and hold the button number to save the current station. If the slot is empty, simply pressing saves the station to the slot.

List

A list of all available stations is dis- played. Press the desired station. Favorite stations can be saved to [Presets] by selecting the [+].

Menu

Select [Menu], and select the desired function. Presets: Save up to 40 frequently

used stations. To listen to a preset, press the desired station. Press and hold the desired slot from 1 through 40. This saves the current station in the selected slot. If the slot is empty, simply pressing saves the station to the slot.

Scan: All stations available in the current location of the vehicle are played for five seconds each.

Information: View detailed station information.

Sound Settings: Audio sound set- tings can be changed.

Station Info: Set whether to receive station information such as Station Name, Program Type or Information.

4-17

M ultim

edia System

4

Information - SiriusXM

Satellite Radio information (if equipped)

Satellite Radio channels:

Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a 3-month trial subscription to the Sirius Select package. Youll get over variable channels, including commer- cial free music, plus all your favorite sports, exclusive talk, entertainment, and a selection of premium program- ming. For more information and a complete list of SiriusXM channels, visit siriusxm.com in the United States, siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.

Satellite Radio reception factors:

To receive the satellite signal, your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception perform- ance:

(Continued)

(Continued)

- Antenna obstructions: For opti- mal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio service: SiriusXM is a subscription-based satel- lite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and entertainment pro- gramming to radio receivers, which are available for installation in motor vehi- cles or factory installed, as well as for the home, portable and wireless devices, and through an Internet connection on a personal computer.

Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SiriusXM Satellite Radio system include:

- Hardware and an introductory trial subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle.

- For a small upgrade fee, access to SiriusXM music channels, and other select channels over the Internet using any computer con- nected to the Internet (U.S. cus- tomers only).

(Continued)

(Continued)

SiriusXM services require a sub- scription sold separately, or as a package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If you decide to continue service after your trial, the subscription plan you choose will automatically renew thereafter and you will be charged according to your chosen payment method at then-current rates. Fees and taxes apply. To cancel you must call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.sir- iusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data services are available only in the 48 contiguous states, DC and Puerto Rico (with coverage limita- tions). SiriusXM satellite service is also available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All fees and pro- gramming subject to change. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.

i

4-18

Multimedia System

SiriusXM

(1) Band

Switch between FM, AM and SiriusXM.

(2) Presets

Change the preset number on the main screen.

(3) List

Display all channels.

(4) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

(5) Presets 1~40

Save or listen to favorite channels.

(6) Play Live

Switches to the live broadcast mode.

(7) Skip Backward

Repeats the previously broadcasted program. - Holding for less than 0.8 seconds:

Moves to the previous segment. - Holding for more than 0.8 seconds:

Moves to the previous 5 seconds.

(8) Play/Pause

Pauses/plays the current broadcast- ing program.

(9) Skip Forward

Moves to the next segment.

Switching between FM, AM and SiriusXM

Press the [RADIO] button on the audio system to switch between FM, AM and SiriusXM.

Select [Band] on the screen to switch between FM, AM and SiriusXM.

Searching channels

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to search channels.

< Presets >

By selecting [< Presets >], the but- tons for Presets 1~40 displayed on the screen can be changed.

Presets 1~40

Press the button to listen to a preset. Press and hold the button number to save the current channel.

List

A list of all channels is displayed. Press the desired channel. Favorite channels can be saved to [Presets] by selecting the [+].

4-19

M ultim

edia System

4

Menu

Select [Menu], and select the desired function. Presets: Save up to 40 frequently

used channels. To listen to a preset, press the desired channel. Press and hold the desired slot from 1 through 40. This saves the current channel in the selected slot. If the slot is empty, simply pressing saves the channel to the slot.

Categories: Channels can be searched by category.

Direct Tune: The desired channel can be selected by entering num- bers.

Sound Settings: Audio sound set- tings can be changed.

Tag Song: Tag the current song information. When an Apple device (iPhone, iPod) is connected, tagged song information is sent automatically to the connected device.

Information Up to 50 songs can be tagged.

Scan: All channels available in the vehicle's current location are played for ten seconds each.

Program Schedule: View the Program schedule.

Featured Favorites: The Featured Favorites feature allows SiriusXM to broadcast additional presets. - Example 1: During holidays,

"Holiday Music" might include all SiriusXM channels that are playing holiday music for easy access by users.

Multiple sets of Featured Favorites data can be broadcast by SiriusXM and can change from time to time.

Information: View detailed channel information.

Category Lock: Search or scan channels in the current category only.

Media

Information - Using MP3 Supported audio formats

File formats other than the formats above may not be recognized or playable. Information such as file name may not be displayed.

i

i

Compressed audio formats

MPEG1 Audio Layer3

MPEG2 Audio Layer3

MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3

Windows Media Audio Ver 7.X & 8.X

4-20

Multimedia System

Range of supported compressed file types

1. Bitrate range (Kbps)

2. Sampling frequency (Hz)

The sound quality of MP3/WMA compressed files may vary depend- ing on the bitrate. (A higher bitrate can have better sound quality.)

The product only recognizes files with the MP3 or WMA extension. Files without one of these exten- sions are not recognized.

3. Number of recognizable folders and files

Folders: 2,000 for USB Files: 6,000 for USB No recognition limit for folder hier-

archies

4. Character display range (Unicode) Filenames: Up to 64 English char-

acters (64 Korean characters) Foldername: Up to 32 English

characters (32 Korean characters)

Languages supported (Unicode support)

Korean: 2,604 characters English: 94 characters Common Chinese characters: 4,888

characters Special symbols: 986 characters Japanese/Simplified Chinese char- acters are not supported.

MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2.5 WMA

44100 22050 11025 32000

48000 24000 12000 44100

32000 16000 8000 48000

B IT

R AT

E (k

bp s)

MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2.5 WMA

Layer3 High Range

32 8 8 48

40 16 16 64

48 24 24 80

56 32 32 96

64 40 40 128

80 48 48 160

96 56 56 192

112 64 64

128 80 80

160 96 96

192 112 112

224 128 128

256 144 144

320 160 160

4-21

M ultim

edia System

4

Information - Using the USB Devices

Starting the vehicle while a USB device is connected can damage the device. Please disconnect USB devices before starting the vehicle.

Starting the vehicle or stopping the engine while an external USB device is connected can result in failure of the external USB device to operate.

Be cautious of static electricity when connecting/disconnecting external USB devices.

An encrypted MP3 player is not rec- ognized when connected as an exter- nal device.

External USB devices may not be recognized, depending on the state of the external USB device.

Only products with byte/sectors for- matted at 4 KB or lower are recog- nized.

Only USB devices in FAT12/16/32 format are recognized; NTFS and ExFAT file systems are not recog- nized.

(Continued)

(Continued)

Some USB devices are not recog- nized due to compatibility issues.

Do not touch the USB connections.

Connecting and disconnecting USB devices rapidly over a short period of time can cause equipment failure.

Abnormal sounds may be audible when the USB device is disconnected.

Turn the audio off before connecting or disconnecting external USB devices.

Recognition may take longer depending on the type, capacity or file format of the external USB device. This is not a product mal- function.

Use of USB devices for purposes other than playing music files is pro- hibited.

Image display and video playback are not supported.

(Continued)

(Continued)

Use of USB accessories, including charge and heat though the USB I/F, can lead to reduced product per- formance or malfunctions. Do not use USB devices or accessories for these purposes.

Use of aftermarket USB hubs and extension cables can result in the vehicles audio system failing to rec- ognize your USB device. Connect the USB device directly to the multi- media port of your vehicle.

When using high-capacity USB devices with logical drive divisions, only files saved on the highest level logical drive can be played.

If applications are loaded on a USB drive, file playback may fail.

Some MP3 players, cell phones, dig- ital cameras, etc. (USB devices that are not recognized as mobile stor- age) may not operate normally when connected.

USB charging may not be supported by some mobile devices.

(Continued)

i

4-22

Multimedia System

(Continued)

Operation is guaranteed only for standard (Metal Cover Type) USB Memory drives.

Operation of HDD, CF, SD and mem- ory stick devices is not guaranteed.

DRM (Digital Rights Management) files cannot be played.

SD-type USB memory, CF-type USB memory, and other USB mem- ory devices that require adapters for connection are not supported.

Proper operation of USB HDDs or USB drives with connectors that loosen due to vehicle vibrations is not guaranteed. (iStick, etc.)

USB products that are used as key chains or cell phone accessories may damage the USB jack and affect proper file playback. Please refrain from use. Use only products with plug connectors, as shown in the follow- ing illustration.

When MP3 devices or cell phones are connected simultaneously through AUX, BT Audio and USB modes, a popping noise or malfunc- tion may occur.

USB

(1) Repeat

Enable/disable repeat.

(2) Shuffle

Enable/disable shuffle play.

(3) List

View a list of all songs.

(4) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

(5) Album Image

View song info.

(6) Pause

Pause or play music.

(7) Playback progress

Press to skip to the desired location.

Playback

Press the [MEDIA] button, and select [USB].

Connect a USB drive to the USB port to automatically play files on the USB drive.

Changing songs

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to play the previous or next song.

Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK] button to rewind or fast forward the currently playing song.

Search songs by turning TUNE knob, and press the knob to play.

4-23

M ultim

edia System

4 Selecting songs from a list

Select [List] to see a list of songs available for play. Select and play the desired song.

Repeat play

Select [Repeat] to enable or disable Repeat all, Repeat current song, Repeat folder or Repeat category. Repeat all: All songs in the

playlist are repeated. Repeat current song: The cur-

rently playing song is repeated. Repeat folder: All songs in the

current folder are repeated. Repeat category: Repeat all

songs in the current category.

Information The repeat folder function is available only when songs are playing from the [File] category under [List].

Shuffle play

Select [Shuffle] to enable/disable Shuffle, Shuffle folder or Shuffle category play. Shuffle: Songs are played in

random order. Shuffle folder: Songs within

the current folder are played in ran- dom order.

Shuffle category: Songs within the current category are played in random order.

Menu

Select [Menu], and select the desired function.

Save to My Music: Songs on your USB device can be saved to My Music.

(1) File: Select a file to save.

(2) Mark All: Select all files.

(3) Unmark All: Deselect all files.

i

4-24

Multimedia System

(4) Save: Save the selected file(s). - Select the files you want to save,

and select [Save]. This saves the selected files to My Music.

- Saving is canceled if phone calls are received or made while saving.

- If Siri is activated, phone calls are received or made while sav- ing, saving will be canceled.

- Up to 6,000 files can be saved. - The currently playing file on the

USB device cannot be changed while saving.

- My Music cannot be used while saving.

- Up to 700 MB can be saved. Information: Detailed information

on the currently playing song is dis- played.

Sound Settings: Audio sound set- tings can be changed.

Information - Using the iPod Devices

To use the audio systems iPod con- trol function, use the dedicated cable provided with your iPod.

Connecting the iPod to the vehicle during play may result in a loud noise that lasts about one to two sec- onds. Connect the iPod to the vehi- cle after stopping or pausing play.

Connect the iPod with the vehicle in the ACC ON state to begin charging.

When connecting the iPod cable, be sure to fully push the cable into the port.

When EQ effects are enabled simul- taneously on external devices, such as iPods and the audio system, the EQ effects may overlap, causing sound quality deterioration or dis- tortion. Deactivate the EQ function for all external devices, if possible.

Noise may occur when your iPod

or the AUX port is connected. Disconnect and store separately when not in use.

(Continued)

(Continued)

There may be noise if the audio sys- tem is used with an iPod or AUX external device connected to the power jack. In these cases, discon- nect the iPod or external device from the power jack.

Play may be interrupted, or device malfunctions may occur depending on the characteristics of your iPod/iPhone.

Play may fail if your iPhone is con- nected through both Bluetooth Wireless Technology and USB. In this case, select Dock connector or Bluetooth Wireless Technology on your iPhone to change the sound output settings.

If your software version does not support the communication proto- col or your iPod is not recognized due to device failure, anomalies or defects, iPod mode cannot be used.

iPod nano (5th generation) devices may not be recognized if the battery is low. Charge sufficiently before use.

(Continued)

i

4-25

M ultim

edia System

4

(Continued)

The search and song play order in the iPod device may be different from the search order in the audio system.

If the iPod has failed due to an internal defect, please reset the iPod (consult your iPod manual).

Depending on the software version, the iPod may fail to sync with the system. If the media is removed or disconnected before recognition, the previous mode may not be restored (iPad cannot be charged).

Cables other than the 1-meter cable provided with iPod/iPhone prod- ucts may not be recognized.

When other music apps are used on your iPod, the system sync func- tion may fail due to malfunction of the iPod application.

iPod

(1) Repeat

Enable/disable repeat.

(2) Shuffle

Enable/disable shuffle play.

(3) List

View a list of all songs.

(4) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

(5) Album Image

View song info.

(6) Pause

Pause or play music.

(7) Playback progress

Press to skip to the desired location.

Playback

Connect your iPod to the audio USB port, press the [MEDIA] but- ton, and select [iPod].

Changing songs

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to play the previous or next song.

Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK] button to rewind or fast forward the currently playing song.

Search songs by turning the TUNE knob, and press the knob to play.

Selecting songs from a list

Select [List] to see a list of songs available for play. Select and play the desired song.

4-26

Multimedia System

Repeat play

Select [Repeat] to enable or disable Repeat category, Repeat current song. Repeat category: Repeat all

songs in the current category. Repeat current song: The cur-

rently playing song is repeated.

Shuffle play

Select [Shuffle] to enable/disable Shuffle category play. Shuffle category: Songs within

the current category are played in random order.

Menu

Select [Menu], and select the desired function. Information: Detailed info on the

currently playing song is displayed. Sound Settings: Audio sound set-

tings can be changed.

When other music programs are running

When songs saved on your iPod

are playing through a separate music app, the following screen is dis- played. (1) Play/Pause: Pause or play music.

(2) Play iPod Files: Play music saved on your iPod.

(3) Album Image: View playback info.

Information Operation cannot be carried out cor- rectly due to iPod application mal- function.

Play iPod Files

Select [Play iPod Files] to play songs saved on your iPod. If there are no songs saved on your iPod, the [Play iPod Files] is dis- abled.

i

4-27

M ultim

edia System

4

Information - Using Bluetooth Wireless

Technology Audio Bluetooth Wireless Technology

Audio mode can only be used if a Bluetooth Wireless Technology enabled phone is connected. Only devices that support Bluetooth Wireless Technology audio can be used.

If the Bluetooth Wireless Technology-enabled phone is dis- connected during play, the music stops.

When the TRACK UP/DOWN but- tons are used during Bluetooth Wireless Technology audio stream- ing, a popping noise or sound inter- ruptions may occur, depending on the cell phone device.

Depending on the cell phone model, the audio streaming function may not be supported.

(Continued)

(Continued)

If a phone call is made or received when music is playing in Bluetooth Wireless Technology Audio mode, the call may mix with the music.

When returning to Bluetooth Wireless Technology Audio mode after ending a call, play might not resume automatically for some cell phone models.

Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree is a feature that enables drivers to practice safe driving. Connecting the car audio system with a Bluetooth

Wireless Technology phone allows the user to conveniently make calls, receive calls, and manage the phone book. Before using the Bluetooth Wireless Technology, carefully read the contents of this users manual.

Excessive use or operations while driving may lead to negli- gent driving practices and be the cause of accidents.

Do not operate the device exces- sively while driving.

Viewing the screen for pro- longed periods of time is dan- gerous and may lead to acci- dents.

When driving, view the screen only for short periods of time.

NOTICEi

4-28

Multimedia System

Bluetooth Wireless Technology (BT) Audio

(1) Repeat

Enable/disable repeat.

(2) Shuffle

Enable/disable shuffle play.

(3) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

(4) Play/Pause

Pause or play music.

Information Some cell phone models may not

support particular functions.

Bluetooth Wireless Technology audio volume is synced with cell phone media volume.

Playback

Press the [MEDIA] button, and select [BT Audio].

Changing songs

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to play the previous or next song.

Information Some cell phones may not support this function.

Repeat play

Select [Repeat] to enable or disable Repeat all, Repeat current song or Repeat category. Repeat all: All songs in the

playlist are repeated. Repeat current song: The cur-

rently playing song is repeated. Repeat category: Repeat all

songs in the current category.

Information The repeat play function is engaged, depending on the operation of the con- nected Bluetooth Wireless Technology device.

Shuffle play

Select [Shuffle] to enable/disable Shuffle, Shuffle category play. Shuffle: Songs are played in

random order. Shuffle category: Songs within

the current category are played in random order.

i

i

i

4-29

M ultim

edia System

4

Information The shuffle function is engaged, depend- ing on the operation of the connected Bluetooth Wireless Technology device.

Menu

Select [Menu], and select the desired function. Connections:The currently connected

Bluetooth Wireless Technology device can be changed.

Information: Detailed information on the currently playing song is displayed.

Sound Settings: Audio sound set- tings can be changed.

AUX

Running AUX

Press the [MEDIA] button, and select [AUX].

Connect the external device con- nection jack to the AUX terminal to run AUX.

(1) Sound Settings: Audio sound set- tings can be changed.

My Music

(1) Repeat

Enable/disable repeat.

(2) Shuffle

Enable/disable shuffle play.

(3) List

View a list of all songs.

(4) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

(5) Album Image

View song info.

i

4-30

Multimedia System

(6) Pause

Pause or play music.

(7) Playback progress

Press to skip to the desired location.

Playback

Press the [MEDIA] button, and select [My Music]. My Music cannot be selected if it

does not contain music. Check the content of your USB

drive before saving music to My Music.

Changing songs

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to play the previous or next song. Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK]

button to rewind or fast forward the currently playing song.

Search songs by turning the TUNE knob and press the knob to play.

Selecting songs from a list

Select [List] to see a list of songs available for play. Select and play the desired song.

Repeat play

Select [Repeat] to enable or disable Repeat all, Repeat current song or Repeat category. Repeat all: All songs in the

playlist are repeated. Repeat current song: The cur-

rently playing song is repeated. Repeat category: Repeat all

songs in the current category.

Shuffle play

Select [Shuffle] to enable/disable Shuffle, Shuffle category play. Shuffle: Songs are played in

random order. Shuffle category: Songs within

the current category are played in random order.

Menu

Select [Menu], and select the desired function.

Delete Files: You can delete files from My Music.

(1) File: Select saved file.

(2) Mark All: Select all files. (3) Unmark All: Deselect all files.

4-31

M ultim

edia System

4

(4) Delete: Delete the selected file(s). - Select the file to delete, then

select [Delete] to delete it. - If Siri is activated, phone calls

are received or made during delete, delete will be canceled.

Add to Playlist: Frequently played songs can be paired in a [Playlist]. - Songs can be played from the

[Playlist]. Information: Detailed info on the

currently playing song is displayed. Sound Settings: Audio sound set-

tings can be changed.

Delete from Playlist

When a song in the playlist is play- ing, select [Menu] and select [Delete from Playlist]. Select the song to delete, then select [Delete].

Pandora

(1) Thumbs Down

If you dont like the song that is cur- rently playing, press this button to skip to the next song and to minimize the number of songs from similar genres.

Information Pandora limits the number of times that you can skip to the next song.

(2) Thumbs Up

If you like the song that is currently playing, press this button. Pandora

will play more songs from the same genre.

Information The settings of this function cannot be reset.

(3) Skip

Skip to the next song.

Information Pandora limits the number of times that you can skip to the next song.

(4) Stations

Display the station list.

(5) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

(6) Album Image

View song info.

i

i

i

4-32

Multimedia System

(7) Pause

Pause or play music.

(8) Shared Station

Indicate that the station is already shared.

Information Thumbs Up/Down is not available for shared stations.

Playback

Press the [MEDIA] button, and select [Pandora].

Information Pandora: Connect a smartphone to

listen to Pandora Radio

Apple devices must be connected via USB cable and Android devices must be connected via Bluetooth Wireless Technology in order to run Pandora.

Menu

Select [Menu] and select the desired function. Bookmark: Add the song that is

currently playing to your book- marks list.

Information You can view your bookmarked

songs on your online Pandora pro- file. Go to pandora.com, then go to [Your profile] above the player. That will bring up a page with your sta- tions and bookmarked songs.

The settings of this function cannot be reset.

Quit: Exit Pandora mode and return to previous audio mode.

Information: Detailed info on the currently playing song is displayed.

Sound Settings: Audio sound set- tings can be changed.

Phone

Information - Using the Bluetooth

Wireless Technology Cellular Phone

Bluetooth Wireless Technology is a near-field wireless networking tech- nology that uses the 2.4 GHz fre- quency to connect various devices within a certain distance wirelessly.

The technology is used in PCs, peripherals, Bluetooth Wireless Technology phones, tablet PCs, household appliances and automo- biles. Devices supporting Bluetooth Wireless Technology can exchange data at high speeds without physical cable connections.

Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree devices enable convenient access to phone functions through cell phones equipped with Bluetooth Wireless Technology.

Some Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices may not be supported by the Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree function.

(Continued)

i

i

i

i

4-33

M ultim

edia System

4

(Continued)

When Bluetooth Wireless Technology is connected and calls are attempted through a connected cell phone from outside the vehicle, the call is connected through the Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree function of the vehicle.

Please be sure to disconnect the Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree function through your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device or the audio screen.

See https://www.hyundaiusa.com/ BlueTooth/ for a list of supported Bluetooth devices.

Safety precautions

The Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree function helps drivers to drive safely. By connecting a Bluetooth Wireless Technology- enabled phone to the vehicles audio system, phone calls can be made and received through the audio system and contacts can be managed. Consult the user manual before use.

Excessive manipulation of controls while driving, making it difficult to pay attention to the road ahead, can lead to accidents. Do not oper- ate the device excessively while driving.

Looking at the screen for a pro- longed time increases the risk of accidents. Keep time spent looking at the screen to a minimum.

Precautions when connecting Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices

The vehicle supports the following Bluetooth Wireless Technology functions. Some Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices may not sup- port some functions. 1) Bluetooth Wireless Technology

Handsfree phone calls 2) Operations during a call (Private,

Switch, Mic Vol. controls) 3) Download call history saved to the

Bluetooth Wireless Technology device

4) Download contacts saved to the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device

5) Automatic contacts/call history download when Bluetooth

Wireless Technology is connected 6) Automatic Bluetooth Wireless

Technology device connection when the vehicle is started

7) Bluetooth Wireless Technology audio streaming playback

Before connecting the audio system to your device, make sure your device supports Bluetooth Wireless Technology.

4-34

Multimedia System

Even if your device supports Bluetooth Wireless Technology, a Bluetooth Wireless Technology con- nection cannot be established if the devices Bluetooth Wireless Technology function is switched off. Search and connect with the Bluetooth Wireless Technology function enabled.

Pair or connect Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices to the audio system with the vehicle at a stand- still.

If a Bluetooth Wireless Technology connection is lost due to abnormal conditions while a Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device is con- nected (communication range exceeded, device power OFF, communication errors, etc.), the disconnected Bluetooth Wireless Technology device is searched for and automatically reconnected.

If you want to disable the Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device auto- connect function, turn the Bluetooth

Wireless Technology function OFF on your device. Consult the user manu- als for individual devices to see whether Bluetooth Wireless Technology is supported.

Handsfree call quality and volume may vary depending on the type of Bluetooth Wireless Technology device.

Some Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices are subject to intermittent Bluetooth Wireless Technology connection failures. In this case, use the following method. 1) Turn the Bluetooth Wireless

Technology function off on your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device Turn it on and try again.

2) Delete the paired device from both the audio system and Bluetooth Wireless Technology device, then pair again.

3) Power down your Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device Turn it on and try again.

4) Completely remove the battery from your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device; reinsert it, reboot, and attempt connection.

5) Restart the vehicle and reat- tempt connection.

Pairing a Bluetooth Wireless Technology device

Information on pairing Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices

Pairing refers to the process of pair- ing Bluetooth Wireless Technology cell phones or devices with the sys- tem prior to connection.This is a nec- essary procedure for Bluetooth

Wireless Technology connection and usage.

Up to five devices can be paired. Pairing Bluetooth device is not

allowed while vehicle is moving.

Pairing the first Bluetooth Wireless Technology device

Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system or the [CALL] button on the steering wheel remote control Search for the vehicle from the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device, and pair Enter the passkey on the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device or approve passkey Bluetooth Wireless Technology pair- ing completed.

4-35

M ultim

edia System

4

1. When the [PHONE] button on the audio or the [CALL] button on the steering wheel remote control is pressed, the following screen is dis- played. Devices can now be paired.

(1) Vehicle Name: Searched name in Bluetooth Wireless Technology device.

Information The vehicle name in the image above is an example. Refer to your device for the actual name of your device.

2. Search for available Bluetooth

Wireless Technology devices in the Bluetooth Wireless Technology menu of your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device (cell phone, etc.).

3. Confirm that the vehicle name in your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device matches the vehicle name shown on the audio screen, then select it.

4. For devices that require passkey confirmation, the following screen is shown on the audio system. A 6-digit passkey input screen is shown in the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device.

- After confirming that the 6-digit passkey on the audio screen and the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device are identical, select [OK] in your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device.

Information The 6-digit passkey in the image above is an example. Refer to your vehicle for the actual passkey.

Pairing a second Bluetooth Wireless Technology device

Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Bluetooth] Select [Connections] Select [Add New].

- The pairing procedure from this point is identical to [Pairing the first Bluetooth device].

i

i

4-36

Multimedia System

Information Bluetooth Wireless Technology

standby mode lasts for three min- utes. If a device is not paired within three minutes, pairing is canceled. Start over from the beginning.

For most Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices, a connection is established automatically after pair- ing. Some devices, however, require separate confirmation when con- necting after pairing. Be sure to check your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device after pairing to confirm that it has connected.

Connecting Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices

If there are no connected devices

Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system or the [CALL] button in the steering wheel remote control List of paired Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices Select the desired Bluetooth Wireless Technology device from the list Connect Bluetooth

Wireless Technology.

If there are connected devices

Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system Select [Settings] Select [Connections] Select Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device to connect Select [Connect] Connect Bluetooth

Wireless Technology.

Information Only one Bluetooth Wireless

Technology device can be connected at a time.

When a Bluetooth Wireless Technology device is connected, other devices cannot be paired.

i

i

4-37

M ultim

edia System

4

Accepting/rejecting phone calls Receiving phone calls with Bluetooth

Wireless Technology connected.

(1) Caller name: If the caller number is in your contacts, the correspon- ding name is displayed.

(2) Incoming phone number: Incoming phone number is displayed.

(3) Accept: Accept call. (4) Reject: Reject call.

Information When the incoming call screen is

displayed, audio mode and the set- tings screen cannot be shown. Only call volume control is supported.

Some Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices may not support the call reject function.

Some Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices may not support the phone number display function.

Operation during calls Incoming call with Bluetooth Wireless Technology connected Select [Accept].

(1) Call duration: Call duration display. (2) Caller name: If the caller number is

in your contacts, the corresponding name is displayed.

(3) Incoming phone number: Incoming phone number is displayed.

(4) Keypad: Number keypad for Automatic Response Service input is displayed.

(5) Private: Call is transferred to a cell phone.

(6) Outgoing Volume:Adjust outgoing voice volume.

(7) End: End call.

i

4-38

Multimedia System

Information Some Bluetooth Wireless Technology

devices may not support the Private function.

The outgoing voice volume may vary depending on the type of Bluetooth

device. If the outgoing voice volume is too high or low, adjust the Outgoing Volume.

Favorites Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system Select [Favorites] Favorites list displayed.

(1) Favorites list: A list of paired favorites is displayed. Connect a call when selected.

(2) Add to Favorites: Add a down- loaded phone number to favorites.

(3) Delete: Delete a saved favorite.

Information Up to 20 favorites can be paired for

each paired Bluetooth Wireless Technology device.

Favorites can be accessed when the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device they were paired from is con- nected.

The audio system does not down- load favorites from Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices. Favorites must be newly saved before use.

To add to favorites, contacts must be downloaded first.

Saved favorites are not updated even if the contacts of the connected Bluetooth Wireless Technology device are changed. In this case, favorites need to be deleted and added again.

ii

4-39

M ultim

edia System

4

Call history Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system Select [Call history] Call history is displayed.

(1) Call history: Display the down- loaded call history list. Connect a call when selected.

(2) Sort by:Sort by all calls, dialed calls, received calls or missed calls.

(3) Download: Download call history from connected Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices.

Information Up to 50 dialed, received and missed

calls are saved.

When the latest call history is received, the existing call history is deleted.

Contacts Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system Select [Contacts] Select letter (ABC) Contacts dis- played.

(1) Contacts: Display downloaded contacts. Connect a call when selected.

(2) Download: Download contacts from connected Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices.

Information Up to 2,000 contacts can be saved.

In some cases, additional confirmation from your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device is necessary when downloading contacts. If downloading of contacts unsuccessful, consult your Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices settings or the audio screen to approve the download.

Contacts without phone numbers are not displayed.

i

i

4-40

Multimedia System

Dial Press the [PHONE] button on the audio Select [Dial].

(1) Phone number entry window: The phone number entered using the keypad is displayed.

(2) Clear - Press to delete individual digits. - Press and hold to delete the

entire phone number. (3) Keypad: Enter phone number. (4) Bluetooth Wireless Technology

Phone name - The name of the connected

Bluetooth Wireless Technology device is displayed.

- Contacts matching the keypad number/letter input are displayed.

(5) Call - Enter and select a phone num-

ber to call. - Select without entering a phone

number to see the most recent dialed call.

Settings Press the [PHONE] button on the audio Select [Settings]. - For phone Setup, refer to Setup

page Select [Bluetooth].

Siri

Information - Using Siri If you want to use Siri, you have to

connect your iOS device to multime- dia system through Bluetooth Wireless Technology. (Please check whether your iOS device supports Siri and turning Siri On)

If the iOS version is changed, the functions and response may be dif- ferent according to the iOS device and the latest version.

Siri automatically stops in the fol- lowing events.

1)Outgoing and incoming phone calls.

2)Media (USB, etc.) is connected. (Siri mode is maintained when iPods are connected)

3)Rear camera is activated (option).

4)Vehicle is started or engine is turned off.

5)Screen transition buttons, such as RADIO or MEDIA, are selected.

(Continued)

i

4-41

M ultim

edia System

4

(Continued)

6)When a pop-up message is dis- played on the screen due to acci- dental execution of Siri.

The microphone is located above the drivers seat. To ensure proper Siri, state your voice while maintaining proper driving posture.

Starting Siri Press the [VOICE] button on the steering wheel remote control to start Siri and see the screen.

(1) Speak: Re-start Siri. (2) Exit: End Siri.

Information Functions and feedbacks from voice

commands via Siri are executed in the iOS device.

The Audio system only supports Phone related functions, other functions will be performed in your iOS device.

Setup

Access Display, Sound, Date/Time, Bluetooth, System, Screen Saver and Display Off settings. Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system.

Display Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Display]. Mode: Audio screen brightness can

be adjusted to the time of day. Illumination: The brightness of the

audio screen can be changed.

i

4-42

Multimedia System

Sound Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Sound]. Position: Sound balance and pan-

ning can be adjusted. Tone: Sound tone color can be

adjusted. Speed dependent volume:

Automatically adjust volume based on vehicle speed.

Beep: Select whether to play a beep sound when the screen is touched.

Date/Time Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Date/Time]. Set Time: Set the time displayed on

the audio screen. Time Format: Choose between 12-

hour and 24-hour time formats. Set Date: Set the date displayed on

the audio screen.

Bluetooth Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Bluetooth]. Connections: Control pairing, dele-

tion, connection and disconnection of Blluetooth Wireless Technology devices.

Auto Connection Priority: Set the connection priority of Bluetooth

Wireless Technology devices when the vehicle is started.

Download Contacts: Contacts can be downloaded from connected Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices.

Bluetooth Voice Prompts*: Play or mute voice prompts for Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device pair- ing, connection and errors. * if equipped

Information When paired devices are deleted,

the call history and contacts of the device saved to the audio system are deleted.

For Bluetooth Wireless Technology connections with low connection priority, some time may be required for the connection to be established.

Contacts can be downloaded only from the currently connected Bluetooth Wireless Technology device.

If no Bluetooth Wireless Technology device is connected, the Download Contacts button is disabled.

If the language setting is Korean, Bluetooth voice prompts are not supported.

i

4-43

M ultim

edia System

4

System Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [System]. Memory Information: View My

Music memory usage. Language: Change the user lan-

guage. Default: Reset the audio system. System Information: At the System

Information screen, Software version information, updates are available. - System Update: At the System

Information screen, insert the USB memory with the latest file downloaded, and then select the [Update] to begin updating. The system with then reboot auto- matically.

Information The system resets to the default val-

ues, and all saved data and settings are lost.

This product needs supplemented software updates and additional functions, which collectively may take some time to complete, depend- ing on the amount of data.

If the Power is disconnected or the USB is removed during an update, the data might be damaged. Please wait until the update is complete while engine is on.

Screen Saver Set the information displayed when the audio system is switched off or the screen is turned off. Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Screen Saver]. Analog: An analog clock is dis-

played. Digital: A digital clock is displayed. None: No information is displayed.

Display Off To prevent glare, the screen can be turned off with the audio system in operation. Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Display Off].

Information Use Screen Saver to set the informa- tion to be displayed when the screen is turned off.

i

i

4-44

Multimedia System

FCC

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a resi- dential installation.

This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or tel- evision reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to cor- rect the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Caution: Any changes or modifications to this device not explicitly approved by manufacturer could void your authority to operate this equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, includ- ing interference that may cause undesired operation.

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum 20cm between the radiator and your body. This trans- mitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter unless authorized to do so by the FCC.

Declaration of Conformity

Driving your vehicle

Before Driving ........................................................5-3 Before Entering the Vehicle ...........................................5-3 Before Starting ..................................................................5-3

Power Button..........................................................5-5 POWER Button Positions.................................................5-6 Starting the Vehicle ..........................................................5-8 Turning Off the Vehicle ...................................................5-9

Reduction Gear.....................................................5-10 Reduction Gear Operation ............................................5-10 Parking...............................................................................5-12 LCD Display Messages...................................................5-12 Good Driving Practices ..................................................5-15

Paddle Shifter (Regenerative Braking Control)..................................................................5-16 Braking System ....................................................5-17

Power Brakes...................................................................5-17 Disc Brake Wear Indicator ............................................5-18 Electronic Parking Brake (EPB)...................................5-18 Auto Hold ..........................................................................5-23 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ....................................5-27 Electronic Stability Control (ESC)................................5-29 Vehicle Stability Management (VSM).........................5-33 Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) ....................................5-34 Good Braking Practices.................................................5-35

Drive Mode Integrated Control System............5-36 Blind Spot Detection System (BSD) ..................5-38

BSD (Blind Spot Detection) / LCA (Lane Change Assist).............................................5-39 RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ..................................5-41 Detecting Sensor.............................................................5-43 Limitations of the System.............................................5-44

Autonomous (Automatic) Emergency Braking (AEB)......................................................................5-46

System Setting and Activation.....................................5-46 AEB Warning Message and System Control ............5-48 AEB Sensor.......................................................................5-50 System Malfunction .......................................................5-52 Limitations of the System.............................................5-54

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).................5-59 LKAS Operation ...............................................................5-60 Warning Light and Message.........................................5-64 Limitations of the System.............................................5-65 LKAS Function Change ..................................................5-66

Cruise control .......................................................5-67 Cruise Control Operation...............................................5-67

5

5

Advanced Smart Cruise Control System...........5-72 Smart Cruise Control Speed .........................................5-73 Smart Cruise Control Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance...5-78 Sensor to Detect Distance to the Vehicle Ahead ...5-81 To Adjust the Sensitivity of Smart Cruise Control...5-82 To Convert to Cruise Control Mode............................5-83 Limitations of the System.............................................5-83

Special Driving Conditions ..................................5-89 Hazardous Driving Conditions......................................5-89 Rocking the Vehicle ........................................................5-89 Smooth Cornering ...........................................................5-90 Driving at Night................................................................5-90 Driving in the Rain ..........................................................5-90 Driving in Flooded Areas...............................................5-91 Highway Driving...............................................................5-91

Winter Driving ......................................................5-92 Snow or Icy Conditions..................................................5-92 Winter Precautions.........................................................5-94

Vehicle Load Limit................................................5-96 Tire Loading Information Label ...................................5-96

Trailer Towing.....................................................5-100

5-3

Driving your vehicle

5

Before Entering the Vehicle Be sure all windows, outside mir-

ror(s), and outside lights are clean and unobstructed.

Remove frost, snow, or ice. Visually check the tires for uneven

wear and damage. Check under the vehicle for any

sign of leaks. Be sure there are no obstacles

behind you if you intend to back up.

Before Starting Make sure the hood, the liftgate,

and the doors are securely closed and locked.

Adjust the position of the seat and steering wheel.

Adjust the inside and outer side view mirrors.

Verify all the lights work. Fasten your seat belts. Check that

all passengers have fastened their seat belts.

Check the gauges and indicators in the instrument panel and the mes- sages on the instrument display when the POWER button is in the ON position.

Check that any items you are car- rying are stored properly or fas- tened down securely.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

Engine exhaust and a wide vari- ety of automobile components including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit harmful chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and cer- tain products of components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

WARNING

BEFORE DRIVING

5-4

Driving your vehicle

NEVER drink or take drugs and drive. Drinking or taking drugs and driving is dangerous and may result in an accident and SERI- OUS INJURY or DEATH. Drunk driving is the number one contributor to the highway death toll each year. Even a small amount of alcohol will affect your reflexes, percep- tions and judgment. Just one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions and emergencies and your reac- tion time gets worse with each additional drink. Driving while under the influ- ence of drugs is as dangerous or more dangerous than driving under the influence of alcohol.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued) You are much more likely to have a serious accident if you drink or take drugs and drive. If you are drinking or taking drugs, don't drive. Do not ride with a driver who has been drinking or taking drugs. Choose a designated driv- er or call a taxi.

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH, take the fol- lowing precautions: ALWAYS wear your seat belt.

All passengers must be prop- erly belted whenever the vehi- cle is moving. For more infor- mation, refer to "Seat Belts" in chapter 2.

Always drive defensively. Assume other drivers or pedes- trians may be careless and make mistakes.

Stay focused on the task of driving. Driver distraction can cause accidents.

Leave plenty of space between you and the vehicle in front of you.

WARNING

5-5

Driving your vehicle

5

POWER BUTTON

Whenever the front door is opened, the POWER button will illuminate and will go off 30 seconds after the door is closed.

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH, take the fol- lowing precautions: NEVER allow children or any

person who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to touch the POWER button or related parts. Unexpected and sud- den vehicle movement can occur.

NEVER reach through the steering wheel for the POWER button or any other control, while the vehicle is in motion. The presence of your hand or arm in this area may cause a loss of vehicle control result- ing in an accident.

WARNING

OAEE056019

To turn the vehicle off in an emergency: Press and hold the POWER but- ton for more than two seconds OR Rapidly press and release the POWER button three times (within three seconds).

(Continued)

(Continued) If the vehicle is still moving, you can restart the vehicle without depressing the brake pedal by pressing the POWER button with the gear in the N (Neutral) position.

WARNING

NEVER press the POWER but- ton while the vehicle is in motion except in an emer- gency. This will result in the vehicle turning off and loss of power assist for the steering and brake systems. This may lead to loss of directional con- trol and braking function, which could cause an accident.

Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the gear is in the P (Park) position, set the parking brake, press the POWER button to the OFF posi- tion, and take the Smart Key with you. Unexpected vehicle movement may occur if these precautions are not followed.

WARNING

5-6

Driving your vehicle

POWER Button Positions

Button Position Action Notice

OFF To turn off the vehicle, press the POWER button with the gear in P (Park). Also, the vehicle will turn off when the POWER button is pressed with the gear in D (Drive) or R (Reverse) because the gear automatically shifts to the P (Park) position. But, when it is pressed in N (Neutral), the POWER button will go to the ACC position.

ACC Press the POWER button when the button is in the OFF position without depressing the brake pedal. Some electrical accessories are usable.

5-7

Driving your vehicle

5

Button Position Action Notice

ON Press the POWER button while it is in the ACC position without depressing the brake pedal. The warning lights can be checked before the vehicle is started.

Do not leave the POWER button in the ON position when the vehicle is not in the ready ( ) mode to prevent the battery from dis- charging.

START To start the vehicle, depress the brake pedal and press the POWER button with the gear in the P (Park) position.

If you press the POWER button without depressing the brake pedal, the vehicle does not start and the POWER button changes as follows: OFF ACC ON OFF or ACC

5-8

Driving your vehicle

Starting the Vehicle Information The vehicle will start by pressing the

POWER button, only when the smart key is in the vehicle.

Even if the smart key is in the vehi- cle, and when it is far away from the driver, the vehicle may not start.

When the POWER button is in the ACC or ON position, any door is open, the system checks for the smart key. When the smart key is not in the vehicle, the " " indica- tor will blink and the warning "Key not in vehicle" will come on. When all doors are closed, the chime will also sound for about 5 seconds. Keep the smart key in the vehicle when in the ACC position or if the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode.

1. Always carry the smart key with you.

2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

3. Make sure the gear is in P (Park). 4. Depress the brake pedal. 5. Press the POWER button. If the

vehicle starts, the " " indicator will come on.

Information Always start the vehicle with your

foot on the brake pedal.

If ambient temperature is low, the " " indicator may remain illumi- nated longer than the normal amount of time.

i

i

Always wear appropriate shoes when operating your vehicle. Unsuitable shoes, such as high heels, ski boots, sandals, flip- flops, etc., may interfere with your ability to use the brake and accelerator pedals.

Do not start the vehicle with the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle can move and lead to an accident.

WARNING

5-9

Driving your vehicle

5

To prevent damage to the vehicle: If the " " indicator turns off while you are in motion, do not attempt to shift to the P (Park) position.

To prevent damage to the vehicle: When the stop lamp fuse is blown, you cannot normally start the vehicle. Replace the fuse with a new one. If you are not able to replace the fuse, you can start the vehicle by pressing and holding the POWER button for 10 seconds with the POWER button in the ACC position. Do not press the POWER button for more than 10 seconds except when the stop lamp fuse is blown. For your safety always depress the brake pedal before starting the vehicle.

Information If the smart key battery is weak or the smart key does not work correctly, you can start the vehicle by pressing the POWER button with the smart key in the direction of the picture above.

Turning Off the Vehicle 1. Depress the brake pedal fully. 2. Shift to P (Park). 3. Apply the parking brake. 4. Press the POWER button to turn

the vehicle off. 5. Make sure the " " indicator

light on the instrument cluster is turned off.

i

NOTICE

NOTICE

OAEE056024

If the " " indicator light on the instrument cluster is still on, the vehicle is not turned off and can move when the gear is in any position except P (Park).

CAUTION

5-10

Driving your vehicle

Reduction Gear Operation

Select gear positions by pressing the shift button. For your safety, always depress the brake pedal while shifting to another gear.

Gear position

The indicator in the instrument clus- ter displays the gear position when the POWER button is in the ON posi- tion.

REDUCTION GEAR

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death: ALWAYS check the surround-

ing areas near your vehicle for people, especially children, before shifting a vehicle into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the gear is in the P (Park) posi- tion, then set the parking brake, and place the POWER button in the OFF position. Unexpected and sudden vehi- cle movement can occur if these precautions are not fol- lowed.

WARNING

OAEE056001L

OAEE046103

5-11

Driving your vehicle

5

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into P (Park). To shift the gear from R (Reverse), N (Neutral) or D (Drive) to P (Park), press the [P] button. If you turn off the vehicle in D (Drive) or R (Reverse), the gear automatical- ly shifts to P (Park).

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehicle backward. To shift to R (Reverse), press the [R] button while depressing the brake pedal.

N (Neutral)

The wheels and gear are not engaged. To shift to N (Neutral), press the [N] button while depressing the brake pedal. Always depress the brake pedal when you are shifting from N (Neutral) to another gear. In N (Neutral), if the driver attempts to turn off the vehicle, the gear remains in N (Neutral) and the POWER button will be in the ACC position. To turn off the vehicle from the ACC position, press the [P] button within 3 minutes. The vehicle will shift to P (Park) and turn off.

When the drivers door is opened within 3 minutes with the POWER button in the ACC position and the gear in N (Neutral), the vehicle is automatically turned OFF and shifted to the P (Park) position.

D (Drive)

This is the normal driving position. To shift to D (Drive), press the [D] button while depressing the brake pedal.

Shifting into P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion may cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

After the vehicle has stopped, always make sure the gear is in P (Park), apply the parking brake, and turn the vehicle off.

Do not use the P (Park) posi- tion in place of the parking brake.

WARNING

5-12

Driving your vehicle

Shift-lock system For your safety, your vehicle has a shift-lock system which prevents shifting the gear from P (Park) or N (Neutral) into R (Reverse) or D (Drive) unless the brake pedal is depressed. To shift from P (Park) or N (Neutral) into R (Reverse) or D (Drive) : 1. Depress and hold the brake pedal. 2. Start the vehicle or place the

POWER button in the ON position. 3. Press the R (Reverse) or D (Drive)

button.

When the battery (12 V) is dis- charged You cannot shift the gear when the battery is discharged. Jump start your vehicle (refer to Jump Starting in chapter 6) or con- tact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Parking Always come to a complete stop and continue to depress the brake pedal. Shift to the P (Park) position, apply the parking brake, and place the POWER button in the OFF position. Take the Key with you when exiting the vehicle.

LCD Display Messages Shifting conditions not met

The message appears on the LCD display when driving speed is too fast to shift the gear. Decrease the vehicle speed or slow down before shifting the gear.

OAEE056103L

5-13

Driving your vehicle

5

Press brake pedal to change gear

The message appears on the LCD display, when the brake pedal is not depressed while shifting the gear. Depress the brake pedal and then shift the gear.

Shift to P after stopping

The message appears on the LCD display when the gear is shifted to P (Park) while the vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle before shifting to P (Park).

PARK engaged

The message appears on the LCD display when the P (Park) position is engaged.

OAEE056104L

OAEE056105L OAEE056111L

5-14

Driving your vehicle

Gear already selected

The message appears on the LCD display when the selected gear but- ton is pressed again.

Shift button held down

The message appears on the LCD display when the shift button is con- tinuously pressed or there is problem with the button. Make sure that there is no object over the shift button. If the problem persists, immediately have the vehi- cle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

Check shift controls

The message appears on the LCD display when there is problem with the shift buttons. Immediately have the vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

OAEE056110L OAEE056109L OAEE056106L

5-15

Driving your vehicle

5

Good Driving Practices Never shift to P (Park) or N

(Neutral) to any other position with the accelerator pedal depressed.

Never shift to P (Park) when the vehicle is in motion. Be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).

Do not shift to N (Neutral) when driving. Doing so may result in an accident.

Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. Even light, but consistent pedal pressure can result in the brakes overheating, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.

Always apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle. Do not depend on placing the gear in P (Park) to keep the vehicle from moving.

Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident

Optimum vehicle performance and economy is obtained by smoothly depressing and releasing the accelerator.

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: ALWAYS wear your seat belt.

In a collision, an unbelted occupant is significantly more likely to be seriously injured or killed than a properly belt- ed occupant.

Avoid high speeds when cor- nering or turning.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued) Do not make quick steering

wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns.

The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.

Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver over steers to reenter the roadway.

In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.

HYUNDAI recommends you follow all posted speed limits.

5-16

Driving your vehicle

The paddle shifter is used to adjust the regenerative braking rate from 0 to 3 during decelerating or braking. Left side ( ): Increases regener-

ative braking and deceleration. Right side ( ): Decreases

regenerative braking and decelera- tion.

Pull and hold the left side paddle shifter to change to 0.

Pull and hold the left side paddle shifter to change to 3.

Information The paddle shifter does not operate when:

Both Paddle shifters are pulled at the same time.

The Cruise Control system or Advanced Cruise Control system is activated.

The vehicle is shifted to P (Park), R(Reverse) and N (Neutral).

The selected regenerative braking rate is displayed on the instrument cluster.

What Does Regenerative Braking Do? It uses the electric motor when decelerating or braking which trans- forms vehicle motion (kinetic energy) to electrical energy to charge the high voltage batteries.

i PADDLE SHIFTER (REGENERATIVE BRAKING CONTROL)

OAEE056100LOAEE056003

5-17

Driving your vehicle

5

Power Brakes Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes that adjust automatically through normal usage. If the vehicle is not in the ready ( ) mode or the vehicle is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. You can still stop your vehicle by applying greater force to the brake pedal than typical. The stopping distance, however, will be longer than with power brakes. When the vehicle is not in the ready ( ) mode, the reserve brake power is partially depleted each time the brake pedal is applied. Do not pump the brake pedal when the power assist has been interrupted. Pump the brake pedal only when necessary to maintain steering con- trol on slippery surfaces.

BRAKING SYSTEM

Take the following precautions: Do not drive with your foot

resting on the brake pedal. This will create abnormal high brake temperatures, exces- sive brake lining and pad wear, and increased stopping distances.

When descending down a long or steep hill, use the pad- dle shifter (left side lever) to increase regenerative braking control in order to control your speed without using the brake pedal excessively. Applying the brakes continu- ously will cause the brakes to overheat and could result in a temporary loss of braking per- formance.

(Continued)

(Continued) Wet brakes may impair the

vehicle's ability to safely slow down; the vehicle may also pull to one side when the brakes are applied. Applying the brakes lightly will indicate whether they have been affected in this way. Always test your brakes in this fash- ion after driving through deep water. To dry the brakes, light- ly tap the brake pedal to heat up the brakes while maintain- ing a safe forward speed until brake performance returns to normal. Avoid driving at high speeds until the brakes func- tion correctly.

WARNING

5-18

Driving your vehicle

Do not continue depressing the brake pedal if the " " indica- tor is OFF. The battery may be discharged.

Noise and vibration generated during braking is normal.

Under normal operation, electric brake pump noise and motor vibration may occur temporarily in below cases. - When the pedal is depressed

suddenly. - When the pedal is repeatedly

depressed in short intervals. - When the ABS function is acti-

vated while braking.

Disc Brake Wear Indicator When your brake pads are worn and new pads are required, you will hear a high pitched warning sound from your front or rear brakes. You may hear this sound come and go or it may occur whenever you depress the brake pedal. Note that some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when you first apply (or lightly apply) the brakes. This is normal and does not indicate a problem with your brakes.

To avoid costly brake repairs, do not continue to drive with worn brake pads.

Information Always replace brake pads as com- plete front or rear axle sets.

Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) Applying the parking brake

To apply the EPB (Electronic Parking Brake):

1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Pull the EPB switch upwards. Make sure the Parking Brake Warning Light comes on.

With the AUTO HOLD feature enabled, the EPB is automatically applied when the vehicle is shut off.

i

NOTICE

NOTICE

OAEE056004

5-19

Driving your vehicle

5

However, if the EPB switch is pressed within 1 second after the vehicle is turned off, the EPB will not be applied.

Releasing the parking brake

To release the EPB (Electronic Parking Brake), press the EPB switch in the following condition:

Have the POWER button in the ON position.

Depress the brake pedal. Make sure the Parking Brake Warning Light goes off.

To release EPB (Electronic Parking Brake) automatically:

Shifted to P (Park) With the vehicle in the ready ( ) mode depress the brake pedal and shift out of P (Park) to R (Reverse), D (Drive).

Shifted to N (Neutral) With the vehicle in the ready ( ) mode depress the brake pedal and shift out of N (Neutral) to R (Reverse) or D (Drive).

Under the following conditions 1. Start the vehicle. 2. Fasten the driver's seat belt. 3. Close the driver's door, hood

and liftgate. 4. Depress the accelerator pedal

while the gear is in D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

The Parking Brake Warning Light should be turned off when the EPB is released.

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH, do not oper- ate the parking brake while the vehicle is moving except in an emergency situation. It could damage the brake system and lead to an accident.

WARNING

OAEE056005

5-20

Driving your vehicle

Information For your safety, you can engage the

EPB even though the POWER but- ton is in the OFF position, but you cannot release it.

For your safety, depress the brake pedal and release the parking brake manually with the EPB switch when you drive downhill or when backing up the vehicle.

If the parking brake warning light is still on even though the EPB has been released, have the sys- tem checked an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not drive your vehicle with the EPB applied. It may cause excessive brake pad and brake rotor wear.

EPB (Electronic Parking Brake) may be automatically applied when:

Requested by other systems The vehicle is turned off with the

EPB applied

Information If the driver turns the vehicle off while Auto Hold is operating, EPB will be automatically applied. However, if you press the EPB switch within one second after the vehicle is turned off, the EPB will not be applied.

Warning messages

To release EPB, fasten seatbelt and close door, hood and tailgate

If you try to drive with the EPB applied, a warning will sound and a message will appear.

If the driver's seat belt is not fas- tened and the hood or liftgate is opened, a warning will sound and a message will appear.

If there is a problem with the vehi- cle, a warning may sound and a message may appear.

If the situation occurs, depress the brake pedal and release EPB by pressing the EPB switch.

i

NOTICE

i

OAEE056115N

5-21

Driving your vehicle

5

A click sound may be heard while operating or releasing the EPB, but these conditions are normal and indicate that the EPB is functioning properly.

When leaving your keys with a parking lot attendant or valet, make sure to inform him/her how to operate the EPB.

The EPB may malfunction if you drive with the EPB applied.

When you automatically release EPB by depressing the accelera- tor pedal, depress it slowly.

AUTO HOLD deactivating. Press brake pedal

When the conversion from Auto Hold to EPB is not working properly a warning will sound and a message will appear.

NOTICE

To prevent unintentional move- ment when stopped and leav- ing the vehicle, do not use the P (Park) position in place of the parking brake. Set the parking brake and make sure the vehi- cle is securely positioned in P (Park).

Never allow anyone who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to touch the parking brake. If the parking brake is released unintentionally, serious injury may occur.

All vehicles should always have the parking brake fully engaged when parking to avoid inadvertent movement of the car which can injure occupants or pedestrians.

WARNING

OAEE056117L

5-22

Driving your vehicle

Parking brake automatically locked

If the EPB is applied while Auto Hold is activated, a warning will sound and a message will appear.

EPB malfunction indicator

This warning light illuminates if the POWER button is changed to the ON position and goes off in approximate- ly 3 seconds if the system is operat- ing normally. If the EPB malfunction indicator remains on, comes on while driving, or does not come on when the POWER button is changed to the ON position, this indicates that the EPB may have malfunctioned. If this occurs, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

The EPB malfunction indicator may illuminate when the ESC (Electronic Stability Control) indicator comes on to indicate that the ESC is not work- ing properly, but it does not indicate a malfunction of the EPB.

If the EPB warning light is still on, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

If the parking brake warning light does not illuminate or blinks even though the EPB switch was pulled up, the EPB may not be applied.

If the parking brake warning light blinks when the EPB warn- ing light is on, press the switch, then pull it up. Once more press it back to its original position and pull it back up. If the EPB warning does not go off, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

OAEE056101L

OAEE056006

5-23

Driving your vehicle

5

Emergency braking If there is a problem with the brake pedal while driving, emergency brak- ing is possible by pulling up and holding the EPB switch. Braking is possible only while you are holding the EPB switch.

Information During emergency braking by the EPB, the parking brake warning light will illuminate to indicate that the sys- tem is operating.

If you continuously notice a noise or burning smell when the EPB is used for emergency braking, have the system checked by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer.

When the EPB (Electronic Parking Brake) does not release

If the EPB does not release normal- ly, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer by loading the vehicle on a flatbed tow truck and have the sys- tem checked.

Auto Hold The Auto Hold maintains the vehicle in a standstill even though the brake pedal is not depressed after the driv- er brings the vehicle to a complete stop by depressing the brake pedal.

NOTICE

i

Do not operate the parking brake while the vehicle is mov- ing except in an emergency sit- uation.

WARNING

5-24

Driving your vehicle

Set up

1. With the driver's door and hood closed, fasten the driver's seat belt or depress the brake pedal and then press the [AUTO HOLD] switch. The white AUTO HOLD indicator will come on and the sys- tem will be in the standby position.

2. When you stop the vehicle com- pletely by depressing the brake pedal, the AUTO HOLD indicator changes from white to green.

3. The vehicle will remain stationary even if you release the brake pedal.

4. If EPB is applied, Auto Hold will be released.

Leaving

If you press the accelerator pedal with the gear in D (Drive) or N (Neutral), the Auto Hold will be released automatically and the vehicle will start to move. The AUTO HOLD indicator changes from green to white.

If the vehicle is restarted using the cruise control toggle switch (RES+ or SET-) while Auto Hold and cruise control is operating, the Auto Hold will be released regardless of accelerator pedal operation. The AUTO HOLD indicator changes from green to white. (if equipped with cruise control system)

When driving off from Auto Hold by depressing the acceler- ator pedal, always check the surrounding area near your vehicle. Slowly depress the accelerator pedal for a smooth start.

WARNING

OAEE056007

OAEE056008

White

White

Green

5-25

Driving your vehicle

5

Cancel

To cancel the Auto Hold operation, press the [AUTO HOLD] switch. The AUTO HOLD indicator will turn off. To cancel the Auto Hold operation when the vehicle is at a standstill, press the [AUTO HOLD] switch while depressing the brake pedal.

Information The Auto Hold does not operate

when:

- The driver's seat belt is unfastened and driver's door is opened

- The hood is opened

- The gear is in P (Park) or R (Reverse)

- The EPB is applied

For your safety, the Auto Hold auto- matically switches to EPB in such cases:

- The driver's seat belt is unfastened and driver's door is opened

- The hood is opened while the gear is in D (Drive)

- The vehicle is in a standstill for more than 10 minutes

- The vehicle is standing on a steep slope

- The vehicle moved several times

(Continued)

(Continued)

In these cases, the parking brake warning light comes on, the AUTO HOLD indicator changes from green to white, and a warning sounds and a message will appear to inform you that EPB has been automatically engaged. Before driving again, depress the brake pedal, check the surrounding area near your vehicle and release the parking brake man- ually with the EPB switch.

If the AUTO HOLD indicator lights up yellow, the Auto Hold is not working properly. Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

While operating Auto Hold, you may hear mechanical noise. However, it is normal operating noise.

i

OAEE056007

Light off

5-26

Driving your vehicle

If there is a malfunction with the driver's door or hood open detec- tion system, the Auto Hold may not work properly. Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Warning messages

Parking brake automatically locked

When the EPB is applied from Auto Hold, a warning will sound and a message will appear.

AUTO HOLD deactivating. Press brake pedal

When the conversion from Auto Hold to EPB is not working properly a warning will sound and a message will appear. Depress the brake pedal when the above message appears for the Auto Hold and EPB may not activate.

NOTICE

Depress the accelerator pedal slowly when you start the vehicle.

For your safety, cancel the Auto Hold when you drive downhill, back up the vehicle or park the vehicle.

WARNING

OAEE056101L

OAEE056117L

5-27

Driving your vehicle

5 Press brake pedal to deactivate AUTO HOLD

If you did not apply the brake pedal when you release the Auto Hold by pressing the [AUTO HOLD] switch, a warning will sound and a message will appear.

AUTO HOLD conditions not met. Fasten seatbelt and close door, hood and tailgate

When you press the [AUTO HOLD] switch, if the driver's door, hood and liftgate are not closed or the drivers seat belt is unfastened, a warning will sound and a message will appear on the LCD display. Press the [AUTO HOLD] switch after closing the drivers door, hood and liftgate and fastening the seat belt.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

OAEE056116L OAEE056118N

An Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) or an Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system will not prevent accidents due to improper or dangerous driving maneuvers. Even though vehi- cle control is improved during emergency braking, always maintain a safe distance between you and objects ahead of you. Vehicle speeds should always be reduced during extreme road conditions. The braking distance for cars equipped with ABS or ESC may be longer than for those without these systems in the following road conditions. Drive your vehicle at reduced speeds during the following conditions: Rough, gravel or snow-cov-

ered roads. (Continued)

WARNING

5-28

Driving your vehicle

ABS is an electronic braking system that helps prevent a braking skid. ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same time.

Using ABS To obtain the maximum benefit from your ABS in an emergency situation, do not attempt to modulate your brake pressure and do not try to pump your brakes. Depress your brake pedal as hard as possible. When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear sounds from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ABS is active. ABS does not reduce the time or dis- tance it takes to stop the vehicle. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. ABS will not prevent a skid that results from sudden changes in direction, such as trying to take a corner too fast or making a sudden lane change. Always drive at a safe speed for the road and weather con- ditions.

ABS cannot prevent a loss of stabili- ty. Always steer moderately when braking hard. Severe or sharp steer- ing wheel movement can still cause your vehicle to veer into oncoming traffic or off the road. On loose or uneven road surfaces, operation of the anti-lock brake sys- tem may result in a longer stopping distance than for vehicles equipped with a conventional brake system. The ABS warning light ( ) will stay on for several seconds after the POWER button is in the ON position. During that time, the ABS will go through self-diagnosis and the light will go off if everything is normal. If the light stays on, you may have a problem with your ABS. Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

(Continued) On roads where the road sur-

face is pitted or has different surface height.

Tire chains are installed on your vehicle.

The safety features of an ABS or ESC equipped vehicle should not be tested by high speed driving or cornering. This could endanger the safety of yourself or others.

5-29

Driving your vehicle

5

When you drive on a road having poor traction, such as an icy road, and apply your brakes continu- ously, the ABS will be active con- tinuously and the ABS warning light ( ) may illuminate. Pull your car over to a safe place and turn the vehicle off. Restart the vehicle. If the ABS warning light is off, then your ABS system is normal. Otherwise, you may have a prob- lem with your ABS system. Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

Information When you jump start your vehicle because of a drained battery, the ABS warning light ( ) may turn on at the same time. This happens because of the low battery voltage. It does not mean your ABS is malfunctioning. Have the battery recharged before driving the vehicle.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering maneuvers. ESC checks where you are steering and where the vehicle is actually going. ESC applies braking pressure to any one of the vehicle's brakes and intervenes in the electric vehicle control system to assist the driver with keeping the vehicle on the intended path. It is not a substitute for safe driving practices. Always adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions.

i

NOTICE

If the ABS warning light ( ) is on and stays on, you may have a problem with the ABS. Your power brakes will work normal- ly. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death, contact your HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING

OAEE056025

5-30

Driving your vehicle

ESC operation ESC ON condition

When the POWER button is in the ON position, the ESC and the ESC OFF indicator lights illuminate for approximately three seconds. After both lights go off, the ESC is enabled.

When operating

When the ESC is in opera- tion, the ESC indicator light blinks:

When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear sounds from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal.This is normal and it means your ESC is active.

When the ESC activates, the vehi- cle may not respond to the acceler- ator as it does under routine condi- tions.

If the Cruise Control was in use when the ESC activates, the Cruise Control automatically disengages. The Cruise Control can be reen- gaged when the road conditions allow. See "Cruise Control System" later in this chapter. (if equipped)

Never drive too fast for the road conditions or too quickly when cornering. The ESC system will not prevent accidents. Excessive speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers, and hydroplaning on wet surfaces can result in severe accidents.

WARNING

5-31

Driving your vehicle

5

ESC OFF condition

To cancel ESC operation :

State 1

Press the ESC OFF button briefly. The ESC OFF indicator light and message "Traction Control disabled" will illuminate. In this state, the trac- tion control function of ESC is dis- abled, but the brake control function of ESC still operates.

State 2

Press and hold the ESC OFF button continuously for more than 3 sec- onds. The ESC OFF indicator light and message "Traction & Stability Control disabled" illuminates and a warning chime sounds. In this state, both the traction control function of ESC and the brake control function of ESC are disabled. If the POWER button is placed to the OFF position when ESC is off, ESC remains off. Upon restarting the vehi- cle, the ESC will automatically turn on again.

Indicator lights

When the POWER button is pressed to the ON position, the ESC indicator light illuminates, then goes off if the ESC system is operating normally. The ESC indicator light blinks when- ever the ESC is operating. If the ESC indicator light stays on, your vehicle may have a malfunction with the ESC system. When this warning light illuminates, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi- ble. The ESC OFF indicator light comes on when the ESC is turned off with the button.

OAE056018L

OAE056020L

ESC indicator light (blinks)

ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)

5-32

Driving your vehicle

Driving with wheels and tires with different sizes may cause the ESC system to malfunction. Before replacing tires, make sure all four tires and wheels are the same size. Never drive the vehicle with different sized wheels and tires installed.

ESC OFF usage When Driving

The ESC OFF mode should only be used briefly to help free the vehicle if stuck in snow or mud, by temporarily stopping operation of the ESC, to maintain wheel torque. To turn ESC off while driving, press the ESC OFF button while driving on a flat road surface.

Do not allow wheel(s) of one axle to spin excessively while the ESC, ABS, and parking brake warning lights are displayed. The repairs would not be cov- ered by the vehicle warranty. Reduce vehicle power and do not spin the wheel(s) excessive- ly while these lights are dis- played.

When operating the vehicle on a dynamometer, make sure the ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light illuminated).

Information Turning the ESC off does not affect ABS or standard brake system opera- tion.

i

NOTICE

NOTICE

When the ESC is blinking, this indicates the ESC is active: Drive slowly and NEVER attempt to accelerate. NEVER turn the ESC off while the ESC indicator light is blinking or you may lose control of the vehicle resulting in an accident.

WARNING

5-33

Driving your vehicle

5

Vehicle Stability Management (VSM) The Vehicle Stability Management (VSM) is a function of the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. It helps ensure the vehicle stays stable when accelerating or braking sud- denly on wet, slippery and rough roads where traction over the four tires can suddenly become uneven.

VSM operation VSM ON condition

The VSM operates when: The Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) is on. Vehicle speed is approximately

above 9 mph (15 km/h) on curve roads.

Vehicle speed is approximately above 12 mph (20 km/h) when the vehicle is braking on rough roads.

When operating

When you apply your brakes under conditions which may activate the ESC, you may hear sounds from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sen- sation in the brake pedal. This is nor- mal and it means your VSM is active.

Information The VSM does not operate when:

Driving on a banked road such as a gradient or incline.

Driving in reverse.

The ESC OFF indicator light is on.

The EPS (Electric power steering) warning light ( ) is on or blinks.

i

Take the following precautions when using the Vehicle Stability Management (VSM): ALWAYS check the speed and

the distance to the vehicle ahead.The VSM is not a substi- tute for safe driving practices.

Never drive too fast for the road conditions.The VSM sys- tem will not prevent acci- dents. Excessive speed in bad weather, slippery and uneven roads can result in severe accidents.

WARNING

5-34

Driving your vehicle

VSM OFF condition

To cancel VSM operation, press the ESC OFF button. ESC OFF indicator light ( ) will illuminate. To turn on VSM, press the ESC OFF button again. The ESC OFF indicator light will go out.

Driving with wheels and tires with different sizes may cause the VSM system to malfunction. Before replacing tires, make sure all four tires and wheels are the same size. Never drive the vehicle with different sized tires and wheels installed.

Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) The Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) helps prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. The system operates the brakes automatically for approximately 2 seconds and releas- es the brake after 2 seconds or when the accelerator pedal is depressed.

Information The HAC does not operate when the

gear is in P (Park) or N (Neutral).

The HAC activates even when the ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is off. However, it does not activate, when the ESC does not operate nor- mally.

i

NOTICE

If the ESC indicator light ( ) or EPS warning light ( ) stays on or blinks, your vehicle may have a malfunction with the VSM system. When the warning light illuminates, have the vehi- cle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING

Always be ready to depress the accelerator pedal when starting off on a incline. The HAC acti- vates only for approximately 2 seconds.

WARNING

5-35

Driving your vehicle

5

Good Braking Practices

Wet brakes can be dangerous! The brakes may get wet if the vehicle is driven through standing water or if it is washed. Your vehicle will not stop as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet brakes may cause the vehicle to pull to one side.

To dry the brakes, apply the brakes lightly until the braking action returns to normal. If the braking action does not return to normal, stop as soon as it is safe to do so and call an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance. DO NOT drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. Even light, but constant pedal pressure can result in the brakes overheating, brake wear, and possibly even brake failure. If a tire goes flat while you are driv- ing, apply the brakes gently and keep the vehicle pointed straight ahead while you slow down. When you are moving slowly enough for it to be safe to do so, pull off the road and stop in a safe location. Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped to prevent the vehicle from rolling for- ward.

Whenever leaving the vehicle or parking, always come to a com- plete stop and continue to depress the brake pedal. Shift to the P (Park) position, then apply the parking brake, and place the POWER button in the OFF position. Vehicles parked with the park- ing brake not applied or not fully engaged may roll inadver- tently and may cause injury to the driver and others. ALWAYS apply the parking brake before exiting the vehicle.

WARNING

5-36

Driving your vehicle

The drive mode may be selected according to the driver's preference or road condition. The system resets to be in the NOR- MAL mode (except if it is in ECO mode), when the vehicle is restarted.

Information If there is a problem with the instru- ment cluster, the drive mode will be in NORMAL mode and may not change to ECO mode or SPORT mode.

The mode changes, as below, whenever the DRIVE MODE button is pressed.

When NORMAL mode is selected, it is not displayed on the instrument cluster.

ECO mode ECO mode improves bat- tery charge use efficiency for eco-friendly driving.

When ECO mode is selected by pressing the DRIVE MODE button, the ECO indicator (green color) will illuminate.

If the vehicle is set to ECO mode, when the vehicle is turned OFF and restarted the Drive Mode set- ting will remain in ECO mode.

Information Battery charge use efficiency depends on the driver's driving habit and road condition.

i

i

DRIVE MODE INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OAEE056010N

ECO

NORMAL SPORT

5-37

Driving your vehicle

5

When ECO mode is activated: The acceleration response may be

slightly reduced as the accelerator pedal is depressed moderately.

The air conditioner performance may be limited.

The shift pattern of the gear may change.

The above situations are normal conditions when ECO mode is acti- vated to improve fuel efficiency.

SPORT mode SPORT mode provides sporty but firm riding.

When SPORT mode is selected by pressing the DRIVE MODE button, the SPORT indicator (orange color) will illuminate.

Whenever the vehicle is restarted, the Drive Mode will revert back to NORMAL mode. If SPORT mode is desired, re-select SPORT mode from the DRIVE MODE button.

Information In SPORT mode, the fuel efficiency may decrease.

i

5-38

Driving your vehicle

The Blind Spot Detection System (BSD) uses radar sensors in the rear bumper to monitor and warn the driv- er of an approaching vehicle in the driver's blind spot area. The system monitors the rear area of the vehicle and provides information to the driver with an audible alert and an indicator on the outer side view mirrors.

(1) BSD (Blind Spot Detection) The blind spot detection range varies relative to vehicle speed. Note that if your vehicle is travel- ing much faster than the vehicles around you, the warning will not occur.

(2) LCA (Lane Change Assist) The Lane Change Assist feature will help alert you when a vehicle is approaching in an adjacent lane at a high rate of speed. If the driver activates the turn signal when the system detects an oncoming vehicle, the system sounds an audible alert. The time of alert varies according to the speed difference between you and the approaching vehicle.

(3) RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) The Rear Cross Traffic Alert fea- ture monitors approaching cross traffic from the left and right side of the vehicle when your vehicle is in reverse.The feature will operate when the vehicle is moving in reverse below about 6 mph (10 km/h). If oncoming cross traffic is detected a warning chime will sound.

The time of alert varies according to the speed difference between you and the approaching vehicle.

BLIND SPOT DETECTION SYSTEM (BSD) (IF EQUIPPED)

OAE056106

Blind spot area

Closing at high speed

Always be aware of road con- ditions while driving and be alert for unexpected situations even though the Blind Spot Detection System is operat- ing.

The Blind Spot Detection System (BSD) is not a substi- tute for proper and safe driving. Always drive safely and use caution when changing lanes or backing up the vehicle. The Blind Spot Detection System (BSD) may not detect every object alongside the vehicle.

WARNING

5-39

Driving your vehicle

5

BSD (Blind Spot Detection) / LCA (Lane Change Assist) (if equipped) Operating conditions

To operate: Press the BSD switch with the POWER button in the ON position. The indicator on the BSD switch will illuminate. When the system is not used, turn the system off by turning off the switch.

To cancel: Press the BSD switch again. The indicator on the switch will go off. When the system is not used, turn the system off by turning off the switch.

Information If the vehicle is turned off then on

again, the BSD system returns to the previous state.

When the system is turned on, the warning light will illuminate for 3 seconds on the outer side view mir- ror.

The function will activate when: 1. The system is on. 2. The vehicle speed is above

approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). 3. An oncoming vehicle is detected

in the blind spot area. i

OAEE056026

5-40

Driving your vehicle

First stage alert

If a vehicle is detected within the boundary of the system, a warning light (yellow) will illuminate on the outer side view mirror. Once the detected vehicle is no longer within the blind spot area, the warning will turn off depending on the driving conditions of the vehicle.

OAEE056031L

Left side

Right side

OAEE056028L

Left side

OAEE056029

Right side

Second stage alert

A warning chime to alert the driver will activate when: 1. A vehicle has been detected in the blind spot area by the radar system

(the warning light will illuminate on the outer side view mirror) (i.e., in the first stage alert) AND

2. The turn signal is applied (same side as where the vehicle is being detected).

When this alert is activated, the warning light on the outer side view mir- ror will also blink. If you turn off the turn signal indicator, the second stage alert (warning chime and blinking warning light on the outer side view mirror) will be deactivated.

5-41

Driving your vehicle

5

The second stage alarm may be deactivated. - To deactivate the warning chime: Go to the 'User Settings Driving Assist and deselect Blind Spot Detection Sound' on the LCD dis- play. - To activate the warning chime: Go to the 'User Settings Driving Assist and select Blind Spot Detection Sound' on the LCD dis- play.

Information The warning chime function helps alert the driver. Deactivate this func- tion only when it is necessary.

For more information, refer to "LCD Display Modes" in chapter 3.

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) (if equipped) The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function monitors approaching cross traffic from the left and right side of the vehicle when your vehicle is in reverse.

Operating conditions To operate: Go to the 'User Settings Driving Assist and select Rear Cross Traffic Alert' on the LCD display.

The system will turn on and standby to activate. The system will activate when vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h) and with the gear in R (Reverse).

If the function is deselected from the instrument cluster, the function will deactivate.

For more information, refer to "LCD Display Modes" in chapter 3.

Information The last selected setting (ON or

OFF) of the RCTA is remained in the system.

The system will activate when vehi- cle speed is below 6.2 mph (10 km/h) and with the shift lever in R (Reverse).

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) detecting range is approxi- mately 1 ft ~ 65 ft (0.5 m ~ 20 m) in the direction of both lateral sides of the vehicle.

An approaching vehicle will be detected if their vehicle speed is within 2.5 ~ 22.5 mph (4 km/h ~36 km/h).

Note that the detecting range may vary under certain conditions. As always, use caution and pay close attention to your surroundings when backing up your vehicle.

i

i

5-42

Driving your vehicle

Warning type

If the vehicle detected by the sensors approaches your vehicle, the warn- ing chime will sound, the warning light on the outer side view mirror will blink and a message will appear on the LCD display.

Information The warning chime will turn off

when:

- The detected vehicle moves out of the sensing area or

- when the vehicle is right behind your vehicle or

- when the vehicle is not approach- ing your vehicle or

- when the other vehicle slows down.

The system may not operate proper- ly due to other factors or circum- stances. Always pay attention to your surrounding.

If the sensing area near the rear bumper is blocked by either a wall or barrier or by a parked vehicle, the system sensing area may be reduced.

i Left Right

OAE056046L/OAE056047L

With the system activated, the warning light on the outer side view mirror will illumi- nate whenever a vehicle is detected at the rear side by the system. To avoid accidents, do not focus only on the warning light and neglect to see the surrounding of the vehicle.

Drive safely even though the vehicle is equipped with a Blind Spot Detection System (BSD) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA). Do not solely rely on the system but check your surrounding before changing lanes or backing the vehicle up. The system may not alert the driver in some conditions so always check your surround- ings while driving.

(Continued)

WARNING

5-43

Driving your vehicle

5 The system may not work prop-

erly when the bumper has been damaged, or if the rear bumper has been replaced or repaired.

The sensing range differs some- what according to the width of the road. When the road is nar- row, the system may detect other vehicles in the next lane.

The system may turn off due to strong electromagnetic waves.

Detecting sensor

The sensors are located inside the rear bumper. Always keep the rear bumper clean for proper operation of the system.

Warning message

Blind Spot Detection disabled. Radar blocked.

This warning message may appear when :

- One or both of the sensors on the rear bumper is blocked by dirt or snow or a foreign object.

- Driving in rural areas where the BSD sensor does not detect another vehicle for an extended period of time.

- When there is inclement weather such as heavy snow or rain.

- A trailer or carrier is installed. (To use the BSD system, remove the trailer or carrier from your vehicle.)

NOTICE

(Continued) The Blind Spot Detection

System (BSD) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) are not a substitute for proper and safe driving practices. Always drive safely and use caution when changing lanes or back- ing up your vehicle. The Blind Spot Detection System (BSD) may not detect every object alongside the vehicle.

OAE056040LOAEE056012N

5-44

Driving your vehicle

If any of these conditions occur, the light on the BSD switch and the sys- tem will turn off automatically. When the BSD canceled warning message is displayed in the cluster, check to make sure that the rear bumper is free from any dirt or snow in the areas where the sensor is located. Remove any dirt, snow, or foreign material that could interfere with the radar sensors. After any dirt or debris is removed, the BSD system should operate nor- mally after about 10 minutes of driv- ing the vehicle. If the system still does not operate normally have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Check BSD system

If there is a problem with the BSD system, a warning message will appear and the light on the switch will turn off. The system will turn off auto- matically. Have your vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal- er.

Limitations of the system The driver must be cautious in the below situations, because the sys- tem may not detect other vehicles or objects in certain circumstances.

When a trailer or carrier is installed.

The vehicle drives in inclement weather such as heavy rain or snow.

The sensor is polluted with rain, snow, mud, etc.

The rear bumper where the sensor is located is covered with a foreign object such as a bumper sticker, a bumper guard, a bike rack, etc.

The rear bumper is damaged, or the sensor is out of the original default position.

The vehicle height gets lower or higher due to heavy loading in the luggage compartment, abnormal tire pressure, etc.

When the temperature near the rear bumper area is high or low.

OTLE055040

5-45

Driving your vehicle

5

When the sensors are blocked by other vehicles, walls or parking-lot pillars.

The vehicle drives on a curved road or through a tollgate.

The vehicle is driven near areas containing metal substances such as a construction zone, railroad, etc.

There is a fixed object near the vehicle, such as a guardrail, per- son, animal, etc.

While going down or up a steep road where the height of the lane is different.

When driving through a narrow road with many trees or bushes.

When driving on wet surfaces. When driving through a large area

with few vehicles or structures around, such as a desert, rural area, etc.

A big vehicle is near such as a bus or truck.

When other vehicles are close to your vehicle.

When the other vehicle approach- es very close.

When the detected vehicle also moves back, as your vehicle drives back.

While changing lanes. The vehicle is turning left or right at

a crossroad. If the vehicle has started at the

same time as the vehicle next to you and has accelerated.

When the other vehicle passes at a very fast speed.

When the vehicle in the next lane moves two lanes away from you OR when the vehicle two lanes away moves to the next lane to you.

A motorcycle or bicycle is near. A flat trailer is near. If there are small objects in the

detecting area such as a shopping cart or a baby stroller.

If there is a low height vehicle such as a sports car.

Non-operating condition The BSD indicator on the outer side view mirror may not illuminate properly when:

The outer side view mirror housing is damaged.

The mirror is covered with dirt, snow, or debris.

The window is covered with dirt, snow, or debris.

The window is tinted.

Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter- ference received, including interfer- ence that may cause undesired operation.

i

5-46

Driving your vehicle

The Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB) system is designed to help detect and monitor the vehicle ahead or detect a pedestrian (if equipped) in the roadway through radar signals and camera recogni- tion to warn the driver that a collision is imminent, and if necessary, apply emergency braking.

System Setting and Activation System setting

The driver can activate the AEB by placing the POWER button to the ON position and by selecting: 'User Settings Driving Assist Autonomous Emergency Braking'

The AEB deactivates, when the driv- er deselects the system setting.

AUTONOMOUS (AUTOMATIC) EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) (IF EQUIPPED)

Take the following precautions when using the Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB): This system is only a supple-

mental system and it is not intended to, nor does it replace the need for extreme care and attention of the driv- er. The sensing range and objects detectable by the sen- sors are limited. Pay attention to the road conditions at all times.

NEVER drive too fast in accor- dance with the road condi- tions or while cornering.

Always drive cautiously to prevent unexpected and sud- den situations from occur- ring. AEB does not stop the vehicle completely and is not a collision avoidance system.

WARNING

OAE056022L

5-47

Driving your vehicle

5

The warning light illumi- nates on the LCD display, when you cancel the AEB system. The driver can

monitor the AEB ON/OFF status on the LCD display. Also, the warning light illuminates when the ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is turned off (Traction & Stability control disabled). If the warning light remains ON when the AEB is activated, have the sys- tem checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

The driver can select the initial warn- ing activation time on the LCD display. Go to the 'User Settings Driving Assist Forward Collision Warning Late/Normal/Early'.

The options for the initial Forward Collision Warning includes the fol- lowing: Late:

When this condition is selected, the initial Forward Collision Warning is activated later than normal. This setting reduces the amount of dis- tance between the vehicle or pedestrian ahead before the initial warning occurs.

Normal: When this condition is selected, the initial Forward Collision Warning is activated normally. This setting allows for a nominal amount of dis- tance between the vehicle or pedestrian ahead before the initial warning occurs.

Early: When this condition is selected, the initial Forward Collision Warning is activated earlier than normal. This setting maximizes the amount of distance between the vehicle or pedestrian ahead before the initial warning occurs.

OAE056023L

5-48

Driving your vehicle

Prerequisite for activation The AEB system is on and ready when AEB is selected on the LCD display and when the following pre- requisites are satisfied: - The ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) is activated. - Vehicle speed is over 6 mph (10

km/h). (The AEB is only activated within a certain speed range.)

- The system detects a pedestrian or a vehicle in front, which may collide with your vehicle. (The AEB may not be activated or may sound a warning alarm in accordance with the driving situation or vehicle con- dition.)

AEB Warning Message and System Control The AEB produces warning mes- sages and warning alarms in accor- dance with the collision risk levels, such as abrupt stopping of the vehi- cle in front, insufficient braking dis- tance, or pedestrian detection. Also, it controls the brakes in accordance with the collision risk levels.

Completely stop the vehicle on a safe location before operating the switch on the steering wheel to activate /deactivate the AEB system.

The AEB automatically acti- vates when the POWER but- ton is in the ON position. The driver can deactivate the AEB by canceling the system set- ting on the LCD display.

If you cancel the ESC (Electronic Stability Control) when the AEB system is turned on the AEB automati- cally deactivates and the AEB warning light illuminates. When the ESC is cancelled the AEB cannot be activated on the LCD display.

WARNING

5-49

Driving your vehicle

5

The driver can select the initial warn- ing activation time in the User Settings in the LCD display. The options for the initial Forward Collision Warning include Early, Normal or Late initial warning time.

Forward Warning (1st warning)

This initial warning message appears on the LCD display with a warning chime.

Collision Warning (2nd warning)

This warning message appears on the LCD display with a warning chime. Additionally, some vehicle system intervention occurs by the engine management system to help decelerate the vehicle.

- Your vehicle speed may deceler- ate moderately.

- The AEB system limitedly con- trols the brakes to preemptively mitigate impact in a collision.

Emergency braking (3rd warning)

This warning message appears on the LCD display with a warning chime. Additionally, some vehicle system intervention occurs by the engine management system to help decel- erate the vehicle.

- The AEB system limitedly con- trols the brakes to preemptively mitigate impact in a collision. The brake control is maximized just before a collision.

OAEE056025L

OAEE056027L

OAEE056030L

5-50

Driving your vehicle

Brake operation In an urgent situation, the braking

system enters into the ready status for prompt reaction against the dri- ver's depressing the brake pedal.

The AEB provides additional brak- ing power for optimum braking per- formance, when the driver depresses the brake pedal.

The braking control is automatical- ly deactivated, when the driver sharply depresses the accelerator pedal, or when the driver abruptly operates the steering wheel.

The AEB brake control is automat- ically canceled, when risk factors disappear.

AEB Sensor

In order for the AEB system to oper- ate properly, always make sure the radar sensor cover is clean and free of dirt, snow, and debris. Dirt, snow, or foreign substances on the lens may adversely affect the sensing performance of the sensor.

The driver should always use extreme caution while operating the vehicle, whether or not there is a warning message or alarm from the AEB system.

CAUTION

The braking control cannot completely stop the vehicle nor avoid all collisions. The driver should hold the responsibility to safely drive and control the vehicle.

WARNING

The AEB system logic operates within certain parameters, such as the distance from the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, the speed of the vehicle ahead, and the driver's vehicle speed. Certain conditions such as inclement weather and road conditions may affect the operation of the AEB system.

WARNING

OAEE056011N

5-51

Driving your vehicle

5

Do not apply license plate frame or foreign objects such as a bumper sticker or a bumper guard near the radar sensor. Doing so may adversely affect the sensing performance of the radar.

Always keep the radar sensor and cover clean and free of dirt and debris.

Use only a soft cloth to wash the vehicle. Do not spray pressur- ized water directly on the sensor or sensor cover.

Be careful not to apply unneces- sary force on the radar sensor or sensor cover. If the sensor is forcibly moved out of proper alignment, the AEB system may not operate correctly. In this case, a warning message may not be displayed. Have the vehi- cle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

(Continued) If the front bumper becomes

damaged in the area around the radar sensor, the AEB system may not operate properly. Have the vehicle inspected by author- ized HYUNDAI.

Use only genuine parts to repair or replace a damaged sensor or sensor cover. Do not apply paint to the sensor cover.

NEVER install any accessories or stickers on the front wind- shield, nor tint the front wind- shield.

NEVER locate any reflective objects (i.e. white paper, mirror) over the dashboard. Any light reflection may cause a malfunc- tion of the system.

Pay extreme caution to keep the camera out of water.

NEVER arbitrarily disassemble the camera assembly, nor apply any impact on the camera assembly.

Playing the vehicle audio sys- tem at high volume may offset the system warning sounds.

Information Have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer when:

The windshield glass is replaced.

The front bumper is replaced.

The radar sensor or cover gets dam- aged or replaced.

i

NOTICENOTICE

5-52

Driving your vehicle

Warning message and warning light

Auto Emergency Braking disabled. Radar blocked

When the sensor cover is blocked with dirt, snow, or debris, the AEB system operation may stop tem- porarily. If this occurs, a warning message will appear on the LCD dis- play. Remove any dirt, snow, or debris and clean the radar sensor cover before operating the AEB system. The AEB may not properly operate in an area (e.g. open terrain), where any substances are not detected after turning ON the vehicle.

System Malfunction

Check AEB system

When the AEB is not working prop- erly, the AEB warning light ( ) will illuminate and the warning message will appear for a few sec- onds. After the message disap- pears, the master warning light ( ) will illuminate. In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

The AEB warning message may appear along with the illumination of the ESC (Electronic Stability Control) warning light.

OAE056038L

The AEB is only a supplemen- tal system for the driver's con- venience. The driver should hold the responsibility to con- trol the vehicle operation. Do not solely depend on the AEB system. Rather, maintain a safe braking distance, and, if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce the driving speed.

In certain instances and under certain driving condi- tions, the AEB system may unintentionally activate. This initial warning message appears on the LCD display with a warning chime. Also, in certain instances the front radar sensor or camera recognition system may not detect the vehicle or pedestri- an ahead. The AEB system may not activate and the warning message will not be displayed.

(Continued)

WARNING

OAE056031L

5-53

Driving your vehicle

5

(Continued) If there is a malfunction with the

AEB system, the autonomous emergency braking is not applied even though the brak- ing system is operating normal- ly.

If the vehicle in front stops suddenly, you may have less control of the brake system. Therefore, always keep a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.

The AEB system may activate during braking and the vehi- cle may stop suddenly shift- ing loose objects toward the passengers. Always keep loose objects secured.

The AEB system may not acti- vate if the driver applies the brake pedal to avoid a colli- sion.

The brake control may be insufficient, possibly causing a collision, if a vehicle in front abruptly stops. Always pay extreme caution.

(Continued)

(Continued) Occupants may get injured, if

the vehicle abruptly stops by the activated AEB system. Pay extreme caution.

The AEB system operates only to help detect vehicles or pedestrians in front of the vehicle.

The AEB system does not operate when the vehicle is in reverse.

The AEB system is not designed to detect other objects on the road such as animals.

The AEB system does not detect vehicles in the oppo- site lane.

The AEB system does not detect cross traffic vehicles that are approaching.

(Continued)

(Continued) The AEB system cannot

detect the driver approaching the side view of a parked vehi- cle (for example on a dead end street.)

In these cases, you must main- tain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce the driv- ing speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

WARNING

5-54

Driving your vehicle

Limitations of the System The Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB) system is designed to help monitor the vehicle ahead or a pedes- trian in the roadway through radar sig- nals and camera recognition to warn the driver that a collision is imminent, and if necessary, apply emergency braking. In certain situations, the radar sen- sor or the camera may not be able to detect the vehicle or pedestrian ahead. In these cases, the AEB sys- tem may not operate normally. The driver must pay careful attention in the following situations where the AEB operation may be limited.

Detecting vehicles The sensor may be limited when: The radar sensor or camera is

blocked with a foreign object or debris

Inclement weather such as heavy rain or snow obscures the field of view of the radar sensor or camera

There is interference by electro- magnetic waves

There is severe irregular reflection from the radar sensor

The radar/camera sensor recogni- tion is limited

The vehicle in front is too small to be detected (for example a motor- cycle or a bicycle, etc.)

The vehicle in front is an oversize vehicle or trailer that is too big to be detected by the camera recog- nition system (for example a tractor trailer, etc.)

The driver's field of view is not well illuminated (either too dark or too much reflection or too much back- light that obscures the field of view)

The vehicle in front does not have their rear lights properly turned ON

The outside brightness changes suddenly, for example when enter- ing or exiting a tunnel

Light coming from a street light or an oncoming vehicle is reflected on a wet road surface such as a pud- dle in the road

The field of view in front is obstructed by sun glare

The windshield glass is fogged up; a clear view of the road is obstructed

The vehicle in front is driving errat- ically

The vehicle is on unpaved or uneven rough surfaces, or roads with sudden gradient changes

The adverse road conditions cause excessive vehicle vibrations while driving

The vehicle is moving under ground level or inside a building

The vehicle is driven near areas containing metal substances such as a construction zone, railroad, etc.

5-55

Driving your vehicle

5

The vehicle in front is moving verti- cally to the driving direction

The vehicle in front is stopped ver- tically

The vehicle in front is driving towards your vehicle or reversing

- Driving on a curve The performance of the AEB system may be limited when driving on a curved road. In certain instances on a curved road, the AEB system may activate prematurely. Also, in certain instances the front radar sensor or camera recognition system may not detect the vehicle traveling on a curved road. In these cases, the driver must main- tain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

The AEB system may recognize a vehicle in the next lane when driving on a curved road. In this case, the system may unnec- essarily alarm the driver and apply the brake. Always pay attention to road and driving conditions, while driving. If necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance. Also, when necessary depress the accelerator pedal to prevent the sys- tem from unnecessarily decelerating your vehicle. Check the surrounding traffic condi- tions before use.

OAE056101OAE056100

5-56

Driving your vehicle

- Driving on a slope The performance of the AEB decreas- es while driving upward or downward on a slope, not recognizing the vehi- cle in front in the same lane. It may unnecessarily produce the warning message and the warning alarm, or it may not produce the warning mes- sage and the warning alarm at all. When the AEB suddenly recognizes the vehicle in front while passing over a slope, you may experience sharp deceleration. Always keep your eyes forward while driving upward or downward on a slope, and, if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain distance.

- Changing lanes When a vehicle changes lanes in front of you, the AEB system may not immediately detect the vehicle, espe- cially if the vehicle changes lanes abruptly. In this case, you must main- tain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

When driving in stop-and-go traffic, and a stopped vehicle in front of you merges out of the lane, the AEB sys- tem may not immediately detect the new vehicle that is now in front of you. In this case, you must maintain a safe braking distance, and if nec- essary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

OAE056109OAE056102 OAE056103

5-57

Driving your vehicle

5 - Detecting the vehicle in front of you If the vehicle in front of you has cargo that extends rearward from the cab, or when the vehicle in front of you has higher ground clearance, addi- tional special attention is required. The AEB system may not be able to detect the cargo extending from the vehicle. In these instances, you must maintain a safe braking distance from the rearmost object, and if nec- essary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain distance.

Detecting pedestrians (if equipped) The sensor may be limited when: The pedestrian is not fully detected

by the camera recognition system, for example, if the pedestrian is leaning over or is not fully walking upright

The pedestrian is moving very quickly or appears abruptly in the camera detection area

The pedestrian is wearing clothing that easily blends into the back- ground, making it difficult to be detected by the camera recogni- tion system

It is difficult to detect and distin- guish the pedestrian from other objects in the surroundings, for example, when there is a group of pedestrians or a large crowd

There is an item similar to a per- sons body structure

The pedestrian is small The pedestrian has impaired

mobility The sensor recognition is limited

The radar sensor or camera is blocked with a foreign object or debris

Inclement weather such as heavy rain or snow obscures the field of view of the radar sensor or camera

The outside lighting is too bright (e.g. when driving in bright sunlight or in sun glare) or too dark (e.g. when driving on a dark rural road at night)

When light coming from a street light or an oncoming vehicle is reflected on a wet road surface such as a puddle in the road

The field of view in front is obstructed by sun glare

The windshield glass is fogged up; a clear view of the road is obstruct- ed

The adverse road conditions cause excessive vehicle vibrations while driving

OAE056105

5-58

Information In some instances, the AEB system may be cancelled when subjected to electromagnetic interference.

Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter- ference received, including interfer- ence that may cause undesired operation.

i

i

Driving your vehicle

Do not use the Autonomous Emergency Braking system when towing a vehicle. Application of the AEB sys- tem while towing may adversely affect the safety of your vehicle or the towing vehicle.

Use extreme caution when the vehicle in front of you has cargo that extends rearward from the cab, or when the vehicle in front of you has higher ground clearance.

The AEB system is designed to help detect and monitor the vehicle ahead or help detect a pedestrian in the roadway through radar signals and camera recognition. It is not designed to detect bicycles, motorcycles, or smaller wheeled objects such as lug- gage bags, shopping carts, or strollers.

(Continued)

(Continued) Never try to test the operation

of the AEB system. Doing so may cause severe injury or death.

WARNING

5-59

Driving your vehicle

5 The Lane Keeping Assist System helps detect lane markers on the road with a camera at the front wind- shield, and assists the driver's steer- ing to help keep the vehicle between lanes. When the system detects the vehicle straying from its lane, it alerts the driver with a visual and audible warn- ing, while applying a slight counter- steering torque, to try to prevent the vehicle from moving out of its lane.

LANE KEEPING ASSIST SYSTEM (LKAS) (IF EQUIPPED)

OAEE056013N

The lane keeping assist system is not a substitute for safe driv- ing practices, but a conven- ience function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always be aware of the sur- rounding and steer the vehicle.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when using the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS): Do not steer the steering

wheel suddenly when the steering wheel is being assist- ed by the system.

LKAS helps to prevent the driv- er from moving out of the lane unintentionally by assisting the driver's steering. However, the driver should not solely rely on the system but always pay attention on the steering wheel to stay in the lane.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued) The operation of the LKAS

can be canceled or not work properly according to road condition and surroundings. Always be cautious when driving.

Do not disassemble the LKAS camera temporarily to tint the window or attach any types of coatings and accessories. If you disassemble the camera and assemble it again, take your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked for calibra- tion.

When you replace the wind- shield glass, LKAS camera or related parts of the steering wheel, take your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked for calibration.

(Continued)

5-60

Driving your vehicle

LKAS Operation

To activate/deactivate the LKAS: With the POWER button in the ON position, press the LKAS button located on the instrument panel on the left hand side of the steering wheel. The indicator in the cluster display will initially illuminate white. This indicates the LKAS is in the READY but NOT ENABLED state.

(Continued) Always have your hands on

the steering wheel while the LKAS system is activated. If you continue to drive with your hands off the steering wheel after the "Keep hands on steering wheel" warning message appears, the system will turn off automatically. After then, if you drive with your hands on the steering wheel, the control will be acti- vated again.

The steering wheel is not con- tinuously controlled so if the vehicle speed is at a higher speed when leaving a lane the vehicle may not be able to be controlled by the system. The driver must always follow the speed limit when using the system.

If you attach objects to the steering wheel, the system may not assist steering or the hands off alarm may not work properly.

(Continued) The system detects lane

markers and controls the steering wheel by a camera, therefore, if the lane markers are hard to detect, the system may not work properly. Please refer to "Limitations of the system".

Do not remove or damage the related parts of LKAS.

You may not hear a warning sound of LKAS because of excessive audio sound.

Do not place objects on the dashboard that reflects light such as mirrors, white paper, etc. The system may malfunc- tion if the sunlight is reflected.

(Continued)

OAEE057144N

5-61

Driving your vehicle

5

Information If the indicator (white) is activated from the previous ignition cycle, the system will turn ON without any addi- tional control. If you press the LKAS button again, the indicator on the cluster goes off.

The color of indicator will change depending on the condition of LKAS.

- White : Sensor does not detect lane markers or vehicle speed is under 40 mph (60 km/h).

- Green : Sensor detects lane mark- ers and the system is able to control vehicle steering.

LKAS activation

To see the LKAS screen on the LCD display in the cluster, select ASSIST mode ( ). For more information, refer to "LCD Display Modes" in chapter 3.

When both lane markers are detected and all the conditions to activate the LKAS are satisfied, a green steering wheel indicator will illuminate and the LKAS indicator light will change from white to green.This indicates that the LKAS system is in the ENABLED state and the steering wheel will be able to be controlled.

i

OAEE057122N

The Lane Keeping Assist System is a system to prevent the driver from leaving the lane. However, the driver should not solely rely on the system but always check the road condi- tions when driving.

WARNING

5-62

If vehicle speed is over 40 mph (64 km/h) and the system detects lane markers, the color changes from gray to white.

If the system detects the left lane marker, the left lane marker color will change from gray to white.

If the system detects the right marker line, the right lane marker color will change from gray to white.

Both lane markers must be detect- ed for the system to fully activate.

If your vehicle speed exceeds 40 mph (60 km/h) and the LKAS but- ton is ON, the system is enabled. If your vehicle departs from the pro- jected lane in front of you, the LKAS operates as follows:

When the conditions below are met, LKAS will be enable to assist steer- ing. Vehicle speed is above 40 mph (64

kph). Both lane markers are detected by

LKAS. The vehicle is between the lane

markers.

If LKAS can assist steering, a green steering wheel indicator will illumi- nate. A visual warning appears on the cluster LCD display. Either the left lane marker or the right lane marker in the cluster LCD display will blink depending on which direction the vehicle is veering. If the steering wheel appears, the system will control the vehicle's steering to prevent the vehicle from crossing the lane marker.

Driving your vehicle

Lane marker undetected

Lane marker detected

OAEE057123N/OAEE057124N

Left lane marker Right lane marker

OAEE057127N/OAEE057128N

5-63

Driving your vehicle

Keep hands on steering wheel

If the driver takes their hands off the steering wheel for several seconds while the LKAS is activated, the sys- tem will warn the driver.

Information If the steering wheel is held very light- ly the message may still appear because the LKAS system may not recognize that the driver has their hands on the wheel.

Driver's grasp not detected. LKAS will be disabled momentarily

If the driver still does not have their hands on the steering wheel after the message "Keep hands on steering wheel", the system will not control the steering wheel and warn the driv- er only when the driver crosses the lane markers. However, if the driver has their hands on the steering wheel again, the sys- tem will start controlling the steering wheel.

i

5

OAEE056129L OAEE056130L

The warning message may appear late according to road conditions. Therefore, always have your hands on the steering wheel while driving.

WARNING

5-64

Information Even though the steering is assisted

by the system, the driver can still steer to control the steering wheel.

The steering wheel may feel heavier when the steering wheel is assisted by the system than when it is not.

Warning Light and Message

Check LKAS

If there is a problem with the system a message will appear for a few sec- onds. If the problem continues the LKAS failure indicator will illuminate.

LKAS failure indicator The LKAS failure indica- tor (yellow) will illuminate if the LKAS is not working properly. Have your vehi- cle checked by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer.

When there is a problem with the system do one of the following:

Turn the system on after turning the engine off and on again.

Check if the POWER button is in the ON position.

Check if the system is affected by the weather. (ex: fog, heavy rain, etc.)

Check if there is foreign matter on the camera lens.

If the problem is not solved, have your vehicle checked by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer.

The LKAS system will not be in the ENABLED state and the steering wheel will not be assisted when:

The turn signal is turned on before changing a lane. If you change lanes without the turn signal on, the steering wheel might be con- trolled.

The vehicle is not driven in the mid- dle of the lane when the system is turned on or right after changing a lane.

i

Driving your vehicle

OAEE056131L

The driver is responsible for accurate steering.

Turn off the system in below situations. - In bad weather - In bad road condition - When the steering wheel

needs to be controlled by the driver frequently.

WARNING

5-65

Driving your vehicle

The vehicle drives too close to the lane marker continuously before steering is assisted.

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) or VSM (Vehicle Stability Management) is activated.

The vehicle is driven on a sharp curve.

Vehicle speed is below 40 mph (60 km/h) and over 110 mph (180 km/h).

The vehicle makes sharp lane changes.

The vehicle brakes suddenly. Only one lane marker is detected. The lane is very wide or narrow. There are more than two lane

markers on the road. (e.g. con- struction area)

The vehicle is driven on a steep incline.

The steering wheel is turned sud- denly.

Limitations of the System The LKAS may operate prematurely even if the vehicle does not depart from the intended lane, OR, the LKAS may not assist your steering or warn you if the vehicle leaves the intended lane under the following cir- cumstances:

When the lane and road condi- tions are poor It is difficult to distinguish the lane

marking from the road surface or the lane marking is faded or not clearly marked.

It is difficult to distinguish the color of the lane marker from the road.

There are markings on the road surface that look like a lane marker that is inadvertently being detected by the camera.

The lane marker is merged or divided. (e.g. tollgate)

The lane number increases or decreases or the lane marker are crossing complicatedly.

There are more than two lane markers on the road in front of you.

The lane marker is very thick or thin.

The lanes ahead are not visible due to rain, snow, water on the road, damaged or stained road surface, or other factors.

The shadow is on the lane marker by a median strip, trees, etc.

The lanes are incomplete or the area is in a construction zone.

There are crosswalk signs or other symbols on the road.

The lane marker in a tunnel is stained with oil, etc.

The lane suddenly disappears such as at the intersection.

When external condition is inter- vened The brightness outside changes

suddenly such as when entering or exiting a tunnel or passing under a bridge.

The brightness outside is too low such as when the headlamps are not on at night or the vehicle is going through a tunnel or passing under a bridge..

5

5-66

Driving your vehicle

There is a boundary structure in the roadway such as a concrete barrier, guardrail and reflector post that is inadvertently being detected by the camera.

When light coming from a street light or an oncoming vehicle is reflected on a wet road surface such as a puddle in the road.

The field of view in front is obstructed by sun glare.

There is not enough distance between you and the vehicle in front to be able to detect the lane marker or the vehicle ahead is driv- ing on the lane marker.

Driving on a steep grade, over a hill, or when driving on a curved road.

The adverse road conditions cause excessive vehicle vibrations while driving.

The surrounding of the inside rear view mirror temperature is high due to direct sunlight, etc.

When front visibility is poor The windshield or the LKAS cam-

era lens is blocked with dirt or debris.

The windshield glass is fogged up; a clear view of the road is obstruct- ed.

Placing objects on the dashboard, etc.

The sensor cannot detect the lane because of fog, heavy rain or snow.

LKAS Function Change The driver can change LKAS to Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) or change the LKAS mode between Standard LKA and Active LKA from the LCD display. Go to the 'User Settings Driving Assist Lane Keep Assist System Lane Departure Warning/Standard LKA/ Active LKA'. The system is automatically set to Standard LKA if a function is not selected.

Lane Departure Warning LDWS alerts the driver with a visual warning and a warning alarm when the system detects the vehicle departing the lane. The steering wheel will not be controlled.

Standard LKA The Standard LKA mode guides the driver to help keep the vehicle within the lanes. It rarely controls the steer- ing wheel, when the vehicle drives well inside the lanes. However, it starts to control the steering wheel, when the vehicle is about to deviate out of the lanes.

Active LKA The Active LKA mode provides more frequent steering wheel control in comparison with the Standard LKA mode. Active LKA can reduce the dri- vers fatigue to assist the steering for maintaining the vehicle in the middle of the lane.

5-67

Driving your vehicle

5

Cruise Control Operation

1. Cruise indicator 2. SET indicator

The Cruise Control system allows you to drive at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h) without depressing the accelerator pedal.

CRUISE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

Take the following precautions: Always set the vehicle speed

under the speed limit. If the Cruise Control is left on,

(cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster is illumi- nated) the Cruise Control can be activated unintentionally. Keep the Cruise Control sys- tem off (cruise indicator light OFF) when the Cruise Control is not in use, to avoid inadver- tently setting a speed.

Use the Cruise Control system only when traveling on open highways in good weather.

(Continued)

(Continued) Do not use the Cruise Control

when it may be unsafe to keep the vehicle at a constant speed: - When driving in heavy traffic

or when traffic conditions make it difficult to drive at a constant speed

- When driving on rainy, icy, or snow-covered roads

- When driving on hilly or windy roads

- When driving in windy areas - When driving with limited

view (possibly due to bad weather such as fog, snow, rain and sandstorm)

WARNING

OAEE056018

5-68

Driving your vehicle

Information During normal cruise control opera-

tion, when the SET switch is activat- ed or reactivated after applying the brakes, the cruise control will ener- gize after approximately 3 seconds. This delay is normal.

Before activating the cruise control function, the system will check to verify that the brake switch is oper- ating normally. Depress the brake pedal at least once after turning ON the POWER button or starting the vehicle.

To set Cruise Control speed

1. Press the CRUISE button on the steering wheel to turn the system on. The cruise indicator will illumi- nate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which must be more than 20 mph (30 km/h).

3. Push the toggle switch (1) down (SET-), and release it. The SET indicator light will illuminate.

4. Release the accelerator pedal.

Information On a steep slope, the vehicle may slightly slow down or speed up, while driving uphill or downhill.

i

i

OAE056068

OAE056069

5-69

Driving your vehicle

5

To increase Cruise Control speed

Push the toggle switch (1) up (RES+) and release it immediately. The cruising speed will increase 1 mph (2.0 km/h) each time the tog- gle switch is operated in this man- ner.

Push the toggle switch (1) up (RES+) and hold it, while monitor- ing the SET speed on the instru- ment cluster. Release the toggle switch when the desired speed is shown and the vehicle will accelerate to that speed.

Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the toggle switch (1) down (SET-).

To decrease Cruise Control speed

Push the toggle switch (1) down (SET-) and release it immediately. The cruising speed will decrease 1 mph (2.0 km/h) each time the tog- gle switch is operated in this man- ner.

Push the toggle switch (1) down (SET-) and hold it. Your vehicle will gradually slow down. Release the toggle switch at the speed you want to maintain.

Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the toggle switch (1) down (SET-).

OAE056070 OAE056069

5-70

Driving your vehicle

To temporarily accelerate with the Cruise Control ON Depress the accelerator pedal. When you take your foot off the accelerator, the vehicle will return to the previ- ously set speed. If you push the toggle switch down (SET-) at the increased speed, the Cruise Control will maintain the increased speed.

Cruise Control will be canceled when:

Depressing the brake pedal. Pressing the CANCEL button

located on the steering wheel. The vehicle is shifted into N

(Neutral). Decreasing the vehicle speed to

less than approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

The ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is operating.

Information Each of the above actions will cancel Cruise Control operation (the SET indicator light in the instrument clus- ter will go off), but only pressing the CRUISE button will turn the system off. If you wish to resume Cruise Control operation, push the toggle switch up (RES+) located on your steering wheel. You will return to your previously preset speed, unless the system was turned off using the CRUISE button.

i

OAE056071

5-71

Driving your vehicle

5

To resume preset Cruising speed

Push the toggle switch (1) up (RES+). If the vehicle speed is over 20 mph (30 km/h), the vehicle will resume the preset speed.

To turn Cruise Control off

Press the CRUISE button (the cruise indicator light will go off).

OAE056070

OAE056068

5-72

Driving your vehicle

Cruise indicator Set speed Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

To see the SCC screen on the LCD display in the cluster, select ASSIST mode ( ). For more information, refer to "LCD Display Modes" in chapter 3.

The Smart Cruise Control System allows you to program the vehicle to maintain constant speed and mini- mum distance between the vehicle ahead.

The Smart Cruise Control System will automatically adjust your vehicle speed to maintain your programmed speed and following distance without requiring you to depress the acceler- ator or brake pedals.

ADVANCED SMART CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

For your safety, please read the owner's manual before using the Smart Cruise Control system.

WARNING

The Smart Cruise Control System is not a substitute for safe driving practices, but a convenience function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always check the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.

WARNING

Take the following precautions : Always set the vehicle speed

under the speed limit in your country.

If the Smart Cruise Control is left on, (cruise ( ) indicator light in the instru- ment cluster is illuminated) the Smart Cruise Control can be activated unintentionally. Keep the Smart Cruise Control System off (cruise ( ) indicator light OFF) when the Smart Cruise Control is not in use, to avoid inadvertently setting a speed.

Use the Smart Cruise Control System only when traveling on open highways in good weather.

(Continued)

WARNING

OAE056097N

5-73

Driving your vehicle

5

Smart cruise control switch

CANCEL : Cancels cruise control operation.

CRUISE : Turns cruise control sys- tem on or off.

RES+: Resumes or increases cruise control speed.

SET-: Sets or decreases cruise con- trol speed.

: Sets vehicle-to-vehicle dis- tance.

Smart Cruise Control speed To set Smart Cruise Control speed

1. Push the CRUISE button on the steering wheel to turn the system on. The cruise ( ) indi- cator will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed. The Smart Cruise Control speed can be set as follows: 20 ~ 110 mph (30 ~ 180 km/h) :

when there is no vehicle in front 0 ~ 110 mph (0 ~ 180 km/h) :

when there is a vehicle in front

(Continued) Do not use the Smart Cruise

Control when it may not be safe to keep the vehicle at a constant speed: - When driving in heavy traffic

or when traffic conditions make it difficult to drive at a constant speed

- When driving on rainy, icy, or snow-covered roads

- When driving on a steep downhill or uphill

- When driving in windy areas - When driving in parking lots - When driving near crash

barriers - When driving on a sharp

curve - When driving with limited

view (possibly due to bad weather, such as fog, snow, rain or sandstorm)

- When the vehicle sensing ability decreases due to vehicle modification result- ing level difference of the vehicle's front and rear

OAEE057169N

OAE056068

5-74

Driving your vehicle

3. Push the toggle switch down (SET-). The Set Speed and Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance on the LCD display will illuminate.

4. Release the accelerator pedal. The desired speed will automati- cally be maintained.

If there is a vehicle in front of you, the speed may decrease to maintain the distance to the vehicle ahead. On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow down or speed up slightly while going uphill or downhill.

Information Vehicle speed may decrease on an upward slope and increase on a down- ward slope.

To increase Smart Cruise Control set speed

Follow either of these procedures: Push the toggle switch up (RES+),

and release it immediately. The cruising speed will increase by 1 mph (1 km/h) each time you move the toggle switch up in this manner.

Push the toggle switch up (RES+), and hold it. Your vehicle set speed will increase by 5 mph (10 km/h). Release the toggle switch at the speed you want.

You can set the speed to 110 mph (180 km/h).

i

OAE056069

OAE056070

When vehicle speed is under 6 mph (10 km/h), the Smart Cruise Control is cancelled. The driver must adjust the vehicle speed by depressing the accelerator or brake pedal according to the road condition ahead and driv- ing condition.

CAUTION

5-75

Driving your vehicle

5

To decrease the Smart Cruise Control set speed

Follow either of these procedures: Push the toggle switch down (SET-),

and release it immediately. The cruising speed will decrease by 1 mph (1 km/h) each time you move the toggle switch down in this man- ner.

Push the toggle switch down (SET-), and hold it. Your vehicle set speed will decrease by 5 mph (10 km/h). Release the toggle switch at the speed you want.

You can set the speed to 20 mph (30 km/h).

To temporarily accelerate with the Smart Cruise Control on If you want to speed up temporarily when the Smart Cruise Control is on, depress the accelerator pedal. Increased speed will not interfere with Smart Cruise Control operation or change the set speed. To return to the set speed, take your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you push the toggle switch down (SET-) at increased speed, the cruis- ing speed will be set again.

Information Be careful when accelerating tem- porarily, because the speed is not con- trolled automatically at this time even if there is a vehicle in front of you.

i

Check the driving condition before using the toggle switch. Driving speed sharply increas- es, when you push up and hold the toggle switch.

CAUTION

OAE056069

5-76

Driving your vehicle

Smart Cruise Control will be temporarily cancelled when:

Cancelled manually Depressing the brake pedal. Pressing the CANCEL button

located on the steering wheel. The Smart Cruise Control turns off temporarily when the Set Speed and Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance indicator on the LCD display turns off. The cruise ( ) indicator is illuminated continuously.

Cancelled automatically The driver's door is opened. The vehicle is shifted to N

(Neutral), R (Reverse) or P (Park). The EPB (Electronic Parking Brake)

is applied. The vehicle speed is over 120 mph

(190 km/h). The vehicle stops on a steep

incline. The ESC (Electronic Stability

Control), TCS (Traction Control System) or ABS is operating.

The ESC is turned off. The sensor or the cover is dirty or

blocked with foreign matter. The vehicle is stopped for more

than 5 minutes. The vehicle stops and goes repeat-

edly for a long period of time. The driver starts driving by pushing

the toggle switch up (RES+)/down (SET-) or depressing the accelera- tor pedal, approximately 3 minutes after the vehicle is stopped by the Smart Cruise Control System with no other vehicle ahead.

The driver starts driving by pushing the toggle switch up (RES+)/down (SET-) or depressing the accelera- tor pedal, after stopping the vehicle with a vehicle stopped far away in front.

The accelerator pedal is continu- ously depressed for more than one minute.

The AEB is activated. Each of these actions will cancel the Smart Cruise Control opera- tion.The Set Speed and Vehicle-to- Vehicle Distance on the LCD dis- play will go off. In a condition the Smart Cruise Control is cancelled automatically, the Smart Cruise Control will not resume even though the RES+ or SET- toggle switch is pushed.

Information If the Smart Cruise Control is canceled by other than the reasons mentioned, have the system checked by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer.

i

OAE056071

5-77

Driving your vehicle

5 Smart Cruise Control canceled

If the system is cancelled, the warn- ing chime will sound and a message will appear for a few seconds. You must adjust the vehicle speed by depressing the accelerator or brake pedal according to the road condition ahead and driving condition. Always check the road conditions. Do not rely on the warning chime.

To resume Smart Cruise Control set speed If any method other than the cruise toggle switch was used to cancel cruising speed and the system is still activated, the cruising speed will automatically resume when you push the toggle switch up (RES+) or down (SET-). If you push the toggle switch up (RES+), the speed will resume to the recently set speed. However, if vehi- cle speed drops below 20 mph (30 km/h), it will resume when there is a vehicle in front of your vehicle.

Information Always check the road conditions when you push the toggle switch up (RES+) to resume speed.

To turn Cruise Control off

Press the CRUISE button (the cruise ( ) indicator light will go off).i

OAEE056165N

OAE056068

5-78

Driving your vehicle

Smart Cruise Control Vehicle- to-Vehicle Distance To set Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance

When the Smart Cruise Control System is ON, you can set and main- tain the distance from the vehicle ahead of you without pressing the accelerator or brake pedal.

Each time the button is pressed, the vehicle to vehicle distance changes as follows:

For example, if you drive at 56 mph (90 km/h), the distance is maintained as follows:

Distance 4 - approximately 172 feet Distance 3 - approximately 130 feet Distance 2 - approximately 106 feet Distance 1 - approximately 82 feet

Information The distance is set to the last set dis- tance when the system is used for the first time after the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode.

When the lane ahead is clear:

The vehicle speed will maintain the set speed.

i

OAE056076

OAE056177N

Distance 4 Distance 3 Distance 2

Distance 1

5-79

Driving your vehicle

5

When there is a vehicle ahead of you in your lane:

Your vehicle speed will slow down or speed up to maintain the select- ed distance.

If the vehicle ahead speeds up, your vehicle will travel at a steady cruising speed after accelerating to the set speed.

When using the Smart Cruise Control System: The warning chime sounds

and the Vehicle-to Vehicle Distance indicator blinks if the vehicle is unable to main- tain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead.

If the warning chime sounds, depress the brake pedal or use the steering wheel to actively adjust the vehicle speed, and the distance to the vehicle ahead.

(Continued)

WARNING

OAEE056140R

Distance 4 Distance 3

OAE056184N/OAE056183N/ OAE056186N/OAE056185N

Distance 1Distance 2

(Continued) Even if the warning chime is

not activated, always pay attention to the driving condi- tions to prevent dangerous situations from occurring.

Playing the vehicle audio sys- tem at high volume may offset the system warning sounds.

5-80

Driving your vehicle

In traffic situation

Use switch or pedal to accelerate

In traffic, your vehicle will stop if the vehicle ahead of you stops. Also, if the vehicle ahead of you starts moving, your vehicle will start as well. However, if the vehicle stops for more than 3 seconds, you must depress the accelerator pedal or push up the toggle switch (RES+) to start driving.

If you push the advanced smart cruise control toggle switch (RES+ or SET-) while Auto Hold and advanced smart cruise control is operating the Auto Hold will be released regardless of accelerator pedal operation and the vehicle will start to move. The AUTO HOLD indicator changes from green to white.

If the vehicle ahead (vehicle speed: less than 20 mph (30km/h)) disappears to the next lane, the warning chime will sound and a message "Watch for surrounding vehicles" will appear. Adjust your vehicle speed for vehicles or objects that can suddenly appear in front of you by depressing the brake pedal. Always pay attention to the road condition ahead.

CAUTION

OAE056168L OAEE046473L

5-81

Driving your vehicle

5

Sensor to detect distance to the vehicle ahead

The Smart Cruise Control uses a sensor to detect distance to the vehi- cle ahead.

Warning message

Smart Cruise Control disabled. Radar blocked

When the sensor lens cover is blocked with dirt, snow, or debris, the Smart Cruise Control System opera- tion may stop temporarily. If this occurs, a warning message will appear on the LCD display. Remove any dirt, snow, or debris and clean the radar sensor lens cover before operating the Smart Cruise Control System. The Smart Cruise Control system may not properly activate, if the radar is totally contaminated, or if any substance is not detected after the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode (e.g. in an open terrain).

Information For the SCC operation is temporarily stopped if the radar is blocked, but you wish to use cruise control mode (speed control function), you must convert to the cruise control mode (refer to "To convert to Cruise Control mode" in the following page.

i

OAE056166L Do not apply license plate

frame or foreign objects such as a bumper sticker or a bumper guard near the radar sensor. Doing so may adverse- ly affect the sensing perform- ance of the radar.

Always keep the radar sensor and lens cover clean and free of dirt and debris.

Use only a soft cloth to wash the vehicle. Do not spray pres- surized water directly on the sensor or sensor cover.

(Continued)

CAUTION

OAEE056011N

5-82

Driving your vehicle

Check Smart Cruise Control System

The message will appear when the vehicle to vehicle distance control system is not functioning normally. Take your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys- tem checked.

To adjust the sensitivity of Smart Cruise Control The sensitivity of vehicle speed when following the front vehicle to maintain the set distance can be adjusted. Go to the 'User Settings Driving Assist Smart Cruise Control Speed Slow/Normal/Fast' on the LCD display. You may select one of the three stages you prefer. - Slow:

Vehicle speed following the front vehicle to maintain the set distance is slower than normal speed.

- Normal: Vehicle speed following the front vehicle to maintain the set distance is normal.

- Fast: Vehicle speed following the front vehicle to maintain the set distance is faster than normal speed.

Information The last selected speed sensitivity of the smart cruise control is remained in the system.

i

OAE056167L

(Continued) Be careful not to apply unnec-

essary force on the radar sen- sor or sensor cover. If the sen- sor is forcibly moved out of proper alignment, the Smart Cruise Control System may not operate correctly. In this case, a warning message may not be displayed. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

If the front bumper becomes damaged in the area around the radar sensor, the Smart Cruise Control System may not operate properly. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Use only genuine HYUNDAI parts to repair or replace a damaged sensor or sensor cover. Do not apply paint to the sensor cover.

5-83

Driving your vehicle

5

To convert to Cruise Control mode The driver may choose to switch to use the conventional Cruise Control mode (speed only control function) by following these steps: 1. Push the CRUISE button on the

steering wheel to turn the system on. The cruise ( ) indi- cator will illuminate.

2. Push and hold the Vehicle-to- Vehicle Distance button for more than 2 seconds.

3. Choose between "Smart Cruise Control" and "Cruise Control".

When the system is cancelled using the CRUISE button or the CRUISE button is used after the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode, the Smart Cruise Control mode will turn on.

Limitations of the system The Smart Cruise Control System may have limits to its ability to detect distance to the vehicle ahead due to road and traffic conditions.

On curves

The Smart Cruise Control System may not detect a moving vehicle in your lane, and then your vehicle could accelerate to the set speed. Also, the vehicle speed will decrease when the vehicle ahead is recognized suddenly.

Select the appropriate set speed on curves and apply the brakes or accelerator pedal if necessary.

OAE056100

When using the conventional Cruise Control mode, you must manually adjust the distance to other vehicles by depressing the accelerator or brake pedal. The system does not automati- cally adjust the distance to vehicles in front of you.

WARNING

5-84

Driving your vehicle

Your vehicle speed can be reduced due to a vehicle in the adjacent lane. Apply the accelerator pedal and select the appropriate set speed. Check to be sure that the road con- ditions permit safe operation of the Smart Cruise Control.

On inclines

During uphill or downhill driving, the Smart Cruise Control System may not detect a moving vehicle in your lane, and cause your vehicle to accelerate to the set speed. Also, the vehicle speed will rapidly decrease when the vehicle ahead is recognized suddenly.

Select the appropriate set speed on inclines and apply the brake or accelerator pedal if necessary.

Lane changing

A vehicle which moves into your lane from an adjacent lane cannot be recognized by the sensor until it is in the sensor's detection range.

The radar may not detect immedi- ately when a vehicle cuts in sud- denly. Always pay attention to the traffic, road and driving conditions.

If a slower vehicle moves into your lane, your speed may decrease to maintain the distance to the vehicle ahead.

If a faster vehicle which moves into your lane, your vehicle will acceler- ate to the set speed.

OAE056103OAE056102

OAE056101

5-85

Driving your vehicle

5

Vehicle recognition

Some vehicles in your lane cannot be recognized by the sensor: - Narrow vehicles such as motorcy-

cles or bicycles - Vehicles offset to one side - Slow-moving vehicles or sudden-

decelerating vehicles - Stopped vehicles - Vehicles with small rear profile

such as trailers with no loads

A vehicle ahead cannot be recog- nized correctly by the sensor if any of following occurs: - When the vehicle is pointing

upwards due to overloading in the luggage compartment

- While the steering wheel is operat- ing

- When driving to one side of the lane

- When driving on narrow lanes or on curves

Apply the brake or accelerator pedal if necessary.

Your vehicle may accelerate when a vehicle ahead of you disappears.

When you are warned that the vehicle ahead of you is not detect- ed, drive with caution.

OAE056108

OAE056104

5-86

Driving your vehicle

When driving in stop-and-go traffic, and a stopped vehicle in front of you merges out of the lane, the system may not immediately detect the new vehicle that is now in front of you. In this case, you must maintain a safe braking dis- tance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

Always look out for pedestrians when your vehicle is maintaining a distance with the vehicle ahead.

Always be cautious for vehicles with higher height or vehicles car- rying loads that sticks out from the back of the vehicle.

OAE056105OAE056110OAE056109

5-87

Driving your vehicle

5

The Smart Cruise Control System may not operate temporarily due to: Electrical interference Modifying the suspension Differences of tire abrasion or

tire pressure Installing different type of tires

NOTICE(Continued) Vehicles moving in front of

you with a frequent lane change may cause a delay in the system's reaction or may cause the system to react to a vehicle actually in an adjacent lane. Always drive cautiously to prevent unexpected and sudden situations from occur- ring.

Always be aware of the select- ed speed and vehicle to vehi- cle distance. The driver should not solely rely on the system but always pay atten- tion to driving conditions and control your vehicle speed.

The Smart Cruise Control System may not recognize complex driving situations so always pay attention to driv- ing conditions and control your vehicle speed.

When using the Smart Cruise Control take the following pre- cautions: If an emergency stop is nec-

essary, you must apply the brakes. The vehicle cannot be stopped at every emergency situation by using the Smart Cruise Control System.

Keep a safe distance accord- ing to road conditions and vehicle speed. If the vehicle to vehicle distance is too close during a high-speed driving, a serious collision may result.

Always maintain sufficient braking distance and deceler- ate your vehicle by applying the brakes if necessary.

The Smart Cruise Control System cannot recognize a stopped vehicle, pedestrians or an oncoming vehicle. Always look ahead cautiously to pre- vent unexpected and sudden situations from occurring.

(Continued)

WARNING

5-88

Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following three conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter- ference received, including interfer- ence that may cause undesired operation.

3. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

Information Radio frequency radiation exposure information:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 8 in. (20 cm) between the radiator (antenna) and your body.

This transmitter must not be co-locat- ed or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

ii

Driving your vehicle

5-89

Driving your vehicle

5

Hazardous Driving Conditions When hazardous driving elements are encountered such as water, snow, ice, mud and sand, take the bellow suggestions: Drive cautiously and keep a longer

braking distance. Avoid abrupt braking or steering. When your vehicle is stuck in snow,

mud, or sand, use second gear. Accelerate slowly to avoid unnec- essary wheel spin.

Put sand, rock salt, tire chains or other non-slip materials under the wheels to provide additional trac- tion while the vehicle becomes stuck in ice, snow, or mud.

Rocking the Vehicle If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around your front wheels. Then, shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a for- ward gear. Try to avoid spinning the wheels, and do not race the vehicle. To prevent reduction gear wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelera- tor pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal while the reduction gear is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that may free the vehicle.

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

If the vehicle is stuck and excessive wheel spin occurs, the temperature in the tires can increase very quickly. If the tires become damaged, a tire blow out or tire explosion can occur. This condition is dangerous - you and others may be injured. Do not attempt this procedure if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle. If you attempt to free the vehi- cle, the vehicle can overheat quickly, possibly causing an motor compartment fire or other damage.Try to avoid spin- ning the wheels as much as possible to prevent overheating of either the tires or the vehicle. DO NOT allow the vehicle to spin the wheels above 56 km/h (35 mph).

WARNING

5-90

Driving your vehicle

Information The ESC system (if equipped) must be turned OFF before rocking the vehi- cle.

If you are still stuck after rocking the vehicle a few times, have the vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid vehicle overheating, pos- sible damage to the reduction gear and tire damage. See "Towing" in chapter 6.

Smooth Cornering Avoid braking or gear changing in corners, especially when roads are wet. Ideally, corners should always be taken under gentle acceleration.

Driving at Night Night driving presents more hazards than driving in the daylight. Here are some important tips to remember: Slow down and keep more dis-

tance between you and other vehi- cles, as it may be more difficult to see at night, especially in areas where there may not be any street lights.

Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare from other driver's head- lamps.

Keep your headlamps clean and properly aimed. Dirty or improperly aimed headlamps will make it much more difficult to see at night.

Avoid staring directly at the head- lamps of oncoming vehicles. You could be temporarily blinded, and it will take several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the darkness.

Driving in the Rain Rain and wet roads can make driving dangerous. Here are a few things to consider when driving in the rain or on slick pavement: Slow down and allow extra follow-

ing distance. A heavy rainfall makes it harder to see and increas- es the distance needed to stop your vehicle.

Turn OFF your Cruise Control. (if equipped)

Replace your windshield wiper blades when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield.

Be sure your tires have enough tread. If your tires do not have enough tread, making a quick stop on wet pavement can cause a skid and possibly lead to an accident. See "Tire Tread" in chapter 7.

Turn on your headlamps to make it easier for others to see you.

Driving too fast through large pud- dles can affect your brakes. If you must go through puddles, try to drive through them slowly.

NOTICE

i

5-91

Driving your vehicle

5

If you believe your brakes may be wet, apply them lightly while driv- ing until normal braking operation returns.

Hydroplaning If the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough, your vehicle may have little or no contact with the road surface and actually ride on the water. The best advice is SLOW DOWN when the road is wet.

The risk of hydroplaning increas- es as the depth of tire tread decreases, refer to "Tire Tread" in chapter 7.

Driving in Flooded Areas Avoid driving through flooded areas unless you are sure the water is no higher than the bottom of the wheel hub. Drive through any water slowly. Allow adequate stopping distance because brake performance may be reduced. After driving through water, dry the brakes by gently applying them sev- eral times while the vehicle is moving slowly.

Highway Driving Tires Adjust the tire inflation, as specified. Under-inflation may overheat or damage the tires. Do not install worn-out or damaged tires, which may reduce traction or fail the braking operation.

Information Never over-inflate your tires above the maximum inflation pressure, as speci- fied on your tires.

Coolant and high voltage bat- tery Be sure to check both the coolant level and the high voltage battery level before driving.

i

5-92

Driving your vehicle

The severe weather conditions of winter quickly wear out tires and cause other problems. To minimize winter driving problems, you should take the following suggestions:

Snow or Icy Conditions You need to keep sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Apply the brakes gently. Speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications, and sharp turns are potentially very hazardous practices. During deceleration, use regenera- tive braking to the fullest extent. Sudden brake applications on snowy or icy roads may cause the vehicle to skid. To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may be necessary to use snow tires or to install tire chains on your tires. Always carry emergency equipment. Some of the items you may want to carry include tire chains, tow straps or chains, a flashlight, emergency flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

Snow tires

If you mount snow tires on your vehi- cle, make sure to use radial tires of the same size and load range as the original tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels to balance your vehicles handling in all weather conditions. The traction provided by snow tires on dry roads may not be as high as your vehicle's original equipment tires. Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations.

Information Do not install studded tires without first checking local, state and munici- pal regulations for possible restric- tions against their use.

Tire chains

Since the sidewalls of radial tires are thinner than other types of tires, they may be damaged by mounting some types of tire chains on them. Therefore, the use of snow tires is recommended instead of tire chains. Do not mount tire chains on vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels; if unavoidable use a wire type chain. If tire chains must be used, use gen- uine HYUNDAI parts and install the tire chain after reviewing the instruc- tions provided with the tire chains. Damage to your vehicle caused by improper tire chain use is not cov- ered by your vehicle manufacturers warranty.

i

WINTER DRIVING

Snow tires should be equivalent in size and type to the vehicle's standard tires. Otherwise, the safety and handling of your vehicle may be adversely affect- ed.

WARNING

OAEE056015

5-93

Driving your vehicle

5

Information Install tire chains only in pairs and

on the front tires. It should be noted that installing tire chains on the tires will provide a greater driving force, but will not prevent side skids.

Do not install studded tires without first checking local, state and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against their use.

Chain Installation

When installing tire chains, follow the manufacturer's instructions and mount them as tightly possible. Drive slowly (less than 20 mph (30 km/h)) with chains installed. If you hear the chains contacting the body or chas- sis, stop and tighten them. If they still make contact, slow down until the noise stops. Remove the tire chains as soon as you begin driving on cleared roads. When mounting snow chains, park the vehicle on level ground away from traffic. Turn on the vehicle Hazard Warning Flasher and place a triangular emergency warning device behind the vehicle (if available). Always place the vehicle in P (Park), apply the parking brake and turn off the vehicle before installing snow chains.

i

The use of tire chains may adversely affect vehicle han- dling: Drive less than 20 mph (30

km/h) or the chain manufac- turer's recommended speed limit, whichever is lower.

Drive carefully and avoid bumps, holes, sharp turns, and other road hazards, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.

Avoid sharp turns or locked wheel braking.

WARNING

5-94

Driving your vehicle

When using tire chains: Wrong size chains or improperly

installed chains can damage your vehicle's brake lines, sus- pension, body and wheels.

Use SAE "S" class or wire chains.

If you hear noise caused by chains contacting the body, retighten the chain to prevent contact with the vehicle body.

To prevent body damage, retighten the chains after driving 0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1.0 km).

Do not use tire chains on vehi- cles equipped with aluminum wheels. If unavoidable, use a wire type chain.

Use wire chains less than 0.47 in (12 mm) thick to prevent damage to the chain's connection.

Winter Precautions Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant Your vehicle is delivered with high quality ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. It is the only type of coolant that should be used because it helps prevent corrosion in the cool- ing system, lubricates the water pump and prevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish your coolant in accordance with the maintenance schedule in chapter 7. Before winter, have your coolant tested to assure that its freezing point is sufficient for the temperatures anticipated during the winter.

Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary In some climates it is recommended that a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be used during cold weather. See chapter 8 for recommendations. If you aren't sure what weight oil you should use, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Check battery and cables Winter puts additional burdens on the battery system. Visually inspect the battery and cables as described in chapter 7. The level of charge in your battery can be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a service station.

NOTICE

5-95

Driving your vehicle

5

Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system To keep the water in the window washer system from freezing, add an approved window washer anti-freeze solution in accordance with instruc- tions on the container. Window wash- er anti-freeze is available from an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and most auto parts outlets. Do not use coolant or other types of anti-freeze as these may damage the paint fin- ish.

Do not let your parking brake freeze Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position.This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you shift to P (Park) and block the rear wheels so the car cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.

Do not let ice and snow accu- mulate underneath Under some conditions, snow and ice can build up under the fenders and interfere with the steering. When driving in severe winter conditions where this may happen, you should periodically check underneath the car to be sure the movement of the front wheels and the steering com- ponents is not obstructed.

Don't place foreign objects or materials in the motor compart- ment Placement of foreign object or mate- rials which prevent cooling of the vehicle, in the motor compartment, may cause a failure. The manufactur- er is not responsible for the damage caused by such placement.

To keep locks from freezing To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the key opening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is frozen internally, you may be able to thaw it out by using a heated key. Handle the heat- ed key with care to avoid injury.

5-96

Driving your vehicle

Two labels on your driver's door sill show how much weight your vehicle was designed to carry: the Tire and Loading Information Label and the Certification Label. Before loading your vehicle, familiar- ize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicles weight ratings, from the vehicle's specifica- tions and the Certification Label:

Base Curb Weight This is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or option- al equipment.

Vehicle Curb Weight This is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your deal- er plus any aftermarket equipment.

Cargo Weight This figure includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and optional equipment.

GAW (Gross Axle Weight) This is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) - including vehicle curb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) This is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Certification Label. The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual Cargo Weight plus passen- gers.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) This is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Certification Label located on the drivers door sill.

Tire Loading Information Label

The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, cold tire pressures recommended for your vehicle, the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity weight.

Vehicle capacity weight 849 lbs. (385 kg)

Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi- mum combined weight of occupants and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer, the combined weight includes the tongue load.

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

OAEE076052N

5-97

Driving your vehicle

5

Seating capacity Total : 5 persons

(Front seat : 2 persons, Rear seat : 3 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximum number of occupants including a driver, your vehicle may carry. However, the seating capacity may be reduced based upon the weight of all of the occupants, and the weight of the cargo being carried or towed. Do not overload the vehicle as there is a limit to the total weight, or load limit including occupants and cargo, the vehicle can carry.

Towing capacity We do not recommend using this vehicle for trailer towing.

Cargo capacity The cargo capacity of your vehicle will increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants and the tongue load, if your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.

Steps for determining correct load limit 1. Locate the statement "The com-

bined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug- gage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and lug- gage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail- er, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehi- cle.

Do not overload the vehicle as there is a limit to the total weight, or load limit, including occupants and cargo, the vehi- cle can carry. Overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle. If the GVWR or the GAWR is exceeded, parts on the vehicle can break, and it can change the handling of your vehicle. These could cause you to lose control and result in an accident.

WARNING

5-98

Driving your vehicle

Example 1

Maximum Load (1400 lbs.) (635 kg)

Passenger Weight (150 lbs. 2 = 300 lbs.)

(68 kg 2 = 136 kg)

Cargo Weight (1100 lbs.) (499 kg)

Example 2

Maximum Load (1400 lbs.) (635 kg)

Passenger Weight (150 lbs. 5 = 750 lbs.)

(68 kg 5 = 340 kg)

Cargo Weight (650 lbs.) (295 kg)

Example 3

Maximum Load (1400 lbs.) (635 kg)

Passenger Weight (172 lbs. 5 = 860 lbs.)

(78 kg 5 = 390 kg)

Cargo Weight (540 lbs.) (245 kg)

+

+

+

5-99

Driving your vehicle

5

Certification label

The certification label is located on the drivers door sill at the center pil- lar and shows the maximum allow- able weight of the fully loaded vehi- cle. This is called the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. This label also tells you the maxi- mum weight that can be supported by the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

The total weight of the vehicle, including all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline.

OBH059070

Overloading

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, the GAWR for either the front or rear axle and vehicle capacity weight. Exceeding these ratings can affect your vehicles handling and braking ability, and cause an accident.

Do not overload your vehicle. Overloading your vehicle can cause heat buildup in your vehicles tires and possible tire failure, increased stop- ping distances and poor vehi- cle handling-all of which may result in a crash.

WARNING

5-100

Driving your vehicle

Overloading your vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

We do not recommend using this vehicle for trailer towing.

NOTICE

TRAILER TOWING

If you carry items inside your vehicle (e.g., suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else), they are moving as fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, the items will keep going and can cause an injury if they strike the driver or a passenger. Put items in the cargo area of

your vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.

Do not stack items, like suit- cases, inside the vehicle above the tops of the seats.

Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle.

When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it.

WARNING

What to do in an emergency

6

Hazard Warning Flasher .......................................6-2 In Case of an Emergency While Driving.............6-2

If the Vehicle Stalls While Driving.................................6-2 If the Vehicle Stalls at a Crossroad or Crossing .......6-2 If you Have a Flat Tire While Driving ..........................6-3

If the Vehicle Will Not Start .................................6-3 Confirm the EV Battery Is Not Low on the Charge Gauge ...................................................................................6-3

Jump Starting (12V Battery) ................................6-4 If the Vehicle Overheats .......................................6-6 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).........6-8

Check Tire Pressure .........................................................6-8 Tire Pressure Monitoring System.................................6-9 Low Tire Pressure Telltale ............................................6-10 Low Tire Pressure LCD Display with Position Indicator ............................................................6-10 TPMS Malfunction Indicator ........................................6-11 Changing a Tire with TPMS..........................................6-12

If you Have a Flat Tire........................................6-14 With Tire Mobility Kit (TMK)........................................6-14

Towing ...................................................................6-21 Towing service .................................................................6-21 Removable Towing Hook ...............................................6-22 Emergency Towing..........................................................6-23

6-2

The hazard warning flasher serves as a warning to other drivers to exer- cise extreme caution when approach- ing, overtaking, or passing your vehi- cle. It should be used whenever emer- gency repairs are being made or when the vehicle is stopped near the edge of a roadway.

To turn the hazard warning flasher on or off, press the hazard warning flasher button. The button is located in the center fascia panel. Both the left and right turn signal lights will flash simultaneously. The hazard warning flasher oper-

ates whether your vehicle is run- ning or not.

The turn signals do not work when the hazard flasher is on.

If the Vehicle Stalls While Driving Reduce your speed gradually,

keeping a straight line. Move cau- tiously off the road to a safe place.

Turn on your hazard warning flash- er.

Try to start the vehicle again. If your vehicle will not start, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or seek other qualified assistance.

If the Vehicle Stalls at a Crossroad or Crossing If the vehicle stalls at a crossroad or crossing, if safe to do so, shift to the N (Neutral) position and then push the vehicle to a safe location.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

What to do in an emergency

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING

OAEE066013

6-3

W hat to do in an em

ergency

If you Have a Flat Tire While Driving If a tire goes flat while you are driving: Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal and let the vehicle slow down while driving straight ahead. Do not apply the brakes immediately to slow down the vehicle, but use the paddle shifter (left side lever) to increase regenerative braking con- trol. Also, do not or attempt to pull off the road as this may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. When the vehicle has slowed to such a speed that it is safe to do so, brake carefully and pull off the road. Drive off the road as far as possible and park on firm, level ground. If you are on a divided highway, do not park in the median area between the two traffic lanes.

When the vehicle is stopped, press the hazard warning flasher button, shift to P(Park), apply the parking brake, and place the POWER but- ton in the OFF position.

Have all passengers get out of the vehicle. Be sure they all get out on the side of the vehicle that is away from traffic.

When changing a flat tire, follow the instructions provided later in this chapter.

Confirm the EV Battery Is Not Low on the Charge Gauge Be sure the gear is in P (Park). The

vehicle starts only when the gear is in P (Park).

Check the 12-volt battery connec- tions to be sure they are clean and tight.

Turn on the interior light. If the light dims or goes out when you operate the starter, the battery is drained.

Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. This could cause damage to your vehicle. See instructions for "Jump Starting" provided in this chapter. 6

IF THE VEHICLE WILL NOT START

6-4

What to do in an emergency

Jump starting can be dangerous if done incorrectly. Follow the jump starting procedure in this section to avoid serious injury or damage to your vehicle. If in doubt about how to properly jump start your vehicle, we strongly recommend that you have a service technician or towing service do it for you.

JUMP STARTING (12V BATTERY)

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH to you or bystanders, always follow these precautions when working near or handling the battery:

Always read and follow instructions carefully when handling a battery. Wear eye protection designed to protect the eyes from acid splashes. Keep all flames, sparks, or smoking materials away from the battery.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued) Hydrogen is always present in battery cells, is highly combustible, and may explode if ignit- ed. Keep batteries out of reach of children.

Batteries contain sulfu- ric acid which is highly corrosive. Do not allow acid to contact your eyes, skin or clothing.

If acid gets into your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get imme- diate medical attention. If acid gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the area. If you feel pain or a burning sensation, get med- ical attention immediately.

(Continued)

(Continued) When lifting a plastic-cased

battery, excessive pressure on the case may cause battery acid to leak. Lift with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners.

Do not attempt to jump start your vehicle if your battery is frozen.

NEVER attempt to recharge the battery when the vehicle's battery cables are connected to the battery.

The electrical ignition switch works with high voltage. NEVER touch these compo- nents with the " " indicator ON or when the POWER but- ton is in the ON position.

6-5

W hat to do in an em

ergency

6

Information An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulations.

To prevent damage to your vehi- cle: Only use a 12-volt power supply

(battery or jumper system) to jump start your vehicle.

Do not attempt to jump start your vehicle by push-starting.

Jump starting procedure 1. Position the vehicles close enough

that the jumper cables will reach, but do not allow the vehicles to touch.

2. Avoid fans or any moving parts in the motor compartment at all times, even when the vehicles are turned off.

3. Turn off all electrical devices such as radios, lights, air conditioning, etc. Put the vehicles in P (Park) and set the parking brakes. Turn both vehicles OFF.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact sequence shown in the illus- tration. First connect one jumper cable to the red, positive (+) jumper terminal of your vehicle (1).

5. Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the red, positive (+) battery/jumper terminal of the assisting vehicle (2).

6. Connect the second jumper cable to the black, negative (-) battery/ chassis ground of the assisting vehicle (3).

NOTICE

i

Pb

1VQA4001

6-6

What to do in an emergency

7. Connect the other end of the sec- ond jumper cable to the black, negative (-) chassis ground of your vehicle (4). Do not allow the jumper cables to contact anything except the cor- rect battery or jumper terminals or the correct ground. Do not lean over the battery when making connections.

8. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run at approxi- mately 2,000 rpm for a few min- utes. Then start your vehicle.

9. After your vehicle starts allow it to operate at least 30 minutes with- out shutting it down, this will help charge back the 12V battery.

If your vehicle will not start after a few attempts, it probably requires servicing. In this event please seek qualified assistance. If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent, have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Disconnect the jumper cables in the exact reverse order you connected them: 1. Disconnect the jumper cable from

the black, negative (-) chassis ground of your vehicle (4).

2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the black, neg- ative (-) battery/chassis ground of the assisting vehicle (3).

3. Disconnect the second jumper cable from the red, positive (+) battery/jumper terminal of the assisting vehicle (2).

4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the red, positive (+) jumper terminal of your vehicle (1).

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

2. Shift to P (Park) and set the park- ing brake. If the air conditioning is on, turn it off.

3. If coolant is running out under the vehicle or steam is coming out from the hood, stop the vehicle. Do not open the hood until the coolant has stopped running or the steaming has stopped. If there is no visible loss of coolant and no steam, leave the vehicle running and check to be sure the vehicle cooling fan is operating. If the fan is not running, turn the vehicle off.

IF THE VEHICLE OVERHEATS

6-7

W hat to do in an em

ergency

6

4. Check for coolant leaking from the radiator, hoses or under the vehi- cle. (If the air conditioning had been in use, it is normal for cold water to be draining from it when you stop.)

5. If coolant is leaking out, stop the vehicle immediately and call the nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

6. If you cannot find the cause of the overheating, wait until the radiator temperature has returned to nor- mal. Then, if coolant has been lost, carefully add coolant to the reservoir to bring the fluid level in the reservoir up to the halfway mark.

7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for further signs of overheat- ing. If overheating happens again, call an authorized HYUNDAI deal- er for assistance.

While the vehicle is running, keep hands, clothing and tools away from the mov- ing parts such as the cooling fan to prevent serious injury.

WARNING

Serious loss of coolant indi- cates a leak in the cooling sys- tem and should be checked as soon as possible by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

Your vehicle is equipped with a pres- surized coolant reserve tank. NEVER remove the coolant

reserve tank cap or the radiator drain plug while the radiator is HOT. Hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure, causing serious injury. Turn the vehicle off and wait until the vehicle cools down. Use extreme care when remov- ing the coolant reserve tank cap. Wrap a towel or thick rag around it, and turn it counter- clockwise slowly to release some of the pressure from the system. Step back while the pressure is released. When you are sure all the pres- sure has been released, contin- ue turning the cap counter- clockwise to remove it.

WARNING

6-8

What to do in an emergency

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

(1) Low Tire Pressure / TPMS Malfunction Indicator Lamp

(2) Low Tire Pressure / Tire Pressure Monitor / TPMS Malfunction Display (shown on the cluster LCD dis- play)

Check Tire Pressure

You can check the tire pressure in the Assist mode on the cluster. Refer to the "LCD Display Mode" section in chapter 3.

Tire pressure is displayed after a few minutes of driving after initial vehicle start up.

If tire pressure is not displayed when the vehicle is stopped, "Drive to display" message will appear. After driving, check the tire pres- sure.

The displayed tire pressure values may differ from those measured with a tire pressure gauge.

You can change the tire pressure unit in the User Settings mode on the cluster. - psi, kpa, bar (Refer to the "User

Settings Mode" section in chapter 3).

OAEE066012

OAEE046138N

OAEE046115N

6-9

W hat to do in an em

ergency

6

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Each tire, including the spare (if pro- vided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi- cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac- ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres- sure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pres- sure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi- cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi- ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte- nance, and it is the drivers responsi- bility to maintain correct tire pres- sure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumina- tion of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal- function indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximate- ly one minute and then remain con- tinuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehi- cle start-ups as long as the malfunc- tion exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pres- sure as intended. TPMS malfunc- tions may occur for a variety of rea- sons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter- nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function proper- ly.

Over-inflation or under-inflation can reduce tire life, adversely affect vehicle handling, and lead to sudden tire failure that may cause loss of vehicle con- trol resulting in an accident.

WARNING

6-10

What to do in an emergency

If any of the below happens, have the system checked by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer. 1. The Low Tire Pressure TPMS

Malfunction Indicator does not illuminate for 3 seconds when the POWER button is placed to the ON position or vehicle is ON ( indicator ON).

2. The TPMS Malfunction Indicator remains illuminated after blink- ing for approximately 1 minute.

3. The Low Tire Pressure LCD dis- play remains illuminated

Low Tire Pressure Telltale

Low Tire Pressure LCD Display with Position Indicator

When the tire pressure monitoring system warning indicators are illumi- nated and the warning message is displayed on the cluster LCD display, one or more of your tires is signifi- cantly under-inflated. The LCD posi- tion indicator will indicate which tire is significantly under-inflated by illu- minating the corresponding position light.

If any of your tire pressures are indi- cated as being low, immediately reduce your speed, avoid hard cor- nering, and anticipate increased stopping distances. You should stop and check your tires as soon as pos- sible. Inflate the tires to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehi- cles placard or tire inflation pressure label located on the driver's side cen- ter pillar outer panel. If you cannot reach a service station or if the tire cannot hold the newly added air, replace the low pressure tire with the spare tire. The Low Tire Pressure LCD position indicator will remain on and the TPMS Malfunction Indicator may blink for one minute and then remain illuminated until you have the low pressure tire repaired and replaced on the vehicle.

NOTICE

OAEE046115N

6-11

W hat to do in an em

ergency

6

TPMS Malfunction Indicator

The TPMS Malfunction Indicator will illuminate after it blinks for approxi- mately one minute when there is a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System. Have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

If there is a malfunction with the TPMS, the individual tire pres- sures in the cluster LCD display will not be available. Have the sys- tem checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi- ble.

NOTICE

In winter or cold weather, the Low Tire Pressure Telltale may be illuminated if the tire pres- sure was adjusted to the recom- mended tire inflation pressure in warm weather. It does not mean your TPMS is malfunc- tioning because the decreased temperature leads to a propor- tional lowering of tire pressure. When you drive your vehicle from a warm area to a cold area or from a cold area to a warm area, or the outside temperature is greatly higher or lower, you should check the tire inflation pressure and adjust the tires to the recommended tire inflation pressure.

CAUTION

Low pressure damage

Significantly low tire pressure makes the vehicle unstable and can contribute to loss of vehicle control and increased braking distances. Continued driving on low pres- sure tires can cause the tires to overheat and fail.

WARNING

6-12

What to do in an emergency

The TPMS Malfunction Indicator may illuminate after blinking for one minute if the vehicle is near electric power supply cables or radio transmitters such as police stations, government and public offices, broadcasting stations, military installations, airports, transmitting towers, etc. Additionally, the TPMS Malfunction Indicator may illuminate if snow chains are used or electronic devices such as computers, charg- ers, remote starters, navigation, etc. This may interfere with normal operation of the TPMS.

Changing a Tire with TPMS If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire Pressure and LCD position indicator will come on. Have the flat tire repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible or replace the flat tire with the spare tire.

Once the original tire equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sensor is reinflated to the recommended pres- sure and reinstalled on the vehicle, the Low Tire Pressure LCD position indicator and TPMS Malfunction Indicator will go off within a few min- utes of driving. If the indicators do not disappear after a few minutes, please visit an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. Each wheel is equipped with a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind the valve stem. You must use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec- ommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

Never use a puncture-repairing agent not approved by HYUNDAI dealer to repair and/or inflate a low pressure tire. Tire sealant not approved by HYUNDAI deal- er may damage the tire pressure sensor.

CAUTION

6-13

W hat to do in an em

ergency

6

A cold tire means the vehicle has been sitting for 3 hours and driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3 hour period. Allow the tire to cool before measur- ing the inflation pressure. Always be sure the tire is cold before inflating to the recommended pressure.

Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following three conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter- ference received, including interfer- ence that may cause undesired operation.

3. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

i

The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tire dam- age caused by external fac- tors such as nails or road debris.

If you feel any vehicle instabil- ity, immediately take your foot off the accelerator, apply the brakes gradually with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.

WARNING

Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) components may interfere with the system's ability to warn the driver of low tire pressure con- ditions and/or TPMS malfunc- tions. Tampering with, modify- ing, or disabling the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) components may void the warranty for that portion of the vehicle.

WARNING

6-14

What to do in an emergency

With Tire Mobility Kit (TMK)

For safe operation, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual before use. (1) Compressor (2) Sealant bottle The Tire Mobility Kit is placed under the luggage tray. The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary fix to the tire and the tire should be inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

Introduction

With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay mobile even after experiencing a tire puncture. The compressor and sealing com- pound system effectively and com- fortably seals most punctures in a passenger car tire caused by nails or similar objects and reinflates the tire. After you ensure that the tire is prop- erly sealed you can drive cautiously on the tire (distance up to 120 miles (200 km)) at a max. speed of (50mph (80 km/h)) in order to reach a service station or tire dealer for the tire replacement.

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

OAEE066001 OAEE066002

One sealant bottle for one tire

When two or more tires are flat, do not use the tire mobility kit because the supported one sealant of Tire Mobility Kit is only used for one flat tire.

CAUTION

Tire side wall

Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit to repair punctures in the tire side walls. This can result in an accident due to tire failure.

WARNING

Temporary fix

Have your tire repaired as soon as possible. The tire may lose air pressure at any time after inflating with the Tire Mobility Kit.

WARNING

6-15

W hat to do in an em

ergency

6

It is possible that some tires, espe- cially with larger punctures or dam- age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed completely. Air pressure loss in the tire may adversely affect tire performance. For this reason, you should avoid abrupt steering or other driving maneuvers, especially if the vehicle is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in use. The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed or intended as a permanent tire repair method and is to be used for one tire only. This instruction shows you step by step how to temporarily seal the puncture simply and reliably. Read the section "Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit".

Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit Park your car at the side of the

road so that you can work with the Tire Mobility Kit away from moving traffic.

To be sure your vehicle will not move, even when you're on fairly level ground, always set your park- ing brake.

Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for sealing/inflation passenger car tires. Only punctured areas located with- in the tread region of the tire can be sealed using the tire mobility kit.

Do not use on motorcycles, bicy- cles or any other type of tires.

When the tire and wheel are dam- aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit for your safety.

Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not be effective for tire damage larger than approximately 0.24 inch (6 mm). Please contact the nearest HYUNDAI dealership if the tire cannot be made roadworthy with the Tire Mobility Kit.

Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit, if a flat tire or an under-inflated tire is further severely damaged by being continuously driven.

Do not remove any foreign objects such as nails or screws that have penetrated the tire.

Provided the car is outdoors, leave the vehicle ON ( indicator ON). Otherwise operating the compres- sor may eventually drain the car battery.

Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit unattended while it is being used.

Do not leave the compressor run- ning for more than 10 minutes at a time or it may overheat.

Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if the ambient temperature is below -22F (-30C).

In case of skin contact with the sealant, wash the area thoroughly with plenty of water. If the irritation persists, seek medical attention.

In case of eye contact with the sealant, flush your eyes for at least 15 minutes. If the irritation persists, seek medical attention.

In case of swallowing the sealant, rinse the mouth and drink plenty of water. However, never give any- thing to an unconscious person and seek medical attention imme- diately.

Long time exposure to the sealant may cause damage to bodily tissue such as kidney, etc.

6-16

What to do in an emergency

0. Speed restriction label 1. Sealant bottle and label with

speed restriction 2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to

wheel 3. Connectors and cable for power

outlet direct connection

4. Holder for the sealant bottle 5. Compressor 6. ON/OFF switch 7. Pressure gauge for displaying the

tire inflation pressure 8. Button for reducing tire inflation

pressure

Connectors, cable and connection hose are stored in the compressor housing.

Strictly follow the specified sequence, otherwise the sealant may escape under high pressure.

Components of the Tire Mobility Kit

OGDE064102

Do not use the tire sealant after the sealant has expired (i.e. pasted the expiration date on the sealant container). This can increase the risk of tire failure.

WARNING

Keep out of reach of children. Avoid contact with eyes. Do not swallow.

WARNING

6-17

W hat to do in an em

ergency

6

Using the Tire Mobility Kit

1. Detach the speed restriction label from the sealant bottle, and place it in a highly visible place inside the vehicle such as on the steer- ing wheel to remind the driver not to drive too fast.

2. Shake the sealant bottle (1). 3. Screw the filling hose (2) onto the connector of the sealant bottle.

4. Ensure that the ON/OFF switch on the compressor is in the OFF posi- tion.

OLMF064103

OAEE066003

OAEE066004

6-18

What to do in an emergency

5. Unscrew the valve cap from the valve of the flat tire and screw the filling hose (2) of the sealant bottle onto the valve.

6. Insert the sealant bottle into the housing (4) of the compressor so that the bottle is upright.

7. Ensure that the compressor is switched off, position "0".

Securely install the sealant fill- ing hose to the valve. If not, sealant may flow backward, possibly clogging the filling hose.

CAUTION

OAEE066006

OAEE066007OAEE066005

6-19

W hat to do in an em

ergency

6

8. Plug the compressor power cord (3) into the vehicle power outlet.

9. With the vehicle ON ( indica- tor ON), switch on the compressor and let it run for approximately 5~7 minutes to fill the sealant up to proper pressure. (refer to the Tire and Wheels, chapter 8). The inflation pressure of the tire after filling is unimportant and will be checked/corrected later. Be careful not to overinflate the tire and stay away from the tire when filling it.

10. Switch off the compressor. 11. Detach the hoses from the

sealant bottle connector and from the tire valve.

Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor- age location in the vehicle.

Distributing the sealant

12. Immediately drive approximately 4~6miles (7~10km or about 10 minutes) to evenly distribute the sealant in the tire.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). If possible, do not fall below a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).

Do not attempt to drive your vehicle if the tire pressure is below 29 psi (200 kpa). This could result in an accident due to sudden tire failure.

CAUTION

OAEE066008

OLMF064106

6-20

What to do in an emergency

While driving, if you experience any unusual vibration, ride disturbance or noise, reduce your speed and drive with caution until you can safely pull off of the side of the road. Call for road side service or towing. When you use the Tire Mobility Kit, the tire pressure sensors and wheel may be damaged by sealant, have it inspected at an authorized dealer.

Checking the tire inflation pressure 1. After driving approximately

4~6miles (7~10km or about 10 minutes), stop at a safe location.

2. Connect the filling hose (2) of the compressor directly to the tire valve.

3. Plug the compressor power cord into the vehicle power outlet.

4. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the recommended tire inflation. With the vehicle ON ( indica- tor ON) proceed as follows. - To increase the inflation pressure:

Switch on the compressor, posi- tion to "I". To check the current inflation pressure setting, briefly switch off the compressor.

- To reduce the inflation pressure:

Press the button (8) on the com- pressor.

Information The pressure gauge may show higher than actual reading when the com- pressor is running. To get an accurate tire pressure, the compressor needs to be turned off.

Information When reinstalling the repaired or replaced tire and wheel on the vehicle, tighten the wheel lug nut to 11~13 kgfm (79~94 lbfft).

i

i

OAEE066005

When you use the Tire Mobility Kit including sealant not approved by HYUNDAI, the tire pressure sensors may be dam- aged by sealant. The sealant on the tire pressure sensor and wheel should be removed when you replace the tire with a new one and inspect the tire pres- sure sensors at an authorized dealer.

CAUTION

6-21

W hat to do in an em

ergency

6

Towing service

If emergency towing is necessary, we recommend having it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial tow-truck service. Proper lifting and towing procedures are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies or flatbed is recommended.

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground (without dollies) and the front wheels off the ground. If any of the loaded wheels or suspension components are damaged or the vehicle is being towed with the front wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly under the front wheels. When being towed by a commercial tow truck and wheel dollies are not used, the front of the vehicle should always be lifted, not the rear.

TOWING

OAE066018

dolly

dolly

OAEE066016

OAE066019

Do not tow the vehicle with the front wheels on the ground as this may cause damage to the vehicle.

Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Use a wheel lift or flatbed equipment.

CAUTION

6-22

What to do in an emergency

When towing your vehicle in an emergency without wheel dollies: 1. While depressing the brake pedal

shift to the N (Neutral) position and turn the vehicle off. The POWER button will be in the ACC position.

2. Release the parking brake.

Failure to shift to N (Neutral) may cause internal damage to the vehi- cle.

Removable Towing Hook

1. Open the tailgate, and remove the towing hook from the tool case.

2. Remove the hole cover pressing the lower part of the cover on the front or rear bumper.

3. Install the towing hook by turning it clockwise into the hole until it is fully secured.

4. Remove the towing hook and install the cover after use.

NOTICE

If your vehicle is equipped with a rollover sensor, place the POWER button in the OFF or ACC position when the vehicle is being towed. The side impact and curtain air bag may deploy if the sensor detects the situa- tion as a rollover.

WARNING

OAEE066010N

OAEE066011N

OAEE066013N

Front

Rear

6-23

W hat to do in an em

ergency

6

Emergency Towing If towing is necessary, we recom- mend you have it done by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer or a commer- cial tow truck service. If towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency tow- ing hook at the front (or rear) of the vehicle. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle with a cable or chain. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes. Towing in this manner may be done only on hard-surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the wheels, axles, power train, steering and brakes must all be in good condition.

Always follow these emergency tow- ing precautions: While depressing the brake pedal

shift to the N (Neutral) position and turn the vehicle off. The POWER button will be in the ACC position.

Release the parking brake. Depress the brake pedal with more

force than normal since you will have reduced braking perform- ance.

More steering effort will be required because the power steer- ing system will be disabled.

Use a vehicle heavier than your own to tow your vehicle.

The drivers of both vehicles should communicate with each other fre- quently.

Before emergency towing, check that the hook is not broken or dam- aged.

Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the hook.

Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and even force.

Use a towing cable or chain less than 16 feet (5 m) long. Attach a white or red cloth (about 12 inch (30 cm) wide) in the middle of the cable or chain for easy visibility.

Drive carefully so the towing cable or chain remains tight during towing.

Before towing, check the reduction gear for fluid leaks under your vehi- cle. If the reduction gear is leaking, flatbed equipment or a towing dolly must be used.

OAEE066017

6-24

What to do in an emergency

To avoid damage to your vehicle and vehicle components when towing: Always pull straight ahead

when using the towing hooks. Do not pull from the side or at a vertical angle.

Do not use the towing hooks to pull a vehicle out of mud, sand or other conditions from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power.

Limit the vehicle speed to 10 mph (15 km/h) and drive less than 1 mile (1.5 km) when towing to avoid serious dam- age to the reduction gear.

CAUTION

7

M aintenance

Maintenance

Motor Compartment ..............................................7-3 Maintenance Services ...........................................7-4

Owner's Responsibility.....................................................7-4 Owner Maintenance Precautions..................................7-4

Owner Maintenance ..............................................7-5 Owner Maintenance Schedule .......................................7-6

Scheduled Maintenance Services........................7-7 Normal Maintenance Schedule ......................................7-8 Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions ........7-10

Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items..7-11 Coolant...................................................................7-12

Checking the Coolant Level ..........................................7-12 Changing Coolant ............................................................7-15

Brake Fluid............................................................7-16 Checking the Brake Fluid Level...................................7-16

Washer Fluid.........................................................7-17 Checking the Washer Fluid Level................................7-17

Climate Control Air Filter ....................................7-18 Filter Inspection...............................................................7-18

Wiper Blades.........................................................7-20 Blade Inspection ..............................................................7-20 Blade Replacement .........................................................7-20

12v Battery ...........................................................7-23 For Best Battery Service ..............................................7-24 Battery Recharging ........................................................7-24 Reset Features.................................................................7-25

Tires and Wheels .................................................7-26 Tire Care............................................................................7-26 Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures...........7-27 Check Tire Inflation Pressure ......................................7-28 Tire Rotation.....................................................................7-29 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............................7-30 Tire Replacement ............................................................7-30 Wheel Replacement ........................................................7-31 Tire Traction .....................................................................7-31 Tire Maintenance ............................................................7-31 Tire Sidewall Labeling ....................................................7-31 Tire Terminology and Definitions................................7-35 All Season Tires...............................................................7-39 Summer Tires ...................................................................7-39 Snow Tires ........................................................................7-39 Radial-Ply Tires ...............................................................7-39 Low Aspect Ratio Tires..................................................7-40

7

Fuses......................................................................7-42 Instrument Panel Fuse Replacement..........................7-43 Motor Compartment Panel Fuse Replacement........7-44 Fuse/Relay Panel Description......................................7-46

Light Bulbs ............................................................7-55 Headlamp, Parking Lamp, Turn Signal Lamp and Side Marker ......................................................................7-56 Daytime Running Light (DRL).......................................7-60 Side Repeater Lamp Replacement ..............................7-61 Rear Combination Light Bulb Replacement ..............7-61 High Mounted Stop Light Replacement ....................7-62 License Plate Light Bulb Replacement ......................7-63 Interior Light Bulb Replacement .................................7-63

Appearance Care..................................................7-65 Exterior Care ....................................................................7-65 Interior Care .....................................................................7-70

California Perchlorate Notice.............................7-73

7-3

7

M aintenance

MOTOR COMPARTMENT

1. Coolant reservoir

2. Brake fluid reservoir

3. Fuse box

4. Battery (12 volt)

5. Coolant cap

6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

OAEE076001N

The actual motor compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

7-4

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE SERVICES You should exercise the utmost care to prevent damage to your vehicle and injury to yourself whenever per- forming any maintenance or inspec- tion procedures. We recommend you have your vehi- cle maintained and repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. An authorized HYUNDAI dealer meets HYUNDAI's high service quality standards and receives technical support from HYUNDAI in order to provide you with a high level of serv- ice satisfaction.

Owner's Responsibility Maintenance service and record retention are the owner's responsibil- ity. You should retain documents that show proper maintenance has been performed on your vehicle in accor- dance with the scheduled mainte- nance service charts shown on the following pages. You need this infor- mation to establish your compliance with the servicing and maintenance requirements of your vehicle war- ranties.

Detailed warranty information is pro- vided in your Owner's Handbook & Warranty Information booklet. Repairs and adjustments required as a result of improper maintenance or a lack of required maintenance are not covered.

Owner Maintenance Precautions Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi- cient servicing may result in opera- tional problems with your vehicle that could lead to vehicle damage, an accident, or personal injury. This chapter provides instructions only for the maintenance items that are easy to perform. Several procedures can be done only by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer with special tools. Your vehicle should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safety or durability of your vehicle and may, in addition, violate condi- tions of the limited warranties cover- ing the vehicle.

Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal or state agencies.

Improper owner maintenance dur- ing the warranty period may affect warranty coverage. For details, read the separate Owner's Handbook & Warranty Information booklet provided with the vehicle. If you're unsure about any service or maintenance procedure, have it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

7-5

7

M aintenance

OWNER MAINTENANCE The following lists are vehicle checks and inspections that should be per- formed by the owner or an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer at the frequen- cies indicated to help ensure safe, dependable operation of your vehi- cle. Any adverse conditions should be brought to the attention of your deal- er as soon as possible. These Owner Maintenance vehicle checks are generally not covered by warranties and you may be charged for labor, parts and lubricants used.

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. If you lack sufficient knowledge and experience or the proper tools and equipment to do the work, have it done by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer. ALWAYS follow these precau- tions for performing mainte- nance work: Park your vehicle on level

ground, shift to the P (Park) position, apply the parking brake, and place the POWER button in the OFF position.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued) Block the tires (front and

back) to prevent the vehicle from moving. Remove loose clothing or jew- elry that can become entan- gled in moving parts.

Keep flames, sparks, or smok- ing materials away from the battery related parts.

7-6

Maintenance

Owner Maintenance Schedule When you stop for fuel: Check coolant level in the coolant

reservoir. Check the windshield washer fluid

level. Check for low or under-inflated

tires.

While operating your vehicle: Check for vibrations in the steering

wheel. Notice if there is any increased steering effort or loose- ness in the steering wheel, or change in its straight-ahead posi- tion.

Notice if your vehicle constantly turns slightly or "pulls" to one side when traveling on smooth, level road.

When stopping, listen and check for unusual sounds, pulling to one side, increased brake pedal travel or "hard-to-push" brake pedal.

If any slipping or changes in the operation of your reduction gear occurs, check the reduction gear fluid level.

Check the reduction gear P (Park) function.

Check the parking brake. Check for fluid leaks under your

vehicle (water dripping from the air conditioning system during or after use is normal).

At least monthly: Check coolant level in the coolant

reservoir. Check the operation of all exterior

lights, including the brake lights, turn signals and hazard warning flashers.

Check the inflation pressures of all tires including the spare for tires that are worn, show uneven wear, or are damaged.

Check for loose wheel lug nuts.Be careful when checking your coolant level when the parts in the motor compartment are hot. This may result in coolant being blown out of the opening and cause serious burns and other injuries.

WARNING

7-7

7

M aintenance

At least twice a year: (i.e., every Spring and Fall) Check radiator, heater and air con-

ditioning hoses for leaks or dam- age.

Check windshield washer spray and wiper operation. Clean wiper blades with clean cloth dampened with washer fluid.

Check headlamp alignment. Check the seat belts for wear and

function.

At least once a year: Clean body and door drain holes. Lubricate door hinges and hood

hinges. Lubricate door and hood locks and

latches. Lubricate door rubber weather

strips. Lubricate door checker. Check the air conditioning system. Inspect and lubricate reduction

gear linkage and controls. Clean the battery and terminals. Check the brake fluid level.

Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule if the vehicle is usually operated where none of the following conditions apply. If any of the follow- ing conditions apply, you must follow the Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions. Repeated short distance driving. Driving in dusty conditions or

sandy areas. Extensive use of brakes. Driving in areas where salt or other

corrosive materials are used. Driving on rough or muddy roads. Driving in mountainous areas. Extended periods of low speed

operation. Driving for a prolonged period in

cold temperatures and/or extreme- ly humid climates.

More than 50% driving in heavy city traffic during hot weather above 90F (32C).

For additional information or assis- tance see your authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICES

7-8

Maintenance

Normal Maintenance Schedule

Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64 68 72 76 80 84 88 92 96

Miles1,000 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120

Km1,000 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128 136 144 152 160 168 176 184 192

Inspect cooling system I I I I I I I I

Rotate Tires (Includes Tire Pressure and Tread Wear Inspection)

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Replace Climate Control Air Filter (For Evaporator and Blower Unit)

R R R R R R R R

Replace coolant *1 *2

(1st Replace 120,000 miles or 96 months) (Thereafter, Replace 30,000 miles / 24 months)

R

Inspect 12V battery condition I I I I I I I I

Inspect brake lines, hoses, and connections

I I I I I I I I

Inspect disc brakes and pads I I I I I I I I

Maintenance Intervals

Maintenance Item

I : Inspect (Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean, or replace) R : Replace or change. *1 : When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at

the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or vehicle damage. *2 : For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.

7-9

7

M aintenance

Normal Maintenance Schedule (Cont.)

I : Inspect (Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean, or replace) R : Replace or change.

Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64 68 72 76 80 84 88 92 96

Miles1,000 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120

Km1,000 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128 136 144 152 160 168 176 184 192

Inspect steering gear rack, linkage, and boots

I I I I I I I I

Inspect drive shafts and boots I I I I I I I I

Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance

I I I I I I I I

Inspect reduction gear fluid I I I

Inspect brake pedal I I I I I I I I

Inspect brake fluid I I I I I I I I

Maintenance Intervals

Maintenance Item

7-10

Maintenance

Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals. R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

Severe Driving Conditions A-Repeatedly driving short distances of less than 5 miles

(8 km) in normal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km) in freezing temperature

B-Extensive low speed driving for long distances C-Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-

spread roads D-Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in

very cold weather

E-Driving in sandy areas F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90F (32C) G- Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road H- Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack I -Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle

towing J - Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h) K- Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE

OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

DRIVING CONDITION

Reduction gear fluid R Every 75,000 miles (120,000 km) C, E, F, G, I

Brake / pads, calipers I More frequently C, D, G, H

Steering gear box, linkage & boots / lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint

I More frequently C, D, E, F, G, H, I

Drive shafts and boots I More frequently C, D, E, F, G, H, I

Climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)

R More frequently C, E

7-11

7

M aintenance

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS Cooling System Check cooling system components, such as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged parts.

Coolant The coolant should be changed at the intervals specified in the mainte- nance schedule.

Reduction Gear Fluid Inspect the reduction gear fluid according to the maintenance sched- ule.

Brake Hoses and Lines Visually check for proper installation, chafing, cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replace any deteriorat- ed or damaged parts immediately.

Brake Fluid Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. The level should be between the MIN and the MAX marks on the side of the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake fluid con- forming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifi- cation.

Brake Discs, Pads, Calipers and Rotors Check the pads for excessive wear, discs for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.

Suspension Mounting Bolts Check the suspension connections for looseness or damage. Retighten to the specified torque.

Steering Gear Box, Linkage & Boots/Lower Arm Ball Joint With the vehicle stopped and the vehicle off, check for excessive free- play in the steering wheel. Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration, cracks, or damage. Replace any damaged parts.

Drive Shafts and Boots Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace any damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the grease.

Air Conditioning Refrigerant Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and dam- age.

7-12

Maintenance

COOLANT The high-pressure cooling system has a reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is filled at the factory. Check the antifreeze protection and coolant level at least once a year, at the beginning of the winter season and before traveling to a colder cli- mate.

Checking the Coolant Level

Check the condition and connections of all cooling system hoses and heater hoses. Replace any swollen or deteriorated hoses. The coolant level should be filled between the MAX and the MIN marks on the side of the coolant reservoir when the parts in the motor compartment is cool. If the coolant level is low, add enough distilled (deionized) water to bring the level to the MAX mark, but do not overfill. If frequent additions are required, you see an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for a cooling sys- tem inspection.

Recommended coolant When adding coolant, use only

distilled (deionized) water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory.

An improper coolant mixture can result in severe malfunction or electric vehicle damage.

Do not use alcohol or methanol coolant or mix them with the spec- ified coolant.

Do not use a solution that contains more than 60% antifreeze or less than 35% antifreeze, which would reduce the effectiveness of the solution.

OAEE076002L

7-13

7

M aintenance

For mixing percentage, refer to the following table:

Information If in doubt about the mix ratio, a 50% water and 50% antifreeze mix is the easiest to mix together as it will be the same quantity of each. It is suitable to use for most temperature ranges of - 31F and higher.

i

Ambient Temperature

Mixture Percentage (volume)

Antifreeze Water 5F (-15C) 35 65

-13F (-25C) 40 60

-31F (-35C) 50 50

-49F (-45C) 60 40

Never remove the coolant cap or the drain plug while the radiator is hot. Hot coolant and steam

may blow out under pressure, causing serious injury.

(Continued)

WARNING

OAEE076002

(Continued) Turn the vehicle off and wait until the parts in the motor com- partment cools down. Use extreme care when removing the coolant cap. Wrap a thick towel around it, and turn it counterclockwise slowly to the first stop. Step back while the pressure is released from the cooling system. When you are sure all the pressure has been released, press down on the cap, using a thick towel, and continue turning counterclock- wise to remove it.

7-14

Maintenance

The electric motor for the cooling fan is controlled by coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure and vehicle speed. As the coolant temperature decreases, the electric motor will automatically shut off. This is a nor- mal condition.

The electric motor for the cooling fan may continue to operate or start up when the vehicle is not running

and can cause serious injury. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the rotating fan blades of the cooling fan.

WARNING

Make sure the coolant cap is properly closed after refilling coolant.

1. Check if the coolant cap label is straight In front.

(Continued)

WARNING

OTL075062

Motor compartment front view

(Continued)

2. Make sure that the tiny pro- trusions inside the coolant cap is securely interlocked.

OAEE076044L

Motor compartment rear view

7-15

7

M aintenance

Changing Coolant Have coolant changed by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer according to the Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of this chapter.

To prevent damage to parts in the motor compartment, put a thick towel around the coolant cap before refilling the coolant to pre- vent the coolant from overflowing into parts in the motor compart- ment.

NOTICE

Do not use coolant or antifreeze in the washer fluid reservoir. Coolant can severely obscure visibility when sprayed on the windshield and may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. Coolant may also cause dam- age to paint and body trim.

WARNING

7-16

Maintenance

BRAKE FLUID Checking the Brake Fluid Level

Check the fluid level in the reservoir periodically. The fluid level should be between MAX and MIN marks on the side of the reservoir. Before removing the reservoir cap and adding brake fluid, clean the area around the reservoir cap thor- oughly to prevent brake fluid contam- ination.

If the level is low, add the specified brake fluid to the MAX level.The level will fall with accumulated mileage. This is a normal condition associated with the wear of the brake linings. If the fluid level is excessively low, have the brake system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not allow brake fluid to con- tact the vehicles body paint, as paint damage will result.

Brake fluid, which has been exposed to open air for an extended time should NEVER be used as its quality cannot be guaranteed. It should be dis- posed of properly.

Do not use the wrong kind of brake fluid. A few drops of min- eral based oil, such as engine oil, in your brake system can damage brake system parts.

Information Use only the specified brake fluid (refer to "Recommended Lubricants and Capacities" in chapter 8).

i

NOTICE

If the brake system requires fre- quent additions of fluid this could indicate a leak in the brake system. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

Do not allow brake fluid to come in contact with your eyes. If brake fluid comes in contact with your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention.

WARNING

OAEE076003

7-17

7

M aintenance

WASHER FLUID Checking the Washer Fluid Level

Check the fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces- sary. Plain water may be used if washer fluid is not available. However, use washer solvent with antifreeze characteristics in cold cli- mates to prevent freezing.

OAEE076004

To prevent serious injury or death, take the following safety precautions when using washer fluid: Do not use coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid reservoir. Coolant can severely obscure visibility when sprayed on the windshield and may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident or damage to paint and body trim.

Do not allow sparks or flame to contact the washer fluid or the washer fluid reservoir. Washer fluid may contain alcohol and can be flammable.

Do not drink washer fluid and avoid contact with skin.Washer fluid is harmful to humans and animals.

Keep washer fluid away from children and animals.

WARNING

7-18

Maintenance

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER Filter Inspection The climate control air filter should be replaced according to the Maintenance Schedule. If the vehi- cle is operated in severely air-pollut- ed cities or on dusty rough roads for a long period, it should be inspected more frequently and replaced earlier. When you replace the climate control air filter, replace it performing the fol- lowing procedure, and be careful to avoid damaging other components.

1. With the glove box open, remove the stoppers on both sides to allow the glove box to hang freely on the hinges.

2. Remove the support rod (1). OAEE076005OAEE076006

7-19

7

M aintenance

3. Press and hold the lock (1) on both sides of the cover.

4. Pull out (2) the cover.

5. Replace the climate control air fil- ter.

6. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

Install a new climate control air fil- ter in the correct direction with the arrow symbol () facing down- wards. Otherwise, the climate con- trol effects may decrease, possi- bly with a noise.

NOTICE

OHG075041OAEE076029

7-20

Maintenance

WIPER BLADES Blade Inspection Contamination of either the wind- shield or the wiper blades with for- eign matter can reduce the effective- ness of the windshield wiper func- tionality. Common sources of con- tamination are insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments used by some commercial car washes. If the blades are not wiping properly, clean both the window and the blades with a clean cloth dampened with washer fluid.

To prevent damage to the wiper blades, arms or other compo- nents, do not: Use gasoline, kerosene, paint

thinner, or other solvents on or near them.

Attempt to move the wipers manually.

Use non-specified wiper blades.

Information Commercial hot waxes applied by automatic car washes have been known to make the windshield diffi- cult to clean.

Blade Replacement When the wipers no longer clean adequately, the blades may be worn or cracked, and require replacement.

To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manu- ally.

The use of a non-specified wiper blade could result in wiper mal- function and failure.

NOTICE

NOTICE

i

NOTICE

7-21

7

M aintenance

Type A

1. Raise the wiper arm and slightly rotate the wiper blade assembly to expose the plastic locking clip.

2. Press the clip (1) and slide the blade assembly downward (2).

3. Lift it off the arm. 4. Install the blade assembly in the

reverse order of removal. 5. Return the wiper arm on the wind-

shield.

Type B

1. Raise the wiper arm. OLF074017OLMB073020

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield, since it may chip or crack the windshield.

CAUTION

OLMB073021

OLMB073022

7-22

Maintenance

2. Lift up the wiper blade clip (1). Then lift up the wiper blade (2).

3. While pushing the lock (3), pull down the wiper blade (4).

4. Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm (5).

5. Install a new wiper blade assem- bly in the reverse order of removal.

6. Return the wiper arm on the wind- shield.

OAD075074L OAD075075L OAD075076L

To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace the wiper blade.

CAUTION

7-23

7

M aintenance

12V BATTERY

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH to you or bystanders, always follow these precautions when working near or handling the battery:

Always read and follow instructions carefully when handling a battery. Wear eye protection designed to protect the eyes from acid splashes. Keep all flames, sparks, or smoking materials away from the battery. Hydrogen is always pres- ent in battery cells, is highly combustible, and may explode if ignited. Keep batteries out of reach of children.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued) Batteries contain sulfu- ric acid which is highly corrosive. Do not allow acid to contact your eyes, skin or clothing.

If acid gets into your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get imme- diate medical attention. If acid gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the area. If you feel pain or a burning sensation, get med- ical attention immediately. When lifting a plastic-cased

battery, excessive pressure on the case may cause battery acid to leak. Lift with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners.

Do not attempt to jump start your vehicle if your battery is frozen.

(Continued)

(Continued) NEVER attempt to recharge

the battery when the vehicles battery cables are connected to the battery.

The electrical ignition system works with high voltage. NEVER touch these compo- nents with the vehicle ON ( indicator ON) or when the POWER button is in the ON position.

7-24

Maintenance

When you do not use the vehicle for a long time in a low tempera- ture area, disconnect the battery and keep it indoors.

Always charge the battery fully to prevent battery case damage in low temperature areas.

For Best Battery Service

Keep the battery securely mount- ed.

Keep the battery top clean and dry. Keep the terminals and connec-

tions clean, tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease.

Rinse any spilled acid from the bat- tery immediately with a solution of water and baking soda.

Battery Recharging

NOTICE

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects and reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash hands after handling.

WARNING

Always follow these instruc- tions when recharging your vehicle's battery to avoid the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from explosions or acid burns: Before performing mainte-

nance or recharging the bat- tery, turn off all accessories and place the POWER button to the OFF position.

Keep all flames, sparks, or smoking materials away from the battery.

Always work outdoors or in an area with plenty of ventilation.

Wear eye protection when checking the battery during charging.

The battery must be removed from the vehicle and placed in a well ventilated area.

(Continued)

WARNING

OAEE076007

7-25

7

M aintenance

By jump starting After a jump start from a good bat- tery, drive the vehicle for 20-30 min- utes before it is shutoff. The vehicle may not restart if you shut it off before the battery had a chance to adequately recharge. See "Jump Starting" in chapter 6 for more infor- mation on jump starting procedures.

Information An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health.

Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.

Reset Features Some items need to be reset after the battery has been discharged or the battery has been disconnected. See chapter 3 for: Power Windows Trip Computer Climate Control System Clock Audio System Sunroof Driver Position Memory System

i

(Continued) Watch the battery during

charging, and stop or reduce the charging rate if the battery cells begin boiling violently.

The negative battery cable must be removed first and installed last when the battery is disconnected. Disconnect the battery charger in the fol- lowing order: (1) Turn off the battery charg-

er main switch. (2) Unhook the negative

clamp from the negative battery terminal.

(3) Unhook the positive clamp from the positive battery terminal.

Always use a genuine HYUNDAI approved battery when you replace the battery.

7-26

Maintenance

TIRES AND WHEELS Tire Care For proper maintenance, safety, and maximum fuel economy, you must always maintain recommended tire inflation pressures and stay within the load limits and weight distribution recommended for your vehicle.

(Continued) Replace tires that are worn,

show uneven wear, or are dam- aged. Worn tires can cause loss of braking effectiveness, steering) control, or traction.

ALWAYS replace tires with the same size as each tire that was originally supplied with this vehicle. Using tires and wheels other than the recom- mended sizes could cause unusual handling characteris- tics, poor vehicle control, or negatively affect your vehi- cle's Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) resulting in a serious accident.

Tire failure may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. To reduce risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH, take the following precautions: Inspect your tires monthly for

proper inflation as well as wear and damage.

The recommended cold tire pressure for your vehicle can be found in this manual and on the tire label located on the dri- ver's side center pillar. Always use a tire pressure gauge to measure tire pressure. Tires with too much or too little pressure wear unevenly caus- ing poor handling.

Check the pressure of the spare every time you check the pressure of the other tires on your vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING

7-27

7

M aintenance

All specifications (sizes and pres- sures) can be found on a label attached to the drivers side center pillar.

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures All tire pressures (including the spare) should be checked when the tires are cold. "Cold tires" means the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than one mile (1.6 km). Warm tires normally exceed recom- mended cold tire pressures by 4 to 6 psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not release air from warm tires to adjust the pres- sure or the tires will be under-inflat- ed. For recommended inflation pres- sure, refer to "Tire and Wheels" in chapter 8.

Recommended pressures must be maintained for the best ride, vehicle handling, and minimum tire wear. Over-inflation or under-inflation can reduce tire life, adversely affect vehicle handling, and lead to sudden tire failure that could result in loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. Severe under-inflation can lead to severe heat build-up, causing blowouts, tread separation and other tire failures that can result in the loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. This risk is much higher on hot days and when driving for long peri- ods at high speeds.

WARNING

OAE086002L

7-28

Maintenance

Check Tire Inflation Pressure Check your tires, including the spare tire, once a month or more.

How to check Use a good quality tire pressure gauge to check tire pressure. You can not tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflat- ed when they are under-inflated. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gauge firm- ly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the tire and loading information label, no further adjust- ment is necessary. If the pressure is low, add air until you reach the rec- ommended pressure. Make sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If a valve cap is missing, install a new one as soon as possible.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If a valve cap is missing, install a new one as soon as possible.

Under-inflation results in excessive wear, poor handling and reduced fuel economy. Wheel deformation is also possible. Keep your tire pres- sures at the proper levels. If a tire frequently needs refilling, have it checked by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer.

Over-inflation produces a harsh ride, excessive wear at the center of the tire tread, and a greater possibility of damage from road hazards.

CAUTION

7-29

7

M aintenance

Tire Rotation To equalize tread wear, HYUNDAI recommends that the tires be rotated every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or sooner if irregular wear develops. During rotation, check the tires for correct balance. When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire pres- sure, improper wheel alignment, out- of-balance wheels, severe braking or severe cornering. Look for bumps or bulges in the tread or side of tire. Replace the tire if you find either of these conditions. Replace the tire if fabric or cord is visible. After rotation, be sure to bring the front and rear tire pressures to specification and check lug nut tightness (proper torque is 79~94 lbfft [11~13 kgfm]).

Disc brake pads should be inspected for wear whenever tires are rotated.

Information Tires that are asymmetrical or direc- tional can only be installed on the wheel in one direction. The outside and inside of an asymmetrical tire is not easily distinguishable. Pay careful attention to the markings on the side- walls of the tires, noting the "outside" marking and also the rotating direc- tion before installing them on the vehicle.

i

Do not use the compact spare tire for tire rotation.

Do not mix bias ply and radial ply tires under any circum- stances. This may cause unusual handling characteris- tics that may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

WARNING

ODH073802

Without a spare tire

7-30

Maintenance

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance. In most cases, you will not need to have your wheels aligned again. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced.

Improper wheel weights can dam- age your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use only approved wheel weights.

Tire Replacement

If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread. This shows there is less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Replace the tire when this happens. Do not wait for the band to appear across the entire tread before replac- ing the tire.

NOTICE

OLMB073027

Tread wear indicator To reduce the risk of DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY: Replace tires that are worn,

show uneven wear, or are damaged. Worn tires can cause loss of braking effec- tiveness, steering control, and traction.

Always replace tires with the same size as each tire that was originally supplied with this vehicle. Using tires and wheels other than the recom- mended sizes could cause unusual handling characteris- tics, poor vehicle control, or negatively affect your vehi- cle's Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) resulting in a serious accident.

(Continued)

WARNING

7-31

7

M aintenance

Wheel Replacement When replacing the metal wheels for any reason, make sure the new wheels are equivalent to the original factory units in diameter, rim width and offset.

Tire Traction Tire traction can be reduced if you drive on worn tires, tires that are improperly inflated or on slippery road surfaces. Tires should be replaced when tread wear indicators appear. To reduce the possibility of losing control, slow down whenever there is rain, snow or ice on the road.

Tire Maintenance In addition to proper inflation, correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tire wear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly, have your dealer check the wheel alignment. When you have new tires installed, make sure they are balanced. This will increase vehicle ride comfort and tire life. Additionally, a tire should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel.

Tire Sidewall Labeling This information identifies and describes the fundamental charac- teristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

(Continued) Tires degrade over time, even

when they are not being used. Regardless of the remaining tread, HYUNDAI recommends that tires be replaced after six (6) years of normal service.

When replacing tires (or wheels), it is recommended to replace the two front or two rear tires (or wheels) as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle's handling.

Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading con- ditions can accelerate the aging process. Failure to fol- low this warning may cause sudden tire failure, which could lead to a loss of vehicle control resulting in an acci- dent.

7-32

Maintenance

1. Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

2. Tire size designation A tires sidewall is marked with a tire size designation. You will need this information when selecting replace- ment tires for your car. The following explains what the letters and num- bers in the tire size designation mean.

Example tire size designation: (These numbers are provided as an example only; your tire size designa- tor could vary depending on your vehicle.) 205/55R16 91H

205 - Tire width in millimeters. 55 - Aspect ratio. The tires section

height as a percentage of its width.

R - Tire construction code (Radial). 16 - Rim diameter in inches. 91 - Load Index, a numerical code

associated with the maximum load the tire can carry.

H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the speed rating chart in this section for additional information.

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with impor- tant information that you need if you ever have to replace one. The follow- ing explains what the letters and numbers in the wheel size designa- tion mean. Example wheel size designation: 6.5J X 16

6.5 - Rim width in inches. J - Rim contour designation. 16 - Rim diameter in inches.

OLMB073028

1

1

2 3

4

5,6

7

7-33

7

M aintenance

Tire speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the dif- ferent speed ratings currently being used for passenger car tires. The speed rating is part of the tire size designation on the sidewall of the tire. This symbol corresponds to that tires designed maximum safe oper- ating speed.

3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire Identification Number)

Any tires that are over six years old, based on the manufacturing date, (including the spare tire) should be replaced by new ones. You can find the manufacturing date on the tire sidewall (possibly on the inside of the wheel), displaying the DOT Code. The DOT Code is a series of num- bers on a tire consisting of numbers and English letters. The manufactur- ing date is designated by the last four digits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO

The front part of the DOT means a plant code number, tire size and tread pattern and the last four num- bers indicate week and year manu- factured. For example: DOT XXXX XXXX 1418 represents that the tire was produced in the 14th week of 2018.

4. Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rub- ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. The letter "R" means radial ply con- struction; the letter "D" means diago- nal or bias ply construction; and the letter "B" means belted-bias ply con- struction.

5. Maximum permissible infla- tion pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label for recommended inflation pressure.

Speed Rating Symbol

Maximum Speed

S 112 mph (180 km/h) T 118 mph (190 km/h) H 130 mph (210 km/h) V 149 mph (240 km/h) W 168 mph (270 km/h) Y 186 mph (300 km/h)

7-34

Maintenance

6. Maximum load rating This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.

7. Uniform tire quality grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maxi- mum section width. For example: TREAD wear 200 TRACTION AA TEMPERATURE A

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a compara- tive rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified govern- ment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one-and-a- half times (1) as well on the gov- ernment course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. These grades are molded on the sidewalls of passenger vehicle tires. The tires available as standard or optional equipment on your vehicle may vary with respect to grade.

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on spec- ified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perform- ance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight- ahead braking traction tests, and does not include accelera- tion, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

WARNING

7-35

7

M aintenance

Temperature - A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled condi- tions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C responds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the labora- tory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Tire Terminology and Definitions Air Pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight This means the combined weight of optional accessories. Some exam- ples of optional accessories are automatic transmission, power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio The relationship of a tire's height to its width.

Belt A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials.

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, over-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible sudden tire failure. This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

WARNING

7-36

Maintenance

Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure The amount of air pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from driving.

Curb Weight This means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in com- pliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufactur- er, production plant, brand and date of production.

GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

GAWR FRT Gross Axle Weight Rating for the Front Axle.

GAWR RR Gross Axle Weight Rating for the Rear axle.

Intended Outboard Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa) The metric unit for air pressure.

Light truck(LT) tire A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on light- weight trucks or multipurpose pas- senger vehicles.

Load ratings The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure.

Load Index An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.

7-37

7

M aintenance

Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The max- imum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating The load rating for a tire at the maxi- mum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight The sum of curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight; and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds (68 kg).

Occupant Distribution Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall An asymmetrical tire has a particular side that faces outward when mount- ed on a vehicle. The outward facing sidewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the inner facing sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) tire A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipur- pose vehicles.

Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords.

Pneumatic tire A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel provides the trac- tion and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load.

Pneumatic options weight The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, includ- ing heavy duty breaks, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.

Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommend- ed tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.

7-38

Maintenance

Radial Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated.

Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate.

Traction The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip pro- vided.

Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators Narrow bands, sometimes called "wear bars", that show across the tread of a tire when only 1/16 inch of tread remains.

UTQGS Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards is a tire information sys- tem that provides consumers with ratings for a tire's traction, tempera- ture and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing proce- dures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Vehicle Capacity Weight The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the rated cargo and luggage load.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire Load on an individual tire due to curb and accessory weight plus maximum occupant and cargo weight.

Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occu- pant weight and dividing by 2.

Vehicle Placard A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the original equip- ment tire size and recommended inflation pressure.

7-39

7

M aintenance

All Season Tires HYUNDAI specifies all season tires on some models to provide good performance for use all year round, including snowy and icy road condi- tions. All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than all season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

Summer Tires HYUNDAI specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rat- ing M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall. If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, HYUNDAI recommends the use of snow tires or all season tires on all four wheels.

Snow Tires If you equip your car with snow tires, they should be the same size and have the same load capacity as the original tires. Snow tires should be installed on all four wheels; other- wise, poor handling may result. Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa) more air pressure than the pressure recommended for the standard tires on the tire label on the drivers side of the center pillar, or up to the maxi- mum pressure shown on the tire sidewall, whichever is less. Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h) when your vehicle is equipped with snow tires.

Radial-Ply Tires Radial-ply tires provide improved tread life, road hazard resistance and smoother high speed ride. The radi- al-ply tires used on this vehicle are of belted construction, and are selected to complement the ride and handling characteristics of your vehicle. Radial-ply tires have the same load carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias belted tires of the same size, and use the same recommended inflation pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires with bias-ply or bias belted tires is not recommended. Any combina- tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias belted tires when used on the same vehicle will seriously deteriorate vehicle handling. The best rule to fol- low is: Identical pairs of radial-ply tires should always be used as a set for the front tires and a set for the rear tires.

7-40

Maintenance

Longer wearing tires can be more susceptible to irregular tread wear. It is very important to follow the tire rotation interval in this chapter to achieve the tread life potential of these tires. Cuts and punctures in radial-ply tires are repairable only in the tread area, because of sidewall flexing. Consult your tire dealer for radial-ply tire repairs.

Low Aspect Ratio Tires Low aspect ratio tires, the aspect ratio is lower than 50, are provided for sporty looks. Because low aspect ratio tires are optimized for handling and braking, their sidewall is a little stiffer than a standard tire. Also low aspect ratio tires tend to be wider and conse- quently have a greater contact patch with the road surface. In some instances they may generate more road noise compared with standard tires.Do not mix bias ply and radial

ply tires under any circum- stances.This may cause unusu- al handling characteristics that may cause loss of vehicle con- trol resulting in an accident.

WARNING

Because the sidewall of a low aspect ratio tire is shorter than a standard tire, the rim of the wheel and the tire itself is more easily susceptible to damage. Use caution when driving and follow the guidelines below to help minimize damage to the wheel and tire: - When driving on a rough road

or off road, drive cautiously because tires and wheels may be damaged. And after driving, inspect tires and wheels.

- When passing over a pothole, speed bump, manhole, or curb stone, drive slowly so that the tires and wheels are not dam- aged.

- If the tire is subjected to a severe impact, have the tire and wheel inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

- Inspect the tire condition and pressure every 1,800 miles (3,000 km).

CAUTION

7-41

7

M aintenance

It is not easy to recognize tire damage with your own eyes. But if there is the slightest hint of tire damage, have the tire checked or replaced because the tire damage may cause air leakage from the tire.

If the tire is damaged by driv- ing on a rough road, off road, pothole, manhole, or curb stone, it will not be covered by the warranty.

CAUTION

7-42

Maintenance

FUSES

A vehicle's electrical system is pro- tected from electrical overload dam- age by fuses. This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels, one located in the driver's side panel bolster, the other in the motor com- partment near the battery.

If any of your vehicles lights, acces- sories, or controls do not work, check the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has blown, the element inside the fuse will be melted or broken. If the electrical system does not work, first check the driver's side fuse panel. Before replacing a blown fuse, turn the vehicle and all switch- es off, and then disconnect the neg- ative battery cable. Always replace a blown fuse with one of the same rat- ing. If the replacement fuse blows, this indicates an electrical problem. Avoid using the system involved and imme- diately consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Information Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type for lower amperage rating, car- tridge type, and multi fuse for higher amperage ratings.

i

NEVER replace a fuse with any- thing but another fuse of the same rating. A higher capacity fuse could

cause damage and possibly cause a fire.

Do not install a wire or alu- minum foil instead of the proper fuse - even as a tem- porary repair. It may cause extensive wiring damage and possibly a fire.

WARNING

Normal

Blade type

Cartridge type

Blown

Normal Blown

OAEE076008

Normal Blown Multi fuse

7-43

7

M aintenance

Do not use a screwdriver or any other metal object to remove fuses because it may cause a short circuit and damage the sys- tem.

Instrument Panel Fuse Replacement

1. Turn the vehicle off. 2. Turn all other switches OFF. 3. Open the fuse panel cover. 4. Refer to the label on the inside of

the fuse panel cover to locate the suspected fuse location.

5. Pull the suspected fuse straight out. Use the removal tool provided in the motor compartment fuse panel.

6. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown. Spare fuses are pro- vided in the instrument panel fuse panels (or in the motor compart- ment fuse panel).

7. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

In an emergency, if you do not have a spare fuse, use a fuse of the same rating from a circuit you may not need for operating the vehicle. If the headlamps or other electrical components do not work and the fuses are OK, check the fuse panel in the motor compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must be replaced with the same rating.

NOTICE

OAEE076010

OAEE076009

7-44

Maintenance

Fuse switch

Always, place the fuse switch to the ON position. If you move the switch to the OFF position, some items such as the audio system and digital clock must be reset and the smart key may not work properly.

Information

If the fuse switch is OFF, the above message will appear.

Always place the fuse switch in the ON position while driving the vehicle.

Do not move the fuse switch repeatedly. The fuse switch may be damaged.

Motor Compartment Panel Fuse Replacement

1. Turn the vehicle off. 2. Turn all other switches OFF. 3. Remove the fuse panel cover by

pressing the tap and pulling up.

NOTICE

i

OAEE076011 OLFH044149L OAEE076033

OAEE076045L

Blade type fuse

Cartridge type fuse

7-45

7

M aintenance

4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown. To remove or insert the fuse, use the fuse puller in the motor compartment fuse panel.

5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Multi fuse

If the multi fuse is blown, it must be removed as follows: 1. Turn the vehicle off. 2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable. 3. Remove the fuse panel cover by

pressing the tab and pulling it up. 4. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-

ture above. 5. Replace the fuse with a new one

of the same rating. 6. Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

Information If the multi fuse is blown, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i

After checking the fuse box in the motor compartment secure- ly close the fuse box cover inside the motor compartment, until it clicks. If the fuse box is not closed properly, water may leak in side, possibly causing a malfunction with the electrical system.

CAUTION

OAEE076033

7-46

Maintenance

Fuse/Relay Panel Description Instrument panel fuse panel

Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you can find the fuse/relay label describ- ing fuse/relay name and capacity.

Information Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle; the information is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

i

OAEE076014

OAEE076053N

7-47

7

M aintenance

Fuse Name Fuse Rating Protected Component

MODULE5 10A Electro Chromic Mirror, Audio, Driver IMS Module, Rear Seat Warmer Module, DBL Unit, VESS Unit, Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Head Lamp LH/RH, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module

MODULE4 10A Lane Keeping Assist Unit, Crash Pad Switch, Electric Parking Brake Unit AEB Unit, Blind Spot Detection Radar LH/RH

INTERIOR LAMP

10A Front Vanity Lamp LH/RH, Room Lamp, Overhead Console Lamp, Luggage Lamp, Wireless Charger Unit

A/BAG 15A SRS Control Module, Occupant Detection Sensor

E-SHIFTER1 10A SBW Switch, Front Console Switch

IG1 25A PCB Block (Fuse - AHB3, EPCU2)

CLUSTER 10A Instrument Cluster

MODULE3 10A BCM, Stop Lamp Switch, Driver Door Module, Passenger Door Module

IG3 2 10A IPS Control Module, Main Battery Charging Switch, Charge Lamp, PTC Heater, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Instrument Cluster, A/C Control Module, Audio

MEMORY2 7.5A Active Air Flap

A/BAG IND 7.5A Instrument Cluster

START 7.5A EPCU, Smart Key Control Module

Instrument panel fuse panel

7-48

Maintenance

Fuse Name Fuse Rating Protected Component

MODULE2 10A E/R Junction Block (Power Outlet Relay), Wireless Charger Unit, SBW Switch, BCM, USB Charging, Smart Key Control Module, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Power Outside Mirror Switch, AMP

PDM3 7.5A Smart Key Control Module

MEMORY1 10A Auto Light & Photo Sensor, Driver IMS Module, BCM, A/C Control Module, Instrument Cluster, Passenger Door Module, Driver Door Module, Electro Chromic Mirror Relay Box (Outside Mirror Folding/Unfolding Relay)

MULTIMEDIA 10A A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Audio

E-SHIFTER2 10A SCU

IG3 3 10A CCM Unit

IG3 1 20A ICM Relay Box

MDPS 7.5A MDPS Unit

T/GATE 10A Tail Gate Relay, Main Battery Charging Switch, Quick Charging Connector Door Lock/Unlock Actuator

PDM1 15A Smart Key Control Module

MODULE7 7.5A Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module, Rear Seat Warmer Module

HTD STRG 15A BCM

Instrument panel fuse panel

7-49

7

M aintenance

Fuse Name Fuse Rating Protected Component

SUNROOF 20A Sunroof Motor

P/WDW RH 25A Power Window (RH) Relay, Passenger Safety Power Window Switch

P/WDW LH 25A Driver Safety Power Window Module

PDM2 7.5A Smart Key Control Module, Start/Stop Button Switch

BRAKE SWITCH

7.5A Stop Lamp Switch, Smart Key Control Module

OBC 10A OBC

A/CON 7.5A A/C Control Module

WASHER 15A MultifunctioEt Warmer Control Module, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module

S/HEATER FRT

25A Charging Connector Lamp, Quick Charging Connector Lamp

CHARGER 10A CCM Unit, Charging Connector Lamp, ICM Relay Box (Charging Connector Lock/Unlock Relay)

P/SEAT DRV 30A Driver Seat Manual Switch, Driver IMS Module

AMP 30A AMP

Instrument panel fuse panel

7-50

Maintenance

Fuse Name Fuse Rating Protected Component

MODULE1 10A Data Link Connector, AEB Unit, Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror, Driver/Passenger Smart Key Outside Handle, Driver/Passenger Door Module

DOOR LOCK 20A Door Lock/Unlock Relay, ICM Relay Box (Two Turn Unlcok Relay)

WIPER FRT2 10A Wiper Motor, PCB Block (Front Wiper (Low) Relay) BCM

MODULE6 7.5A Smart Key Control Module, BCM

S/HEATER RR 25A Rear Seat Warmer Module

HTD MIRR 10A Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror, A/C Control Module

RR HTD 25A Rear Defogger (+) (Upper)

WIPER FRT1 30A Wiper Motor, PCB Block (Front Wiper (Low) Relay), A/C Control Module

Instrument panel fuse panel

7-51

7

M aintenance

Motor compartment fuse panel

Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you can find the fuse/relay label describ- ing fuse/relay name and capacity.

Information Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle; the information is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.

i

OAEE076016

OAEE076054N

7-52

Maintenance

Motor compartment fuse panel

Fuse Name Fuse Rating Protected Component

MAIN 180A EPCU (Low Voltage DC-DC Converter), E/R Junction Block (Fuse - H/LAMP HI, POWER OUTLET1, AHB2, AHB1)

MDPS 80A MDPS Unit

REAR HEATED1

50A E/R Junction Block (Rear Defogger Relay)

BLOWER 40A E/R Junction Block (Blower Relay)

B+3 60A IGPM (Fuse - ARISU (4CH), IPS (1CH/2CH))

B+4 50A IGPM (Fuse - P/WINDOW LH/RH, TAILGATE OPEN, SUNROOF, AMP, CHARGER, OBC, S/HEATER FRT, P/SEAT DRV)

C/FAN 60A E/R Junction Block (Cooling Fan Relay)

B+2 60A IGPM (Fuse - S/HEATER RR, ARISU (4CH), IPS (2CH))

IG1 40A E/R Junction Block (Button Start #1 (ACC) Relay, Button Start #2 (IG1) Relay)

IG2 40A E/R Junction Block (Button Start #2 (IG2) Relay)

E-SHIFTER 40A E/R Junction Block (Fuse - E-SHIFTER2, E-SHIFTER Relay)

B+5 60A PCB Block (Fuse - EPCU1, HORN, B/A HORN, BMS, Main Relay)

7-53

7

M aintenance

Motor compartment fuse panel

Fuse Name Fuse Rating Protected Component

B/UP LAMP 10A E/R Junction Block (B/UP Lamp Relay), Multipurpose Check Connector

POWER OUTLET1

40A E/R Junction Block (Power Outlet Relay)

H/LAMP HI 10A E/R Junction Block (Head Lamp (HI) Relay)

AHB1 30A IBAU, Multipurpose Check Connector

AHB2 40A IBAU, Multipurpose Check Connector

EPB1 30A Electric Parking Brake Unit

EPB2 30A Electric Parking Brake Unit

B+1 40A IGPM (Fuse - BRAKE SWITCH, MODULE1, DOOR LOCK, PDM1, PDM2, Fuse Switch, Leak Current Autocut Device)

BATT C/FAN 25A E/R Junction Block (Battery C/Fan Relay)

7-54

Maintenance

Motor compartment fuse panel (Battery terminal cover)

Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you can find the fuse/relay label describ- ing fuse/relay name and capacity.

Information Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle; the information is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.

i

OAEE076018

OAEE076043

After checking the fuse panel in the motor compartment, securely install the cover. If it is not securely latched, electrical failure may occur from water contact.

NOTICE

7-55

7

M aintenance

LIGHT BULBS Consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer to replace most vehicle light bulbs. It is difficult to replace vehicle light bulbs because other parts of the vehicle must be removed before you can get to the bulb. This is especially true for removing the headlamp assembly to get to the bulb(s). Removing/installing the headlamp assembly can result in damage to the vehicle.

Information After heavy driving, rain or washing, lamps could appear frosty. This condi- tion is caused by the temperature dif- ference between the lamp inside and the outside temperature. This is simi- lar to the condensation on your win- dows inside your vehicle during the rain and doesnt indicate a problem with your vehicle. If the water leaks into the lamp bulb circuitry, have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Information A normally functioning lamp may

flicker momentarily to stabilize the vehicles electrical control system. However, if the lamp goes out after flickering momentarily, or contin- ues to flicker, we recommend the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

The position lamp may not turn on when the position lamp switch is turned on, but the position lamp and headlamp switch may turn on when the headlamp switch is turned on. This may be caused by network fail- ure or vehicle electrical control sys- tem malfunction. If this occurs, we recommend the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i

i

Prior to replacing a lamp, depress the foot brake, shift to P (Park), apply the parking brake, place the POWER but- ton in the OFF position and take the key with you when leaving the vehicle to avoid sudden movement of the vehi- cle and to prevent possible electric shock.

Be aware the bulbs may be hot and may burn your fin- gers.

WARNING

7-56

Maintenance

Headlamp, Parking Lamp, Turn Signal Lamp and Side Marker

(1) Headlamp (Low) (2) Headlamp (High) (3) Turn signal lamp (4) Parking lamp (5) Side marker

Always handle them carefully, and avoid scratches and abrasions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with liquids.

Never touch the glass with bare hands. Residual oil may cause the bulb to overheat and burst when lit.

A bulb should be operated only when installed in a headlamp.

If a bulb becomes damaged or cracked, replace it immediately and carefully dispose of it.OLMB073042L

Halogen bulb Handle halogen bulbs with

care. Halogen bulbs contain pressurized gas that will pro- duce flying pieces of glass that could cause injuries if broken.

Wear eye protection when changing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool down before han- dling it.

WARNING OAE076028

Type A Standard type

7-57

7

M aintenance

Headlamp and parking lamp

1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable. 3. Remove the headlamp bulb cover

(1) by turning it counterclockwise. 4. Disconnect the headlamp bulb

socket-connector. (for low beam and high beam)

5. Remove the bulb from the head- lamp assembly.

6. Install a new bulb.

7. Connect the headlamp bulb sock- et-connector. (for low beam and high beam)

8. Install the headlamp bulb cover (1) by turning it clockwise.

Information The headlamp aiming should be adjusted after an accident or after the headlamp assembly is reinstalled at an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Turn signal

1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable. 3. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

i

OAE076030

Parking lamp Low beam

OAE076031

High beam

7-58

Maintenance

5. Install a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.

6. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly.

7. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

Side marker 1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable. 3. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pulling out the bulb.

5. Insert a new bulb. (1) Headlamp (Low) (2) Headlamp (High) (3) Parking/Turn signal lamp (4) Side marker

Type B - LED type

7-59

7

M aintenance

Headlamp (Low), parking/turn signal lamp and side marker Your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps. LED lamps do not have replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Always handle them carefully, and avoid scratches and abrasions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with liquids.

Never touch the glass with bare hands. Residual oil may cause the bulb to overheat and burst when lit.

A bulb should be operated only when installed in a headlamp.

If a bulb becomes damaged or cracked, replace it immediately and carefully dispose of it.OLMB073042L

Halogen bulb Handle halogen bulbs with

care. Halogen bulbs contain pressurized gas that will pro- duce flying pieces of glass that could cause injuries if broken.

Wear eye protection when changing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool down before han- dling it.

WARNING

7-60

Maintenance

Headlamp (High)

1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable. 3. Remove the headlamp bulb cover

(1) by turning it counterclockwise. 4. Disconnect the headlamp bulb

socket-connector. 5. Remove the bulb from the head-

lamp assembly. 6. Install a new bulb. 7. Connect the headlamp bulb sock-

et-connector. 8. Install the headlamp bulb cover (1)

by turning it clockwise.

Information The headlamp aiming should be adjusted after an accident or after the headlamp assembly is reinstalled at an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Daytime Running Light (DRL)

Your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps. LED lamps do not have replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i

OAEE076030NOAEE076039

7-61

7

M aintenance

Side Repeater Lamp Replacement

Your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps. LED lamps do not have replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Rear Combination Light Bulb Replacement

(1) Tail lamp (2) Back-up lamp (3) Stop lamp, tail lamp and turn sig-

nal lamp (4) Side marker

Stop lamp, tail lamp, turn signal lamp and side marker Your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps. LED lamps do not have replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OAE076034 OAEE076022

7-62

Maintenance

Backup lamp

1. Turn off the vehicle. 2. Open the liftgate. 3. Remove the service cover using a

flat-blade screwdriver.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.

5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.

6. Install the socket into the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

7. Reinstall the service cover.

High Mounted Stop Light Replacement

1. Open the liftgate. 2. Gently remove the cover of the lift-

gate trim. 3. Remove the spoiler plug hole. 4. Disconnect the electrical connec-

tor. 5. Loosen the mounting bolts and

remove the spoiler. 6. Remove the high mounted stop

light assembly after disconnecting the connector.

7. Reinstall a new light assembly in the reverse order of removal.

OAEE076038

Backup lamp

OAEE076023

OAEE076025

7-63

7

M aintenance

License Plate Light Bulb Replacement

1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry the lens cover from the lamp housing.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.

3. Install a new bulb. 4. Reinstall in the reverse order.

Map lamp and room lamp

OAE076044 OAEE076026

Map lamp (LED type)

OAEE076027

Room lamp (LED type)

Interior Light Bulb Replacement

Your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps. LED lamps do not have replace- able bulbs. If the LED lamp does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

7-64

Maintenance

1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry the lens from the interi- or lamp housing.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.

3. Install a new bulb in the socket. 4. Align the lens tabs with the interi-

or lamp housing notches and snap the lens into place.

Use care not to dirty or damage lens, lens tab, and plastic hous- ings.

NOTICE

Prior to working on the Interior Lights, ensure that the lamp is off to avoid burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.

WARNING

Map lamp (Bulb type)

OAE076045

OAE076046

Vanity mirror lamp

Luggage compartment lamp

OAE076048

OAE076047

Room lamp (Bulb type)

Map lamp, room lamp, vanity mirror lamp and luggage compartment lamp

7-65

7

M aintenance

APPEARANCE CARE Exterior Care Exterior general caution It is very important to follow the label directions when using any chemical cleaner or polish. Read all warning and caution statements that appear on the label.

High-pressure washing When using high-pressure wash-

ers, make sure to maintain suffi- cient distance from the vehicle. Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure can lead to component damage or water penetration.

Do not spray the camera, sensors or its surrounding area directly with a high pressure washer. Shock applied from high pressure water may cause the device to not oper- ate normally.

Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or plastic covers)or connectors as they may be dam- aged if they come into contact with high pressure water.

Do not use any high-pressure noz- zles, which induce either one- direct water stream or water swirling.

Protecting your vehicles finish Washing

To help protect your vehicles finish from rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly and frequently at least once a month with lukewarm or cold water. If you use your vehicle for off-road driving, you should wash it after each off-road trip. Pay special attention to the removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign materials. Make sure the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors and rocker panels are kept clear and clean. Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, industrial pollution and similar deposits can damage your vehicles finish if not removed immediately. Even prompt washing with plain water may not completely remove all these deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on painted surfaces, should be used.

7-66

Maintenance

After washing, rinse the vehicle thor- oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do not allow soap to dry on the fin- ish.

Do not use strong soap, chemi- cal detergents or hot water, and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or when the body of the vehicle is warm.

Be careful when washing the side windows of your vehicle. Especially, with high-pressure water, water may leak through the windows and wet the interi- or.

To prevent damage to the plastic parts, do not clean with chemi- cal solvents or strong deter- gents.

Water washing in the motor compartment including high pressure water washing may cause the failure of electrical cir- cuits located in the motor com- partment.

Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electri- cal/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

NOTICE

NOTICE

OAEE076046L

After washing the vehicle, test the brakes while driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water before getting on the road. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.

WARNING

7-67

7

M aintenance

Waxing

A good coat of wax provides a barri- er between your paint and environ- mental contamination. Keeping a good coat of wax on your vehicle will help protect it. Wax the vehicle when water will no longer bead on the paint. Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing. Use a good quality liquid or paste wax, and follow the manufacturers instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect it and to main- tain its luster. Removing oil, tar, and similar materi- als with a spot remover will usually strip the wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax these areas even if the rest of the vehicle does not yet need wax- ing.

Wiping dust or dirt off the body with a dry cloth will scratch the finish.

Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, or strong detergents containing highly alkaline or caustic agents on chrome-plat- ed or anodized aluminum parts. This may result in damage to the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deteriora- tion.

Repairing your vehicles finish Deep scratches or stone chips in the painted surface must be repaired promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust and may develop into a major repair expense.

If your vehicle is damaged and requires any metal repair or replacement, be sure the body shop applies anti-corrosion mate- rials to the parts repaired or replaced.

NOTICE

NOTICE

7-68

Maintenance

Bright-metal maintenance To remove road tar and insects,

use a tar remover, not a scraper or other sharp object.

To protect the surfaces of bright- metal parts from corrosion, apply a coating of wax or chrome preser- vative and rub to a high luster.

During winter weather or in coastal areas, cover the bright metal parts with a heavier coating of wax or preservative. If necessary, coat the parts with non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other protective compound.

Underbody maintenance Corrosive materials used for ice and snow removal and dust control may collect on the underbody. If these materials are not removed, acceler- ated rusting can occur on underbody parts such as the fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system, even though they have been treated with rust protection.

Thoroughly flush the vehicle under- body and wheel openings with luke- warm or cold water once a month, after off-road driving and at the end of each winter. Pay special attention to these areas because it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It will do more harm than good to wet down the road grime without removing it. The lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and frame members have drain holes that should not be allowed to clog with dirt; trapped water in these areas can cause rust- ing.

Aluminum wheel maintenance The aluminum wheels are coated with a clear protective finish.

Do not use abrasive cleaner, pol- ishing compound, solvent, or wire brushes on aluminum wheels.

Clean the wheel when it has cooled.

Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent, and rinse thoroughly with water. Also, clean the wheels after driving on salted roads.

Do not wash the wheels with high-speed car wash brushes.

Do not use any cleaners con- taining acid or alkaline deter- gents.

NOTICE

After washing the vehicle, test the brakes while driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.

WARNING

7-69

7

M aintenance

Corrosion protection Protecting your vehicle from corro- sion

By using the most advanced design and construction practices to combat corrosion, HYUNDAI produces cars of the highest quality. However, this is only part of the job. To achieve the long-term corrosion resistance your vehicle can deliver, the owners cooperation and assistance is also required.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corro- sion on your vehicle are: Road salt, dirt and moisture that is

allowed to accumulate underneath the vehicle.

Removal of paint or protective coatings by stones, gravel, abra- sion or minor scrapes and dents which leave unprotected metal exposed to corrosion.

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your vehi- cle is regularly exposed to corrosive materials, corrosion protection is particularly important. Some of the common causes of accelerated cor- rosion are road salts, dust control chemicals, ocean air and industrial pollution.

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which corrosion is most likely to occur. For example, corrosion is accelerated by high humidity, partic- ularly when temperatures are just above freezing. In such conditions, the corrosive material is kept in con- tact with the car surfaces by moisture that is slow to evaporate.+ Mud is particularly corrosive because it is slow to dry and holds moisture in contact with the vehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, it can still retain the moisture and promote corrosion.

High temperatures can also acceler- ate corrosion of parts that are not properly ventilated so the moisture can be dispersed. For all these rea- sons, it is particularly important to keep your vehicle clean and free of mud or accumulations of other mate- rials. This applies not only to the vis- ible surfaces but particularly to the underside of the vehicle.

To help prevent corrosion

Keep your car clean The best way to prevent corrosion is to keep your vehicle clean and free of corrosive materials. Attention to the underside of the vehicle is partic- ularly important.

If you live in a high-corrosion area where road salts are used, near the ocean, areas with industrial pollution, acid rain, etc., you should take extra care to prevent corrosion. In winter, hose off the underside of your vehicle at least once a month and be sure to clean the underside thoroughly when winter is over.

7-70

Maintenance

When cleaning underneath the vehicle, pay particular attention to the components under the fenders and other areas that are hidden from view. Do a thorough job; just dampening the accumulated mud rather than washing it away will accelerate corrosion rather than prevent it. Water under high pres- sure and steam are particularly effective in removing accumulated mud and corrosive materials.

When cleaning lower door panels, rocker panels and frame members, be sure that drain holes are kept open so that moisture can escape and not be trapped inside to accel- erate corrosion.

Keep your garage dry Dont park your car in a damp, poor- ly ventilated garage. This creates a favorable environment for corrosion. This is particularly true if you wash your vehicle in the garage or drive it into the garage when it is still wet or covered with snow, ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contribute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated so moisture is dispersed.

Keep paint and trim in good condition Scratches or chips in the finish should be covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as possible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. If bare metal is showing through, the atten- tion of a qualified body and paint shop is recommended. Bird droppings are highly corrosive and may damage painted surfaces in just a few hours. Always remove bird droppings as soon as possible.

Interior Care Interior general precautions Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume and cosmetic oil, from con- tacting the interior parts because they may cause damage or discol- oration. If they do contact the interior parts, wipe them off immediately. See the instructions for the proper way to clean vinyl.

Never allow water or other liq- uids to come in contact with electrical/electronic compo- nents inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

When cleaning leather products (steering wheel, seats etc.), use neutral detergents or low alco- hol content solutions. If you use high alcohol content solutions or acid/alkaline detergents, the color of the leather may fade or the surface may get stripped off.

NOTICE

7-71

7

M aintenance

Cleaning the upholstery and interior trim Vinyl (if equipped)

Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Fabric (if equipped)

Remove dust and loose dirt from fab- ric with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu- tion recommended for upholstery or carpets. Remove fresh spots imme- diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not receive immediate attention, the fabric can be stained and its color can be affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties can be reduced if the material is not proper- ly maintained.

Using anything but recommended cleaners and procedures may affect the fabric's appearance and fire-resistant properties.

Leather (if equipped)

Feature of Seat Leather - Leather is made from the outer

skin of an animal, which goes through a special process to be available for use. Since it is a nat- ural object, each part differs in thickness or density. Wrinkles may appear as a natural result of stretching and shrinking depending on the temperature and humidity.

- The seat is made of stretchable fabric to improve comfort.

- The parts contacting the body are curved and the side supporting area is high which provides driv- ing comfort and stability.

- Wrinkles may appear naturally from usage. It is not a fault of the products.

NOTICE

Wrinkles or abrasions which appear naturally from usage are not covered by warranty.

Belts with metallic acces- sories, zippers or keys inside the back pocket may damage the seat fabric.

Make sure not to wet the seat. It may change the nature of natural leather.

Jeans or clothes which could bleach may contaminate the surface of the seat covering fabric.

CAUTION

7-72

Maintenance

Caring for the leather seats - Vacuum the seat periodically to

remove dust and sand on the seat. It will prevent abrasion or damage of the leather and main- tain its quality.

- Wipe the natural leather seat cover often with dry or soft cloth.

- Use of proper leather protective may prevent abrasion of the cover and helps maintain the color. Be sure to read the instruc- tions and consult a specialist when using leather coating or protective agent.

- Light colored (beige, cream beige) leather is easily contami- nated and the stain is noticeable. Clean the seats frequently.

- Avoid wiping with wet cloth. It may cause the surface to crack.

Cleaning the leather seats - Remove all contaminations

instantly. Refer to instructions below for removal of each con- taminant.

- Cosmetic products (sunscreen, foundation, etc.) Apply cleansing cream on a cloth and wipe the contaminate spot. Wipe off the cream with a wet cloth and remove water with a dry cloth.

- Beverages (coffee, soft drink, etc.) Apply a small amount of neutral detergent and wipe until contami- nations do not smear.

- Oil Remove oil instantly with absorbable cloth and wipe with stain remover used only for natu- ral leather.

- Chewing gum Harden the gum with ice and remove gradually.

Cleaning the seat belt webbing Clean the belt webbing with any mild soap solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow the instructions provided with the soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the webbing because this may weaken the seat belt.

Cleaning the interior window glass If the interior glass surfaces of the vehicle become fogged (that is, cov- ered with an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the directions on the glass cleaner container.

Do not scrape or scratch the inside of the rear window. This may result in damage to the rear window defroster grid.

NOTICE

7-73

7

M aintenance

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply, See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers: Perchlorate containing materials, such as air bag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners and keyless remote entry batteries, must be disposed of according to Title 22 California Code of Regulations Section 67384.10 (a).

8

Specifications & Consum

er inform ation

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Dimensions ..............................................................8-2 Electric Vehicle Specifications.............................8-2 Bulb Wattage ..........................................................8-3 Tires and Wheels ...................................................8-4 Volume and Weight................................................8-5 Air Conditioning System........................................8-5 Recommended Lubricants and Capacities..........8-6 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ...................8-7 Vehicle Certification Label....................................8-7 Tire Specification and Pressure Label................8-8 Motor Number ........................................................8-8 Refrigerant Label...................................................8-8 Consumer Information...........................................8-9 Reporting Safety Defects ...................................8-10

DIMENSIONS

8-2

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Items in (mm)

Overall length 175.9 (4,470)

Overall width 71.6 (1,820)

Overall height 57.1 (1,450)

Front tread 61.2 (1,555)

Rear tread 61.5 (1,564)

Wheelbase 106.3 (2,700)

ELECTRIC VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

Motor Battery (Lithium-Ion Polymer) Charger (OBC)

Max. Output (kW) Max. Torque (Nm) Capacity (kWh) Power Output (kW) Voltage (V) Max. Output (kW)

88 295 28 98 360 6.6

OBC : On-Board Battery Chargers

8-3

8

Specifications, Consum er inform

ation and Reporting safety defects

BULB WATTAGE Light Bulb Bulb Type Wattage

Front

Type A

Headlamp Low H7 55 High HB3 60

Parking lamp W5W 5 Turn signal lamp PY21W 21 Side marker W5W 5

Type B

Headlamp Low LED LED High HB3 60

Parking lamp LED LED Turn signal lamp LED LED Side marker LED LED

Daytime running light (DRL) LED LED Side repeater lamp LED LED

Rear

Tail lamp LED LED Turn signal lamp LED LED Stop lamp LED LED Backup lamp W16W 16 Side marker LED LED High mounted stop lamp LED LED License plate lamp W5W 5

Interior

Map lamp Type A W10W 10 Type B LED LED

Room lamp Type A FESTOON 8 Type B LED LED

Vanity mirror lamp FESTOON 5 Luggage room lamp FESTOON 5

8-4

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

TIRES AND WHEELS

When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle. Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or not work properly.

CAUTION

If your vehicle is not equipped with a compact spare tire, your vehicle will be equipped with a Tire Mobility Kit.

Items Tire Size Wheel Size

Inflation Pressure kPa (psi) Wheel Lug Nut Torque kgfm (lbfft, Nm)

Normal Load Maximum Load

Front Rear Front Rear

Full size tire 205/55 R16 6.5J X 16 250 (36) 235 (34) 250 (36) 235 (34) 11~13

(79~94, 07~127)

It is permissible to add 3 psi to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are expect- ed soon. Tires typically loose 1psi (7kPa) for every 12F temperature drop. If extreme temperature variations are expected, recheck your tire pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.

An air pressure generally decreases, as you drive up to a high-altitude area above sea level. Thus, if you plan to drive a high-altitude area, check the tire pressures in advance. If necessary, inflate them to a prop- er level. (Air inflation per altitude : +2.4 psi/1 mile)

NOTICE

8-5

8

Specifications, Consum er inform

ation and Reporting safety defects

VOLUME AND WEIGHT

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for more details.

Gross Vehicle Weight lbs. (kg) Luggage Volume cu ft (l)

4,189 (1,900) 23.8 (650)

Items Weight of Volume Classification

Refrigerant oz. (gg)

without heat pump 19.400.88 (55025) R-134a

with heat pump 38.800.88 (1,10025)

Compressor lubricant oz. (cc)

6.340.35 (18010) POE

8-6

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES To help achieve proper vehicle performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

Lubricant Volume Classification

Reduction gear fluid 1.0 ~ 1.1 US qt.

(1.0 ~ 1.1 l) 70W, API GL-4, TCGO-9(MS517-14)

Coolant

without heat pump 4.33 ~ 4.44 US qt.

(4.1 ~ 4.2 l) Mixture of antifreeze and water (Phosphate-based Ethylene glycol coolant for aluminum radiator)

with heat pump 4.86 ~ 4.97 US qt.

(4.6 ~ 4.7 l)

Brake fluid 0.74~0.85 US qt.

(0.7~0.8 l) FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

8-7

8

Specifications, Consum er inform

ation and Reporting safety defects

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the number used in register- ing your car and in all legal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc. The number is punched on the floor under the passenger seat. To check the number, open the cover.

The VIN is also on a plate attached to the top of the dashboard. The number on the plate can easily be seen through the windshield from outside.

The vehicle certification label attached on the drivers side center pillar gives the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

OAE086004L

VIN label

OAE086001

Frame number

OAE086002

VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL

8-8

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

The tires supplied on your new vehi- cle are chosen to provide the best performance for normal driving. The tire label located on the drivers side center pillar gives the tire pres- sures recommended for your car.

The motor number is stamped on the motor block as shown in the drawing. The motor number can be seen from under the vehicle.

The refrigerant label provides infor- mation such as refrigerant type and amount. The label is located on the underside of the hood.

MOTOR NUMBER REFRIGERANT LABEL (IF EQUIPPED)

TIRE SPECIFICATION AND PRESSURE LABEL

OAE086002L OAEE086005N

OAEE086001

8-9

8

Specifications, Consum er inform

ation and Reporting safety defects

Eastern Region: Connecticut, Delaware, Maine, Massachusetts, New Hampshire, New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, Vermont. Eastern Region 1122 Cranbury South River Road Jamesburg, NJ 08831 (800) 633-5151

Southern Region: Florida, Georgia, Maryland, North Carolina, South Carolina, Virginia, West Virginia. Southern Region 3025 Chastain Meadows Parkway Suite 100 Marietta, GA 30066 (800) 633-5151

South Central Region: Alabama, Arkansas, Louisiana, Mississippi, New Mexico, Oklahoma, Tennessee, Texas. South Central Region 1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400 Coppell, TX 75019 (800) 633-5151

Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, lowa, Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota, Nebraska, North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio, Wisconsin, Kansas, Missouri. Central Region 2 Trans Am Plaza Dr #500 Oakbrook Terrace, IL 60181 (800) 633-5151

Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona, California, Colorado, Idaho, Montana, Nevada, Oregon, Utah, Washington, Wyoming. Western Region 10550 Talbert Avenue P.O.Box 20850 Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850 (800) 633-5151

CONSUMER INFORMATION This consumer information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation.Your HYUNDAI dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information. HYUNDAI motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to meet or exceed all applicable safety standards. For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read and follow all directions in this Owners Manual, particularly the information under the headings "NOTICE", "CAUTION" and "WARNING". If, after reading this manual, you have any questions regarding the operation of your vehicle, please contact your nearest HYUNDAI Motor America Regional Office as listed in the following:

8-10

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888- 327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; download the SaferCar mobile application; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA

1200 New Jersey Ave, SE, West Building Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual prob- lems between you, your dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

I

Index

I-2

Advanced smart cruise control system ...........................5-72

Air bag warning labels....................................................2-70

Air bags...........................................................................2-47

Additional safety precautions.....................................2-69

Air bag collision sensors ............................................2-63

Air bag inflation conditions .......................................2-65

Air bag non-inflation conditions ................................2-66

Air bag warning labels ...............................................2-70

Curtain air bags ..........................................................2-51

Do not install a child restraint on the front passenger seat..........................................................2-62

Driver's air bag ...........................................................2-49

Driver's knee airbag....................................................2-49

How does the air bags system operate? .....................2-53

Occupant classification system (OCS).......................2-58

Passenger's front air bag.............................................2-49

Side air bags ...............................................................2-50

SRS Care ....................................................................2-68

SRS components and functions..................................2-53

SRS warning light ......................................................2-53

What to expect after an air bag inflates .....................2-57

Why didn't my air bag go off in a collision ...............2-63

Air conditioning refrigerant label .................................3-119

Air conditioning system specification ..............................8-5

Air conditioning system................................................3-107

Alarm system ..................................................................3-13

Antenna .............................................................................4-2

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ......................................5-27

Appearance care..............................................................7-65

Exterior care ...............................................................7-65

Interior care ................................................................7-70

Armrest ...........................................................................2-15

Audio/Video/Navigation system (AVN system)...............4-4

Auto defogging system .................................................3-121

Auto hold ........................................................................5-23

Auto light position ..........................................................3-94

Automatic climate control system ................................3-107

Air conditioning........................................................3-115

Air conditioning refrigerant label.............................3-119

Air intake control......................................................3-113

Automatic heating and air conditioning...................3-108

Driver only................................................................3-115

EV mode...................................................................3-116

Fan speed control......................................................3-114

HEAT button.............................................................3-115

Manual heating and air conditioning .......................3-109

Mode selection..........................................................3-110

OFF mode.................................................................3-116

System maintenance .................................................3-118

Temperature control..................................................3-112

Automatic ventilation ...................................................3-123

Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB) system...........5-46

Aux, USB and iPod ..........................................................4-2

Index

A

I-3

Battery (12 volt)..............................................................7-23

Battery recharging ......................................................7-24

Battery cooling duct........................................................2-22

Battery saver function.....................................................3-97

Before driving ...................................................................5-3

Blind Spot Detection (BSD) system...............................5-38

Blue Link center ...........................................................3-19

Bluetooth Wireless Technology hands-free ....................4-4

Bottle holder .................................................................3-125

Brake fluid ......................................................................7-16

Brake system...................................................................5-17

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)..................................5-27

Auto hold....................................................................5-23

Disc brakes wear indicator .........................................5-18

Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) ................................5-18

Electronic Stability Control (ESC).............................5-29

Good braking practices ..............................................5-37

Hill-start Assist Control (HAC) .................................5-34

Power brakes ..............................................................5-17

Vehicle Stability Management (VSM) .......................5-33

Bulb replacement ............................................................7-55

Daytime running lamp................................................7-60

Front parking lamp.....................................................7-56

Front turn signal lamp ................................................7-56

Headlamp....................................................................7-56

High mounted stop lamp ............................................7-62

Interior light bulb .......................................................7-66

License plate light bulb ..............................................7-63

Rear combination light bulb.......................................7-61

Side marker ................................................................7-56

Side repeater lamp......................................................7-61

Bulb wattage .....................................................................8-3

Camera (Rear view) ......................................................3-105

Capacities (Lubricants) .....................................................3-6

Care

Exterior care ...............................................................7-65

Interior care ................................................................7-70

Tire care......................................................................7-26

Cargo security screen....................................................3-131

Center console storage..................................................3-123

Central door lock switch .................................................3-11

Certification label .............................................................8-7

Chains

Tire chains ..................................................................5-92 I

Index

B

C

I-4

Charging door .................................................................3-50

Checking tire inflation pressure......................................7-28

Child restraint system (CRS)..........................................2-36

Booster seats...............................................................2-39

Forward-facing child restraint system........................2-39

Installing a child restraint system (CRS) ...................2-39

Lower anchors and tether for children (LATCH system) .....................................................2-40

Rearward-facing child restraint system......................2-38

Securing a child restraint system seat with "Tether Anchor" system ..........................................2-43

Securing a child restraint system with a lap/ shoulder belt ............................................................2-44

Securing a child restraint system withthe LATCH anchors system ........................................................2-42

Selecting a child restraint system (CRS) ...................2-37

Child-protector rear door lock ........................................3-12

Climate control air filter replacement.............................7-18

Clock .............................................................................3-129

Clothes hanger ..............................................................3-130

Combined instrument, see instrument cluster ................3-51

Consumer information ......................................................8-9

Coolant ............................................................................7-12

Cooling fluid, see coolant ...............................................7-12

Cruise control system .....................................................5-67

Cup holder.....................................................................3-125

Curtain air bags...............................................................2-51

Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel illumination..................................................................3-52

Dashboard, see instrument cluster ..................................3-51

Day/night rearview mirror ..............................................3-19

Daytime running light (DRL) .........................................3-94

Defogging (Windshield) ...............................................3-120

Defroster .......................................................................3-106

Rear window defroster .............................................3-106

Defrosting (Windshield) ...............................................3-120

Dimensions .......................................................................8-2

Display illumination, see instrument panel illumination..................................................................3-52

Displays, see instrument cluster .....................................3-51

Distance to empty ...........................................................3-55

Door locks.........................................................................3-9

Auto door lock/unlock features..................................3-12

Central door lock switch ............................................3-11

Child-protector rear door lock....................................3-12

Drinks holders, see cup holders....................................3-125

Drive mode integrated control system............................5-36

ECO mode ..................................................................5-36

SPORT mode..............................................................5-37

Driver position memory system .....................................3-14

Easy access function ..................................................3-15

Recalling memory positions.......................................3-15

Storing memory positions ..........................................3-14

Index

D

I-5

Driver's air bag................................................................2-49

Driver's knee airbag ........................................................2-49

Driving at night...............................................................5-90

Driving in flooded areas .................................................5-91

Driving in the rain...........................................................5-90

Dynamic Bending Light (DBL)......................................3-98

Easy access function .......................................................3-15

ECO guide.......................................................................3-53

ECO mode.......................................................................5-36

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with HomeLink system, compass and Blue Link .............................................3-19

Electric power steering (EPS).........................................3-16

Electric vehicle specifications ..........................................8-2

Electronic Parking Brake (EPB).....................................5-18

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................................5-29

Emergency towing ..........................................................6-23

EPB (Electronic Parking Brake).....................................5-18

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items.................7-11

Exterior care....................................................................7-65

Exterior overview

Front view ....................................................................1-2

Rear view......................................................................1-3

Flat tire

Tire Mobility Kit (TMK)............................................6-14

Floor mat anchor(s).......................................................3-130

Fluid

Brake fluid..................................................................7-18

Washer fluid ...............................................................7-17

Front seat adjustment ........................................................2-6

Adjusting the height up and down .............................2-17

Manual adjustment .......................................................2-7

Power adjustment .........................................................2-9

Front seat head restraints

Removal/Reinstall ......................................................2-18

Seatback pocket..........................................................2-12

Fuse switch .....................................................................7-44

Fuse/relay panel description

Battery terminal cover................................................7-54

Instrument panel fuse panel .......................................7-46

Motor compartment fuse panel ..................................7-51

Fuses ...............................................................................7-42

Fuse switch.................................................................7-44

Fuse/relay panel description.......................................7-46

Instrument panel fuse replacement.............................7-43

Motor compartment panel fuse replacement..............7-44

Multi fuse ...................................................................7-45 I

Index

E

F

I-6

Gauges and meters ..........................................................3-52

Glove box......................................................................3-124

Hazard warning flasher.....................................................6-2

Hazardous driving conditions .........................................5-89

Head restraints ................................................................2-16

Front seat head restraints............................................2-17

Rear seat head restraints.............................................2-19

Headlamp delay function................................................3-97

Headlamp position ..........................................................3-95

Headlight bulb replacement ............................................7-55

Heated steering wheel.....................................................3-17

Heater ............................................................................3-107

Height adjustment ...........................................................2-27

High beam operation.......................................................3-96

Highway driving .............................................................5-91

Hill-start Assist Control (HAC)......................................5-34

Hood................................................................................3-46

Horn ................................................................................3-17

How to use this manual ....................................................F-6

If the vehicle overheats.....................................................6-6

If the vehicle stalls at a crossroad or crossing..................6-2

If the vehicle stalls while driving .....................................6-2

If the vehicle will not start................................................6-3

If you have a flat tire ......................................................6-14

If you have a flat tire while driving..................................6-3

Immobilizer system...........................................................3-8

Impact sensing door unlock............................................3-12

Improtant safety precautions.............................................2-2

Air bag hazards ............................................................2-2

Always wear your seat belt ..........................................2-2

Control your speed .......................................................2-3

Driver distraction..........................................................2-2

Keep your vehicle in safe condition.............................2-3

Restrain all children .....................................................2-2

In case of emergency while driving..................................6-2

Indicator light..................................................................3-58

Inside rearview mirror ....................................................3-18

Instrument cluster ...........................................................3-51

Assist mode ................................................................3-83

Gauges and meters .....................................................3-52

Gear shift indicator.....................................................3-56

Icy road warning light ................................................3-57

Index

G

H

I

I-7

Instrument panel illumination ....................................3-52

LCD display control ...................................................3-80

LCD display messages ...............................................3-68

LCD display modes....................................................3-81

Regenerative braking rate indicator ...........................3-57

Shift indicator pop-up ................................................3-56

Trip computer .............................................................3-90

User settings mode .....................................................3-84

Warning and indicator lights ......................................3-58

Instrument panel fuse replacement .................................7-43

Instrument panel overview ...............................................1-5

Interior care.....................................................................7-70

Interior features

Bottle holder .............................................................3-125

Cargo security screen ...............................................3-131

Clock ........................................................................3-129

Clothes hanger..........................................................3-130

Cup holder ................................................................3-125

Floor mat anchor(s) ..................................................3-130

Mobile phone holder ................................................3-128

Power outlet..............................................................3-127

Sunvisor....................................................................3-126

Wireless cellular phone charging system.................3-128

Interior lamp AUTO cut..................................................3-99

Interior lights...................................................................3-99

Door lamp...................................................................3-99

Interior lamp AUTO cut .............................................3-99

Luggage room lamp .................................................3-100

Map lamp....................................................................3-99

Rear lamps................................................................3-100

Room lamp .................................................................3-99

Vanity mirror lamp ...................................................3-101

Puddle lamp..............................................................3-101

Interior overview...............................................................1-4

Jump starting.....................................................................6-4

Label

Air bag warning labels ...............................................2-70

Refrigerent label ...........................................................8-8

Tire sidewall labeling .................................................7-31

Tire specification and pressure label............................8-8

Vehicle certification label.............................................8-8

Lane change signals ........................................................3-96

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ............................5-59

Lap/shoulder belt ............................................................2-26

I

Index

J

L

I-8

LCD display

Assist mode ................................................................3-83

LCD display modes....................................................3-81

Quick guide help ........................................................3-82

Trip computer mode ...................................................3-82

Turn By Turn (TBT) mode.........................................3-82

User settings mode .....................................................3-84

Warning mode ............................................................3-83

LCD display messages

Aux. Battery Saver+ used while parked ....................3-75

Battery Overheated! Stop vehicle ..............................3-77

Charge immediately. Power limited ...........................3-76

Charger Error!/Quick Charger Error!.........................3-75

Charging door open....................................................3-74

Check BRAKE SWITCH fuse ...................................3-70

Check brakes ..............................................................3-76

Check electric vehicle system ....................................3-79

Check headlamp FAN ................................................3-73

Check headlamp LED ................................................3-72

Check headlight..........................................................3-72

Check steering wheel lock system .............................3-69

Check virtual engine sound........................................3-79

Door, Hood, Tailgate Open ........................................3-70

Key not detected.........................................................3-69

Key not in vehicle ......................................................3-69

Lights mode................................................................3-73

Low battery ................................................................3-76

Low Battery Temp. Power limited .............................3-77

Low Battery. Charge immediately .............................3-77

Low Key Battery ........................................................3-68

Low pressure ..............................................................3-72

Low washer fluid........................................................3-70

Power limited .............................................................3-78

Press brake pedal to start vehicle ...............................3-69

Press POWER button again .......................................3-69

Press POWER button while turning wheel................3-69

Press POWER button with key ..................................3-70

Remaining time ..........................................................3-74

Shift to P.....................................................................3-68

Shift to P to charge .....................................................3-74

Shift to P to start vehicle ............................................3-70

Stop vehicle and check brakes ...................................3-75

Stop vehicle and check power supply ........................3-78

Sunroof open ..............................................................3-71

Turn on "FUSE SWITCH".........................................3-71

Unplug vehicle to start ...............................................3-70

Wiper ..........................................................................3-73

LCD display modes ........................................................3-81

Liftgate............................................................................3-48

Light ................................................................................3-94

Turn signals ................................................................3-96

Parking lamp position ................................................3-95

Lane change signals ...................................................3-96

High beam operation ..................................................3-96

Index

I-9

Headlamp position......................................................3-95

Headlamp delay function ...........................................3-97

Dynamic Bending Light (DBL) .................................3-98

Daytime Running Light (DRL)..................................3-94

Battery saver function ................................................3-97

Auto light position......................................................3-94

Light bulbs ......................................................................7-55

Lubricants and capacities..................................................8-6

Luggage room lamp......................................................3-100

Maintenance

Maintenance services ...................................................7-4

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ............7-11

Maintenance under severe usage conditions..............7-15

Normal maintenance service ........................................7-8

Owner maintenance......................................................7-5

Scheduled maintenance services ..................................7-7

Tire maintenance ........................................................7-31

Maintenance services ........................................................7-4

Mirrors ............................................................................3-18

Blue Link center.......................................................3-19

Day/night rearview mirror..........................................3-19

Electric Chromic Mirror (ECM) with HomeLink

system, compass and Blue Link ...........................3-19

Folding/Unfolding the side view mirror ....................3-36

Inside rearview mirror................................................3-18

Reverse parking aid function .....................................3-37

Side view mirror control ............................................3-35

Side view mirrors .......................................................3-34

Mobile phone holder.....................................................3-128

Moonroof, see sunroof....................................................3-42

Motor compartment ...................................................1-6, 7-3

Motor compartment panel fuse replacement ..................7-44

Motor number ...................................................................8-8

Multi box.......................................................................3-125

Multi fuse........................................................................7-45

Multimedia system............................................................4-2

Antenna ........................................................................4-2

Audio/Video/Navigation system (AVN system) ..........4-4

Aux, USB and iPod......................................................4-2

Bluetooth Wireless Technology hands-free................4-4

Steering wheel audio control........................................4-3

Occupant classification system (OCS) ...........................2-58

Odometer.........................................................................3-55

Outside temperature gauge .............................................3-55

Owner maintenance ..........................................................7-5

I

Index

M

O

I-10

Paddle shifter (Regenerative braking control)................5-16

Parking lamp position .....................................................3-95

Passenger's front air bag .................................................2-49

Power brakes...................................................................5-17

Power button .....................................................................5-5

POWER button positions .............................................5-6

Starting the vehicle.......................................................5-8

Turning off the vehicle .................................................5-9

Power outlet ..................................................................3-127

Power steering.................................................................3-16

Power window lock switch.............................................3-41

Pre-tensioner seat belt.....................................................2-29

Puddle lamp ..................................................................3-101

Rear center seatbelt.........................................................2-32

Rear seat adjustment .......................................................2-12

Armrest .......................................................................2-15

Folding the rear seat ...................................................2-12

Rear seat head restraints .................................................2-19

Adjusting the height up and down .............................2-19

Removal/Reinstall ......................................................2-20

Rear seat warmers...........................................................2-22

Rear view camera .........................................................3-105

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ...................7-27

Recommended lubricants and capacities ..........................8-6

Reduction gear ................................................................5-10

Gear position ..............................................................5-10

Good driving practices ...............................................5-15

LCD display messages ...............................................5-12

Shift-lock system........................................................5-12

When the battery (12 V) is discharged ......................5-12

Refrigerent label ...............................................................8-8

Regenerative braking rate indicator................................3-57

Removable towing hook .................................................6-22

Replacement light bulb ...................................................7-55

Reporting safety defects .................................................8-10

Rocking the vehicle ........................................................5-89

Rotation (Tire) ................................................................7-29

Safety messages................................................................F-6

Scheduled maintenance services.......................................7-7

Seat belt warning light

Driver's seat ................................................................2-24

Front passenger's seat .................................................2-25

Seat belts .........................................................................2-23

Additional seat belt safety precautions ......................2-32

Care of seat belts ........................................................2-35

Do not lie down..........................................................2-34

Height adjustment ......................................................2-27

Keep belts clean and dry ............................................2-35

Lap/shoulder belt........................................................2-26

Index

S

P

R

I-11

One person per belt ....................................................2-34

Periodic inspection .....................................................2-35

Pre-tensioner seat belt ................................................2-29

Rear center seatbelt ....................................................2-32

Seat belt restraint system............................................2-25

Seat belt safety precautions........................................2-23

Seat belt use and children...........................................2-33

Seat belt use during pregnancy ..................................2-32

Seat belt warning light ...............................................2-24

Transporting an injured person ..................................2-34

When to replace seat belts..........................................2-35

Seat warmers

Front ...........................................................................2-20

Rear ............................................................................2-22

Seats ..................................................................................2-4

Battery cooling duct ...................................................2-22

Front seat adjustment ...................................................2-6

Front seat warmers .....................................................2-20

Head restraints............................................................2-16

Rear seat adjustment ..................................................2-12

Rear seat warmers ......................................................2-22

Safety precautions ........................................................2-5

Shift lever auto door lock ...............................................3-12

Shift-lock system ............................................................5-12

Side air bags....................................................................2-50

Side view mirrors............................................................3-34

Blind spot mirror ........................................................3-34

Smart key ..........................................................................3-3

Battery replacement......................................................3-7

Liftgate unlocking ........................................................3-5

Locking.........................................................................3-3

Mechanical key ............................................................3-6

Panic button..................................................................3-5

Unlocking .....................................................................3-4

Smooth cornering............................................................5-90

Snow tires .......................................................................5-92

SOC (State of Charge) gauge .........................................3-54

Special driving conditions

Driving at night ..........................................................5-90

Driving in flooded areas.............................................5-91

Driving in the rain ......................................................5-90

Hazardous driving conditions ....................................5-89

Highway driving.........................................................5-91

Rocking the vehicle....................................................5-89

Smooth cornering .......................................................5-90

Speed sensing door lock .................................................3-12

Speedometer....................................................................3-52

SPORT mode ..................................................................5-37

Steering wheel

Heated steering wheel ................................................3-17

Horn............................................................................3-17

Power steering ............................................................3-16

Power Steering (EPS).................................................3-16

Tilt steering/Telescope steering..................................3-16 I

Index

I-12

Steering wheel audio control ............................................4-3

Storage compartment ....................................................3-123

Center console storage .............................................3-123

Glove box .................................................................3-124

Sunglass holder ........................................................3-124

Multi box ..................................................................3-125

Sunglass holder .............................................................3-124

Sunroof............................................................................3-42

Automatic reverse ......................................................3-43

Resetting the sunroof..................................................3-45

Sliding the sunroof .....................................................3-43

Sunroof opening and closing......................................3-43

Sunshade.....................................................................3-44

Tilting the sunroof ......................................................3-44

Sunvisor ........................................................................3-126

Theft-alarm system .........................................................3-13

Tilt steering/Telescope steering ......................................3-16

Tire chains.......................................................................5-92

Tire Mobility Kit (TMK) ................................................6-14

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .......................6-8

Tire rotation ....................................................................7-29

Tire specification and pressure label ................................8-8

Tires and wheels .............................................................7-26

All season tires ...........................................................7-39

Checking tire inflation pressure .................................7-28

Low aspect ratio tires .................................................7-40

Radial-ply tires ...........................................................7-39

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ...............7-27

Snow tires ...................................................................7-39

Summer tires ..............................................................7-39

Tire care......................................................................7-26

Tire maintenance ........................................................7-31

Tire replacement.........................................................7-30

Tire rotation ................................................................7-29

Tire sidewall labeling .................................................7-31

Tire terminology and definitions................................7-35

Tire traction ................................................................7-31

Wheel alignment and tire balance..............................7-30

Wheel replacement .....................................................7-31

Towing ............................................................................6-21

Trip computer..................................................................3-90

Average fuel economy................................................3-91

Average vehicle speed................................................3-91

Digital speedometer....................................................3-92

Driving Info display ...................................................3-93

Energy flow ................................................................3-93

Instant fuel economy ..................................................3-91

Timer ..........................................................................3-91

Tripmeter ....................................................................3-91

Turn signals.....................................................................3-96

Index

T

I-13

User settings mode..........................................................3-84

Vanity mirror lamp........................................................3-101

Vehicle certification label .................................................8-7

Vehicle data collection and event data recorders .............F-8

Vehicle identification number (VIN) ................................8-7

Vehicle load limit ............................................................5-96

Tire loading information label....................................5-96

Vehicle modification.........................................................F-7

Vehicle Stability Management (VSM)............................5-33

Volume and weight ...........................................................8-5

Warning and indicator lights...........................................3-58

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) warning light ...........3-61

AUTO HOLD indicator light .....................................3-63

Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB) warning light ..........................................................3-64

Charging indicator light .............................................3-59

Charging system warning light ..................................3-62

Cruise indicator light..................................................3-67

Cruise SET indicator light..........................................3-67

ECO mode indicator light ..........................................3-68

Electric power steering (EPS) warning light .............3-62

Electronic brake force warning light..........................3-61

Electronic parking brake warning light......................3-63

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) indicator light.....3-65

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF indicator light..................................................3-66

High beam indicator light ..........................................3-67

High voltage battery low level warning light ............3-59

Immobilizer indicator light ........................................3-66

Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) warning light ...........................................................3-64

LED headlamp warning light .....................................3-64

Light ON indicator light.............................................3-67

Low tire pressure warning light .................................3-62

Master warning light ..................................................3-65

Parking brake & brake fluid warning light ................3-60

Power down warning light .........................................3-58

Ready indicator ..........................................................3-58

Regenerative brake warning light ..............................3-59

Seat belt warning light ...............................................3-59

Service warning light .................................................3-58

SPORT mode indicator light ......................................3-68

Supplemental restraint system warning light .............3-59

Turn signal indicator light ..........................................3-67

Warning light ..................................................................3-58

Washer fluid ....................................................................7-17 I

Index

U

V

W

I-14

Welcome system ...........................................................3-102

Door handle lamp.....................................................3-102

Headlamp and parking lamp ....................................3-102

Interior lamp.............................................................3-102

Puddle lamp..............................................................3-102

Wheel alignment and tire balance ..................................7-30

Wheel replacement .........................................................7-31

Windows .........................................................................3-38

Auto up/down window...............................................3-40

Automatic reverse ......................................................3-40

Power window lock switch ........................................3-41

Resetting the windows ...............................................3-40

Windshield defrosting and defogging...........................3-120

Windshield washers ......................................................3-104

Windshield wipers.........................................................3-103

Winter driving .................................................................5-92

Snow tires ...................................................................5-92

Tire chains ..................................................................5-92

Winter Precautions..........................................................5-94

Wiper blade replacement ................................................7-20

Wipers and washers ......................................................3-103

Windshield washers..................................................3-104

Windshield wipers ....................................................3-103

Wireless cellular phone charging system......................3-128

Index

Electric Vehicle System Overview

Electric Vehicle ........................................................H3 Characteristics of Electric Vehicles......................H3 Battery Information ................................................H3 Main Components of Electric Vehicle ..................H4 High Voltage Battery (lithium-ion polymer)........H5 High Voltage Battery Warmer System .................H6 EV Mode ...................................................................H7

Range .....................................................................................H7 Nearby by stations .............................................................H8 Energy Information ............................................................H8 ECO Driving...........................................................................H9 Charging and Climate Settings.........................................H9 EV Settings .........................................................................H10

Charging Information ............................................H12 Charging Time Information ..................................H12 Charging Types ......................................................H13 Charging Status .....................................................H14 Charging Connector AUTO/LOCK Mode ............H15

When the Charging Connector is Locked...................H15

Scheduled Charging...............................................H16 Charging Precautions............................................H17 Normal Charge .......................................................H19

How to Connect Normal Charger..................................H19 Unlock Charging Door in Emergency ..........................H22 Checking Charging Status...............................................H23 How to Disconnect Normal Charger ............................H24 Unlock Charging Connector in Emergency ................H25

Fast Charge ............................................................H26 How to Connect Fast Charger .......................................H26 Unlock Charging Door in Emergency ..........................H28 Checking Charging Status...............................................H28 How to Disconnect Fast Charger..................................H29

Trickle Charge ........................................................H30 How to Connect Portable Charger (ICCB: In-Cable Control Box)..........................................H30 Unlock Charging Door in Emergency ..........................H34 Checking Charging Status...............................................H34 Charging Status Indicator Lamp for Portable Charger...............................................................H36

How to Disconnect Portable Charger (ICCB: In-Cable Control Box)..........................................H39 Unlock Charging Connector in Emergency ................H40 Precautions for Portable Charger (ICCB: In-Cable Control Box)..........................................H40

How to Start the Vehicle ......................................H41 How to Stop the Vehicle.......................................H41 Virtual Engine Sound System ..............................H42 Distance to Empty .................................................H42

When destination is not set ...........................................H43 When destination is set...................................................H43

Tips for Improving Distance to Empty ...............H44 ECO Guide...............................................................H44 State of Charge (SOC) Gauge for High Voltage Battery ............................................H45 Warning and Indicator Lights (related to electric vehicle) .................................H45

Ready Indicator .................................................................H45 Service Warning Light .....................................................H46 Power Down Warning Light ...........................................H46 Charging Indicator Light..................................................H46 High Voltage Battery Level Warning Light.................H46 Regenerative Brake Warning Light ..............................H47

LCD Display Messages..........................................H47 Shift to P to charge .........................................................H47 Remaining time ..................................................................H47

Charging Door Open ........................................................H48 Charger Error! / Quick Charger Error!........................H48 Stop vehicle and check brakes .....................................H48 Check brakes......................................................................H49 Low Battery........................................................................H49 Charge immediately. Power limited ..............................H49 Low Battery. Charge immediately.................................H50 Low Battery Temp. Power limited.................................H50 Battery Overheated! Stop vehicle ................................H50 Power limited .....................................................................H51 Stop vehicle and check power supply.........................H51 Check Virtual Engine Sound System............................H52 Check electric vehicle system .......................................H52

Energy Flow ...........................................................H52 Vehicle Stop........................................................................H53 EV Propulsion ....................................................................H53 Regeneration......................................................................H53

Aux. Battery Saver+ .............................................H54 Mode ....................................................................................H54 System Setting...................................................................H55 LCD Message .....................................................................H55

If an Accident Occurs ...........................................H56 Other Precautions for Electric Vehicle ..............H58 Service Plug ...........................................................H59

H3

Electric Vehicle An electric vehicle is driven using a battery and an electric motor. While general vehicles use an internal combustion engine and gasoline as fuel, electric vehicles use electrical energy that is charged inside the high voltage battery. As a result, electric vehicles are eco-friendly in that they do not require fuel and do not emit exhaust gases.

Characteristics of Electric Vehicles 1. It is driven using the electrical

energy that is charged inside the high voltage battery. This method prevents air pollution since fuel, like gasoline, is not required, negating the emission of exhaust gases.

2. A high performance motor is used in the vehicle as well. Compared to standard, internal combustion engine vehicles, engine noise and vibrations are much more minimal when driving.

3. When decelerating or driving downhill, regenerative braking is utilized to charge the high voltage battery. This minimizes energy loss and increases the distance to empty.

4. When the battery charge is not sufficient, normal charge, quick charge and trickle charge are available. (Refer to "Charge Types for Electric Vehicle" for details.)

Information What does regenerative braking do?

It uses the electric motor when decel- erating or braking which transforms vehicle motion (kinetic energy) to elec- trical energy to charge the high volt- age batteries. (Torque is applied in the opposite direction when decelerating to generate braking force and electric energy.)

Battery Information The vehicle is composed of a high

voltage battery that drives the motor and air-conditioner, and an auxiliary battery (12 V) that drives the lamps, wipers, and audio sys- tem.

The auxiliary battery is automati- cally charged when the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode or the high voltage battery is being charged.

i

ELECTRIC VEHICLE

H4

MAIN COMPONENTS OF ELECTRIC VEHICLE

On-Board Charger (OBC) : External device (low speed) to charge the high voltage battery.

Inverter : Transforms direct current into alternate current to supply power to the motor, and transforms alternate current into direct current to charge the high voltage battery.

LDC : Transforms power from the high voltage battery to low voltage (12 V) to supply power to the vehicle (DC-DC).

On-Board Charger (OBC)

High Voltage Battery

EPCU (Inverter + LDC)

Motor

Reduction Gear

Main Components of Electric Vehicle Motor : Uses electrical energy

stored inside the high voltage bat- tery to drive the vehicle (functions like an engine in a standard vehi- cle).

Reduction Gear : Delivers rota- tional force of the motor to the tires at appropriate speeds and torque.

High voltage battery (lithium-ion polymer) : Stores and supplies power necessary for the electric vehicle to operate (12 V auxiliary battery provides power to the vehi- cle features such as lights and wipers).

OBC : On-Board Charger LDC : Low Voltage DC-DC Converter

OAEEQ016001

H5

High Voltage Battery (lithium- ion polymer)

The charge amount of the high voltage battery may gradually decrease when the vehicle is not driving.

The battery capacity of the high voltage battery may decrease when the vehicle is stored in high/low temperatures.

Distance to empty may vary depending on the driving condi- tions, even if the charge amount is the same. The high voltage battery may expend more energy when driving at high speed or uphill. These actions may reduce the dis- tance to empty.

The high voltage battery is used when using the air-conditioner / heater. This may reduce the dis- tance to empty. Make sure to set moderate temperatures when using the air-conditioner/heater.

Natural degradation may occur with the high voltage battery depending on the number of years the vehicle is used. This may reduce the distance to empty.

When the charge capacity and dis- tance to empty keep falling, con- tact an authorized HYUNDAI deal- er for inspection and maintenance.

Do not intentionally remove or disassemble high voltage components and high voltage battery connectors and wires. Also, be careful not to dam- age high voltage components and the high voltage battery. It may cause serious injury and significantly impact the per- formance and durability of the vehicle.

When inspection and mainte- nance is required for high volt- age components and the high voltage battery, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

OAEEQ016002

H6

If the vehicle will not be in use for an extended period of time, charge the high voltage battery once every three months to prevent it from dis- charging. Also, if the charge amount is not enough, immediate- ly charge to full and store the vehi- cle.

Normal charge is recommended to keep the high voltage battery in optimal condition. If the high voltage battery charge amount is below 20%, you can keep the high voltage battery per- formance in optimal condition if you charge the high voltage battery to 100%. (Once a month or more is recommended.)

High Voltage Battery Warmer System The high voltage battery warmer system prevents reduction of battery output when battery temperature is low. If the charging connector is con- nected, the warmer system automat- ically operate according to the bat- tery temperature. Charging time may shorten compare to vehicles without the high voltage battery warmer system. But, electric- ity charge may increase because of high voltage battery warmer system operation.

Make sure to use a designated charger when charging the high voltage battery. Using dif- ferent types of chargers may have a serious impact on vehi- cle durability.

Make sure that the high volt- age battery charger gauge does not reach ''L (Low)". If the vehicle is kept at ''L (Low)" for a long period, it may damage the high voltage battery and the high voltage battery may have to be replaced depending on the level of degradation.

If the vehicle is in a collision, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer to inspect whether the high voltage battery is still con- nected.

CAUTION

The high voltage battery warmer system operates when the charg- ing connector is connected to the vehicle. However, the high voltage warmer system may not operate when battery temperature drops below -31F (-35C).

CAUTION

MAIN COMPONENTS OF ELECTRIC VEHICLE (CONT.)

H7

EV Mode (if equipped)

If you select the "EV" menu at the AVN home screen or press the "EV" button on the right side of the air- conditioning button panel, you can enter EV mode. For details on EV Mode, refer to the Multimedia manual that is provided separately.

The EV mode has a total of 7 menus Range, Nearby Stations, Energy Information, Drive Mode Settings, ECO Driving, Charging/Climate Settings and EV Settings.

Range

EV MODE

OAEEQ016003L Description

1 Reachable areas

2 Risky areas (depending on circumstances)

3 Unreachable areas

H8

EV MODE (CONT.)

Nearby by stations

Stations around the current location are searched. Depending on the symbol color of the station, it is cate- gorized as Reachable, Risky and Unreachable.

Energy Information

You can check battery information and electricity use.

Battery Information

You can check the reachable range, total battery power remaining, and expected charging time for each charge type.

Energy Consumption Power that is consumed by the drive- train, climate and electrical compo- nents are displayed.

You can check the current reachable range and range when climate is turned off.

H9

ECO Driving

You can check ECO level information and ECO driving history.

ECO Level

A total of 8 ECO levels and the aver- age energy consumption are dis- played depending on vehicle driving style.

Driving History

You can check the date (1), distance (2), and the fuel economy (3) rating of the previous driving trips. The date with the highest ECO level is marked with a star shaped icon.

Charging and Climate Settings

You can set the date and time of when to charge the battery and the climate control temperature. Two separate schedules can be set. Also, you may select the time to start charging using the Off-peak Time.

H10

EV MODE (CONT.)

Set Departure and Climate Off-peak Time Settings

EV Settings

Warning

You can select or deselect the Range Warning.

- Range Warning : If the destination set in the navigation cannot be reached with the. remaining battery, a warning message is displayed.

Description

1 Set anticipated departure time after charging

2 Set temperature inside the vehicle

3 Select the day of the week you wish to charge your vehicle

Description

1

If selected, starts charging only on the designated off-peak time

If deselected, starts charging only on the scheduled time

2 Set the most inexpensive time to start charging

3 Set the most inexpensive time to complete charging

H11

Charging Current

You can adjust the current levels for Normal charging. Select an appropri- ate current level for normal chargers or portable chargers that is used. If the normal charging process does not start or abruptly stops in the mid- dle, re-select another proper level and re-try charging the vehicle.

Information If a lower current level is selected, the charging time will take longer.

EV Route

You can check the distance to empty of your vehicle from the starting point and to the destination you have set in the navigation.

i

H12

Charging Information Normal Charge :

The electric vehicle is charged by plugging into a normal charger installed in your home or a public charging station. (For further details, refer to the 'Normal Charge'.)

Fast Charge (if equipped): You can charge at high speeds at public charging stations. Refer to the respective company's manual that is provided for each fast charg- er type. Battery performance and durability can deteriorate if the fast charger is used constantly. Use of fast charge should be mini- mized in order to help prolong high voltage battery life.

Trickle Charge : The Electric vehicle can be charged by using household electricity. The electrical outlet in your home must comply with regulations and can safely accommodate the Voltage / Current (Amps) / Power (Watts) rat- ings specified on the portable charge.

Charging Time Information Normal Charge :

Takes about 4 hours 25 minutes at room temperature. (Can be charged to 100%.)

Fast Charge (if equipped): - 50 kw charger : Takes about 30

minutes at room temperature when charged to 80%.

- 100 kw charger : Takes about 23 minutes at room temperature when charged to 80%. Both 50/100 kw charger can be charged to 94%.

Trickle Charge : Takes about 24 hours at room tem- perature. (120V-12A) (Can be charged to 100%.)

Information Depending on the condition and dura- bility of the high voltage battery, charger specifications, and ambient temperature, the time required for charging the high voltage battery may vary.

i

CHARGE TYPES FOR ELECTRIC VEHICLE

H13

Charging Types

Category Charging Inlet (Vehicle) Charging Connector Charging Outlet How to Charge Charging Time

Normal Charge

Use normal charger installed in homes or public charging station

Approx. 4 hours 25 minutes (to fully charge, 100%)

Fast Charge (if equipped)

Use the fast charger at public charging station

50 kw : approx.30 min. 100 kw : approx.23 min. (to charge 80%)

Trickle Charge

Use household current

Approx. 24 hours (120V-12A, to fully charge, 100%)

Depending on the condition and durability of the high voltage battery, charger specifications, and ambient temperature, the time required for charging the high voltage battery may vary.

Actual charger image and charging method may vary in accordance with the charger manufacturer.

OLFP0Q5006KOAEEQ016020N

OAEEQ016021N

OAEEQ016020N

OAEEQ016079N OAEEQ016023

OAEEQ016024

OLFP0Q4057N

OLFP0Q5006K

H14

CHARGE INDICATOR LAMP FOR ELECTRIC VEHICLE

Charging Status

When charging the high voltage bat- tery, the charge level can be checked from outside the vehicle.

OAEEQ016025

Operation of Charging Indicator Lamp Details

(1) (2) (3)

(OFF) (OFF) (OFF) Not Charged

Blink (OFF) (OFF)

Charging

0~33%

(ON) Blink (OFF) 34~66%

(ON) (ON) Blink 67~99%

(ON) (ON) (ON) Fully charged (100%)(turns OFF in 5 seconds)

Blink Blink Blink Error while charging

(OFF) (OFF) Blink Charging 12 V auxiliary battery or scheduled air condi-

tioner is operating

(OFF) Blink (OFF) Scheduled charging is operating

(turns OFF after 3 minutes)

H15

Charging Connector AUTO / LOCK Mode

You may select when the charging connector can be locked and unlocked in the charging inlet. Press the button to change between AUTO mode and LOCK mode.

When the Charging Connector is Locked

LOCK mode (button indicator off) : The connector locks when the charging connector is plugged into the charging inlet. The connector is locked until all doors are unlocked by the driver. This mode can be used to prevent charging cable theft. - If the charging connector is

unlocked when all doors are unlocked, but the charging cable is not disconnected within 10 sec- onds, the connector will be auto- matically locked again.

- If the charging connector is unlocked when all doors are unlocked, but all doors are locked again, immediately, the connector will be automatically locked again.

AUTO mode (button indicator on) : The connector locks when charg- ing starts. The connector unlocks when charging is complete. This mode can be used when charging in a public charging station.

CHARGING CONNECTOR LOCK

OAEEQ016059

LOCK AUTO

Before charging O X

While charging O O

Finished charging O X

H16

Scheduled Charging (if equipped) You can set-up a charging sched-

ule for your vehicle using the AVN or BlueLink application. Refer to the Multimedia manual or the BlueLink manual for detailed information about setting sched- uled charging.

Scheduled charging can only be done when using a normal charger or the portable charger (ICCB: In- Cable Control Box). When scheduled charging is set

and the normal charger or the portable charger (ICCB: In-Cable Control Box) is connected for charging, the indicator lamp in the middle blinks (for 3 minutes) to indicate that scheduled charging is set.

When scheduled charging is set, charging is not initiated immediate- ly when the normal charger or portable charger (ICCB: In-Cable Control Box) is connected. When immediate charging is required, use the AVN to deactivate the scheduled charge setting or press scheduled charging deactivation ( ) button.

If you press the scheduled charg- ing deactivation ( ) button to immediately charge the battery, charging must be initiated 3 min- utes after the charging cable has been connected. When you press the scheduled charging deactivation ( ) button for immediate charging, the sched- uled charge setting is not com- pletely deactivated. If you need to completely deactivate the sched- uled charge setting, use the AVN to finalize the deactivation.

Refer to "Normal Charge or Trickle Charge" for details about connecting the normal charger and the portable charger (ICCB: In-Cable Control Box).

OAEEQ016026

SCHEDULED CHARGING

OAEEQ016027

H17

Charging Precautions

Actual charger image and charg- ing method may vary in accor- dance with the charger manufac- turer.

Electromagnetic waves that are generated from the charg- er can seriously impact med- ical electric devices such as an implantable cardiac pace- maker. When using medical electric devices such as an implantable cardiac pacemaker, make sure to ask the medical team and manufacturer whether charg- ing your electric vehicle will impact the operation of the medical electric devices such as an implantable cardiac pacemaker.

Check to make sure there is no water or dust on the charg- ing cable connector and plug before connecting to the charger and charging inlet. Connecting while there is water or dust on the charging cable connector and plug may cause a fire or electric shock.

WARNING

Be careful not to touch the charging connector, charging plug, and the charging inlet when connecting the cable to the charger and the charging inlet on the vehicle.

Comply with the following in order to prevent electrical shock when charging: - Use a waterproof charger. - Be careful when touching

the charging connector and charging plug with your hands wet, or when standing in water or snow while con- necting the charging cable.

- Be careful when there is lightning.

- Be careful when the charg- ing connector and plug is wet.

WARNING

PRECAUTIONS FOR CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE

OAEEQ016023

Fast Charger

OLFP0Q4057N

Normal Charger

H18

Immediately stop charging when you find abnormal symptoms (odor, smoke).

Replace the charging cable if the cable coating is damaged to prevent electrical shock.

When connecting or removing the charging cable, make sure to hold the charging connec- tor handle and charging plug. If you pull the cable itself (without using the handle), the internal wires may disconnect or get damaged.This may lead to electric shock or fire.

WARNING

Always keep the charging con- nector and charging plug in clean and dry condition. Be sure to keep the charging cable in a condition where there is no water or moisture.

Make sure to use the designat- ed charger for charging the electric vehicle. Using any other charger may cause fail- ure.

Before charging the battery, turn the vehicle OFF.

When the vehicle is switched OFF while charging, the cool- ing fan inside the motor com- partment may automatically operate. Do not touch the cool- ing fan while charging.

Be careful not to drop the charging connector. The charging connector can be damaged.

CAUTION

PRECAUTIONS FOR CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE (CONT.)

H19

Normal Charge

Actual charger image and charg- ing method may vary in accor- dance with the charger manufac- turer.

How to Connect Normal Charger 1. Depress the brake pedal and

apply the parking brake. 2. Turn OFF all switches, shift to P

(Park), and turn OFF the vehicle. If charging is initiated without the gear in P (Park), the charging will start after the gear is automatical- ly shifted to P (Park).

3. Press the charging door open but- ton ( ) to open the charging door.

CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE (NORMAL CHARGE)

OAEEQ016063N

OLFP0Q4057N

Normal Charger

H20

CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE (NORMAL CHARGE) (CONT.)

4. If you cannot open the charging door due to freezing weather : 1) Remove any ice near the

charging door. 2) Pull the emergency cable to

open the charging door. (When the charging door does not open, refer to "How to Unlock Charging Door in Emergencies.")

5. Remove the charging inlet cover (1).

6. Check if there is dust on the charging connector and charging inlet.

7. Hold the charging connector han- dle and connect it to the vehicle normal charging inlet. Push the connector until you hear a "click- ing" sound. If the charging con- nector and charging terminal are not connected properly, this may cause a fire.

Information Charging connector AUTO/LOCK mode

The charging connector is locked in the inlet at a different period accord- ing to which mode is selected.

LOCK mode : The connector locks when the charging connector is plugged into the charging inlet.

AUTO mode : The connector locks when charging starts.

For more details, refer to "Charging Connector AUTO/LOCK Mode" in this chapter.

i

OAEEQ016064N

H21

8. Connect the charging plug to the electric outlet at a normal charging station to start charging.

9. Check if the charging indicator light of the high voltage battery in the instrument cluster is turned ON. Charging is not done when the charging indicator lamp is OFF. When the charging connector and charging plug are not connected properly, reconnect the charging cable to charge.

Information Even though charging is possible

with the POWER button in the ON/START position, for your safe- ty, start charging when the POWER button is in the OFF position and the vehicle shifted to P (Park). After charging has started, you can use electrical components such as the radio by pressing the POWER but- ton to the ACC or ON position.

During normal charging, the radio reception may be bad.

During charging, the gear cannot be shifted from P (Park) to any other gear.

i

OAEEQ016032OLFP0Q4057N

Normal Charger

H22

CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE (NORMAL CHARGE) (CONT.)

10. After charging has started, the estimated charging time is dis- played on the instrument cluster for about 1 minute. If you open the driver seat door while charging, the estimated charging time is also displayed on the instrument cluster for about 1 minute. When scheduled charging is set, the estimated charging time is displayed as "--".

Information Depending on the condition and dura- bility of the high voltage battery, charger specifications, and ambient temperature, the time required for charging the battery may vary.

Unlock Charging Door in Emergency

If the charging door does not open due to battery discharge and failure of the electric wires, open the liftgate and slightly pull the emergency cable as shown above. The charging door will then open.

i

OAEE046010

OAEE046193L

H23

Checking Charging Status

When charging the high voltage bat- tery, the charge level can be checked from outside the vehicle.

OAEEQ016025

Operation of Charging Indicator Lamp Details

(1) (2) (3)

(OFF) (OFF) (OFF) Not Charged

Blink (OFF) (OFF)

Charging

0~33%

(ON) Blink (OFF) 34~66%

(ON) (ON) Blink 67~99%

(ON) (ON) (ON) Fully charged (100%) (turns OFF in 5 seconds)

Blink Blink Blink Error while charging

(OFF) (OFF) Blink Charging 12 V auxiliary battery or scheduled air condi-

tioner is operating

(OFF) Blink (OFF) Scheduled charging is operating

(turns OFF after 3 minutes)

H24

How to Disconnect Normal Charger

1. When charging is complete, remove the charging plug from the electrical outlet of the normal charging station.

2. Hold the charging connector han- dle and pull it while pressing the release button (1).

Information To prevent charging cable theft, the charging connector cannot be discon- nected from the inlet when the doors are locked. Unlock all doors to discon- nect the charging connector from the inlet.

However, if the vehicle is in the charg- ing connector AUTO mode, the charg- ing connector automatically unlocks from the inlet when charging is com- pleted.

For more details, refer to "Charging Connector AUTO/LOCK Mode" in this chapter.

i

OAEEQ016033N

CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE (NORMAL CHARGE) (CONT.)

OLFP0Q4057N

Normal Charger

H25

3. Make sure to install the charging inlet cover.

4. Make sure to completely close the charging door.

Unlock Charging Connector in Emergency

If the charging connector does not disconnect due to battery discharge and failure of the electric wires, open the liftgate and slightly pull the emer- gency cable. The charging connector will then disconnect.

OAEEQ016034N

OAEEQ016057L

H26

Fast Charge (if equipped)

You can charge at high speeds at public charging stations. Refer to the respective company's manual that is provided for each fast charger type. Battery performance and durability can deteriorate if the fast charger is used constantly. Use of fast charge should be mini- mized in order to help prolong high voltage battery life.

Actual charger image and charg- ing method may vary in accor- dance with the charger manufac- turer.

Information If you use a fast charger when the vehicle is already fully charged, some quick chargers will send out an error message. When the vehicle is fully charged, do not charge the vehicle.

How to Connect Fast Charger

1. Depress the brake pedal and apply the parking brake.

2. Turn OFF all switches, shift to P (Park), and turn OFF the vehicle.

3. Press the charging door open but- ton ( ) to open the charging door.

i

CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE (FAST CHARGE)

OAEEQ016023

Fast Charger

OAEEQ016063N

H27

4. If you cannot open the charging door due to freezing weather : 1) Remove any ice near the

charging door. 2) Pull the emergency cable to

open the charging door. (When the charging door does not open, refer to "How to Unlock Charging Door in Emergencies.")

5. Remove the charging inlet cover (1).

6. Check whether there is dust or for- eign substances inside the charg- ing connector and charging inlet.

7. Hold the charging connector han- dle and connect it to the vehicle quick charging inlet. Push the con- nector until you hear a "clicking" sound. If the charging connector and charging terminal are not con- nected properly, this may cause a fire. Refer to the manual for each type of fast charger for how to charge and remove the charger.

8. Check if the charging indicator light of the high voltage battery in the instrument cluster is turned ON. Charging is not done when the charging indicator lamp is OFF. When the charging connector is not connected properly, reconnect the charging cable to charge it again. During cold weather, fast charging may not be available to prevent high voltage battery degradation.

OAEEQ016065N OAEEQ016032

H28

CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE (FAST CHARGE) (CONT.)

Information Even though charging is possible

with the POWER button in the ON/START position, for your safe- ty, start charging when the POWER button is in the OFF position and the vehicle shifted to P (Park).

After charging has started, you can use electrical components such as the radio by pressing the POWER button to ACC or ON position.

During charging, the gear cannot be shifted from P (Park) to any other gear.

Unlock Charging Door in Emergency

If the charging door does not open due to battery discharge and failure of the electric wires, open the liftgate and slightly pull the emergency cable as shown above. The charging door will then open.

Checking Charging Status

When charging the high voltage bat- tery, the charge level can be checked from outside the vehicle.

Information Depending on the condition and dura- bility of the high voltage battery, charger specifications, and ambient temperature, the time required for charging the battery may vary.

i

i

OAEEQ016025

OAEE046010

H29

How to Disconnect Fast Charger 1. Remove the charging connector

when fast charging is completed, or after you stop charging using the fast charger. Refer to each respective fast charger manual for details about how to disconnect the charging connector.

2. Make sure to install the charging inlet cover.

3. Make sure to completely close the charging door.

OAEEQ016034N

Operation of Charging Indicator Lamp Details

(1) (2) (3)

(OFF) (OFF) (OFF) Not Charged

Blink (OFF) (OFF)

Charging

0~33%

(ON) Blink (OFF) 34~66%

(ON) (ON) Blink 67~99%

(ON) (ON) (ON) Fully charged (100%) (turns OFF in 5 seconds)

Blink Blink Blink Error while charging

(OFF) (OFF) Blink Charging 12 V auxiliary battery or scheduled air condi-

tioner is operating

(OFF) Blink (OFF) Scheduled charging is operating

(turns OFF after 3 minutes)

H30

Trickle Charge

(1) Code and Plug (Code set) (2) Control Box (3) Charging Cable and Charging

Connector

Trickle Charge can be used when Normal Charge or Fast Charge is not available by using household elec- tricity.

How to Connect Portable Charger (ICCB: In-Cable Control Box)

1. Connect the plug to a household electric outlet.

2. Check if the power lamp (green) illuminates on the control box.

CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE (TRICKLE CHARGE)

OAEEQ016042

OAEE046506N

Plug Electric Outlet OAEEQ016043

Portable Charger

H31

3. Depress the brake pedal and apply the parking brake.

4. Turn OFF all switches, shift to P (Park), and turn OFF the vehicle. If charging is initiated without the gear in P (Park), the charging will start after the gear is automatical- ly shifted to P (Park).

5. Press the charging door open but- ton ( ) to open the charging door.

6. If you cannot open the charging door due to freezing weather : 1) Remove any ice near the

charging door. 2) Pull the emergency cable to

open the charging door. (When the charging door does not open, refer to "How to Unlock Charging Door in Emergencies.")

OAEEQ016063N

H32

CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE (TRICKLE CHARGE) (CONT.)

7. Remove the charging inlet cover (1).

8. Check if there is dust on the charging connector and charging inlet.

9. Hold the charging connector han- dle and connect it to the vehicle normal charging inlet. Push the connector until you hear a "click- ing" sound. If the charging con- nector and charging terminal are not connected properly, this may cause a fire.

Information Charging connector AUTO/LOCK mode

The charging connector is locked in the inlet at a different period accord- ing to which mode is selected.

LOCK mode : The connector locks when the charging connector is plugged into the charging inlet.

AUTO mode : The connector locks when charging starts.

For more details, refer to "Charging Connector AUTO/LOCK Mode" in this chapter.

10. Charging starts automatically (charging lamp blinks).

i

OAEEQ016045OAEEQ016064N

H33

11. Check if the charging indicator light of the high voltage battery in the instrument cluster is turned ON. Charging is not done when the charging indicator lamp is OFF. When the charging connector is not connected properly, recon- nect the charging cable to charge it again.

Information Even though charging is possible

with the POWER button in the ON/START position, for your safe- ty, start charging when the POWER button is in the OFF position and the vehicle shifted to P (Park).

After charging has started, you can use electrical components such as the radio by pressing the POWER button to ACC or ON position.

During charging, the gear cannot be shifted from P (Park) to any other gear.

12. After charging has started, the estimated charging time is dis- played on the instrument cluster for about 1 minute. If you open the driver seat door while charging, the estimated charging time is also displayed on the instrument cluster for about 1 minute. When scheduled charging is set, the estimated charging time is displayed as "--".

i

OAEE046193LOAEEQ016032

H34

CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE (TRICKLE CHARGE) (CONT.)

Information Depending on the condition and dura- bility of the high voltage battery, charger specifications, and ambient temperature, the time required for charging the battery may vary.

Unlock Charging Door in Emergency

If the charging door does not open due to battery discharge and failure of the electric wires, open the liftgate and slightly pull the emergency cable as shown above. The charging door will then open.

Checking Charging Status

When charging the high voltage bat- tery, the charge level can be checked from outside the vehicle.

i

OAEE046010

OAEEQ016025

H35

Operation of Charging Indicator Lamp Details

(1) (2) (3)

(OFF) (OFF) (OFF) Not Charged

Blink (OFF) (OFF)

Charging

0~33%

(ON) Blink (OFF) 34~66%

(ON) (ON) Blink 67~99%

(ON) (ON) (ON) Fully charged (100%) (turns OFF in 5 seconds)

Blink Blink Blink Error while charging

(OFF) (OFF) Blink Charging 12 V auxiliary battery or scheduled air condi-

tioner is operating

(OFF) Blink (OFF) Scheduled charging is operating

(turns OFF after 3 minutes)

H36

CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE (TRICKLE CHARGE) (CONT.)

Charging Status Indicator Lamp for Portable Charger

Control Box Indicator Details

PLUG

On : Power on Blink : Plug temperature sensor failure

On : Plug high temperature protection Blink : Plug high temperature warning

POWER On : Power on

CHARGE Blink : Charging In power saving mode, only the CHARGE indicator is illuminated.

FAULT Blink : Charging interrupted

CHARGE LEVEL

Charging current 12 A The charging current changes (3 level) whenever the button (1) is pressed for 1 sec with the charger plugged into an electri- cal outlet but not the vehicle.

Charging current 10 A

Charging current 8 A

VEHICLE

Charging connector plugged

Charging

Blink : Charging impossible

(Green)

(Green)

(Blue)

(Red)

(Red)

Back of the control box

H37

Charging Status Indicator Lamp for Portable Charger

NO Control Box Status / Diagnosis / Countermeasure NO Control Box Status / Diagnosis / Countermeasure

1

Charging connector plugged into vehicle (Green ON)

Plug temperature sensor failure (Green blink)

Plug high temperature protection (Red blink)

Plug high temperature warning (Red ON)

Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

2 - Charging connector plugged into

vehicle (Green ON)

3

- While charging Charge indicator (Green blink) Vehicle indicator (Blue ON)

4

- Before plugging charging connector into vehicle (Red blink) Abnormal temperature ICCB (In-Cable Control Box) failure

Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

H38

CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE (TRICKLE CHARGE) (CONT.)

NO Control Box Status / Diagnosis / Countermeasure NO Control Box Status / Diagnosis / Countermeasure

5

- Plugged into vehicle (Red blink) Diagnostic device failure Current leakage Abnormal temperature

Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

6

- After plugging charging connector into vehicle (Red blink) Communication failure

Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

7

Plug temperature sensor failure (Green blink)

Plug high temperature protection (Red blink)

Plug high temperature warning (Red ON)

Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

8

- Power saving mode 3 minutes after charging starts

(Green blink)

H39

1. Hold the charging connector han- dle and pull it while pressing the release button (1).

Information To prevent charging cable theft, the charging connector cannot be discon- nected from the inlet when the doors are locked. Unlock all doors to discon- nect the charging connector from the inlet. However, if the vehicle is in the charging connector AUTO mode, the charging connector automatically unlocks from the inlet when charging is completed. For more details, refer to "Charging Connector AUTO/LOCK Mode" in this chapter.

2. Make sure to install the charging inlet cover.

3. Make sure to completely close the charging door.

4. Disconnect the plug from the household electric outlet. Do not pull the cable when disconnecting the plug.

5. Close the protective cover for the charging connector so that foreign material cannot get into the termi- nal.

6. Put the charging cable inside the cable compartment to protect it.

i

OAEEQ016033N OAEEQ016034N OAEE046507N

Plug Electric Outlet

How to Disconnect Portable Charger (ICCB: In-Cable Control Box)

H40

CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE (TRICKLE CHARGE) (CONT.)

Unlock Charging Connector in Emergency

If the charging connector does not disconnect due to battery discharge and failure of the electric wires, open the liftgate and slightly pull the emer- gency cable. The charging connector will then disconnect .

Precautions for Portable Charger (ICCB: In-Cable Control Box) Use the portable charger that is

certified by HYUNDAI Motors. Do not try to repair, disassemble,

or adjust the portable charger. Do not use an extension cord or

adapter. Stop using immediately when fail-

ure occurs. Do not touch the plug and charging

connector with wet hands. Do not touch the terminal part of

the normal charging connector and the normal charging inlet on the vehicle.

Do not connect the charging con- nector to voltage that does not comply with regulations.

Do not use the portable charger if it is worn out, exposed, or there exists any type of damage on the portable charger.

If the ICCB case and normal charg- ing connector is damaged, cracked, or the wires are exposed in any way, do not use the portable charger.

Do not let children operate or touch the portable charger.

Keep the control box free of water. Keep the normal charging connec-

tor or plug terminal free of foreign substances.

Do not step on the cable or cord. Do not pull the cable or cord and do not twist or bend it.

Do not charge when there is light- ning.

Do not drop the control box or place a heavy object on the control box.

Do not place an object that can generate high temperatures near the charger when charging.

Charging with the worn out or dam- aged household electric outlet can result in a risk of electric shock. If you are in doubt to the household electric outlet condition, have it checked by a licensed electrician.

Stop using the portable charger immediately if the household elec- tric outlet or any components is overheated or you notice burnt odors.

OAEEQ016057L

H41

How to Start the Vehicle 1. Holding the smart key, sit in the

driver's seat. 2. Fasten the seat belt before start-

ing the vehicle. 3. Make sure to engage the parking

brake. 4. Turn OFF all electrical devices. 5. Make sure to depress and hold

the brake pedal. 6. While depressing the brake

pedal, shift to P (Park). 7. Depress and hold the brake while

pressing the POWER button.

8. When the " " indicator is ON, you can drive the vehicle. When the " " indicator is OFF, you cannot drive the vehicle. Start the vehicle again.

9. Depress and hold the brake pedal and shift to the desired position.

Information While the charging cable is connected, the gear cannot be shift from P (Park) to any other gear for safety reasons.

10.Release the parking brake and slowly release the brake pedal. Check if the vehicle slowly moves forward, then depress the accel- erator pedal.

How to Stop the Vehicle 1. Hold down the brake pedal while

the vehicle is parked. 2. While depressing the brake pedal,

shift to P (Park). 3. While depressing the brake pedal,

engage the parking brake. 4. While depressing the brake pedal,

press the POWER button and turn off the vehicle.

i

DRIVING ELECTRIC VEHICLE

OAEEQ016054

H42

DRIVING ELECTRIC VEHICLE (CONT.)

5. Check if the " " indicator is turned OFF on the instrument cluster. When the " " indicator is ON and the gear is in a position other than P (Park), the driver can acci- dently depress the accelerator pedal, causing the vehicle to move unexpectedly.

Virtual Engine Sound System The Virtual Engine Sound System generates engine sound for pedestri- ans to hear vehicle sound because there is no sound while the Electric Vehicle (EV) is operating. If the vehicle is moving at low

speed, the VESS will operate. When the gear is shifted to R

(Reverse), an additional warning sound will be heard.

Distance to Empty

The distance to empty is displayed differently according to the selected drive mode in the Drive Mode Integrated Control System. For more information, refer to "Drive Mode Integrated Control System" in chapter 5.

OAEEQ016055

The vehicle does not generate a sound. Be aware of your driving environment and drive safely.

After you park the vehicle or while you are waiting at a traf- fic light, check whether there are children or obstacles around the vehicle.

Check if there is something behind the vehicle when driv- ing in reverse. Pedestrians may not hear the sound of the vehicle.

CAUTION OAEE046141N/OAEE046503N

NORMAL/ ECO mode selected

SPORT mode selected

H43

When destination is not set On average, a vehicle can drive

about 120 miles (191 km). Under certain circumstances where the air conditioner/heater is ON, the distance to empty is impacted, resulting in a possible distance range from 80~180 miles (130~290 km). When using the heater during cold weather or driv- ing at high speed, the high voltage battery consumes a lot more elec- tricity. This may reduce the dis- tance to empty significantly.

After "---" has been displayed, the vehicle can drive an additional 2~5 miles (3~8 km) depending on driv- ing speed, heater/air conditioner, weather, driving style, and other factors.

Distance to empty that is displayed on the instrument cluster after completing a recharge may vary significantly depending on previ- ous operating patterns. When previous driving patterns include high speed driving, result- ing in the high voltage battery using more electricity than usual, the estimated distance to empty is reduced. When the high voltage battery uses little electricity in ECO mode, the estimated distance to empty increases.

Distance to empty may depend on many factors such as the charge amount of the high voltage battery, weather, temperature, durability of the battery, geographical features, and driving style.

Natural degradation may occur with the high voltage battery depending on the number of years the vehicle is used. This may reduce the distance to empty.

When destination is set When the destination is set, the dis- tance to empty may change. The dis- tance to empty is recalculated using the information of the destination. However, the distance to empty may vary significantly based on traffic conditions, driving habits, and condi- tion of the vehicle.

H44

DRIVING ELECTRIC VEHICLE (CONT.)

Tips for Improving Distance to Empty If you operate the air conditioner

/heater too much, the driving battery uses too much electricity. This may reduce the distance to empty. Therefore, it is recommended that you set the cabin temperature to 73F (23C) AUTO. This setting that has been certified by various assessment tests to maintain opti- mal energy consumption rates while keeping the temperature fresh. Turn OFF the heater and air condi- tioner if you do not need them.

Depress and hold the accelerator pedal to maintain speed and drive economically.

Gradually depress and release the accelerator pedal when accelerat- ing or decelerating.

Always maintain specified tire pressures.

Do not use unnecessary electrical components while driving.

Do not load unnecessary items in the vehicle.

Do not mount parts that may increase air resistance.

ECO Guide

The ECO guide shows the energy consumption rate of the vehicle and the charge/discharge status of the regenerative brakes. POWER : It shows the energy consumption rate of the vehicle when driving uphill or accelerating. The more electric ener- gy is used, the higher the gauge level.

ECO : It shows the energy consumption rate during normal driving condition.

CHARGE : It shows the charging status of the battery when it is being charged by the regenerative brakes (decelerat- ing or driving on a downhill road). The more electric energy is charged, the lower the gauge level.

OAEQ046008

H45

State of Charge (SOC) Gauge for High Voltage Battery

The SOC gauge shows the charg- ing status of the high voltage bat- tery. "L (Low)" position on the indicator indicates that there is not enough energy in the high voltage battery. "H (High)" position indicates that the driving battery is fully charged.

When driving on highways or motorways, make sure to check in advance if the driving battery is charged enough.

When there are 2~3 gauge bars (near the "L (Low)" area) on the SOC gauge, the warning lamp turns ON to alert you of the battery level. When the warning lamp turns ON, the vehicle can drive an additional 12~18 miles (20~30 km) depending on the driving speed, heater/air con- ditioner, weather, driving style, and other factors. Charging is required.

When there are 1-2 gauge bars left for the high voltage battery, the vehicle speed is limited and then eventually the vehicle will turn OFF. Charge the vehicle immediately.

Warning and Indicator Lights (related to electric vehicle) Ready Indicator

This indicator illuminates :

When the vehicle is ready to be driven. - ON : Normal driving is possible. - OFF : Normal driving is not possible,

or a problem has occurred. - Blinking : Emergency driving.

When the ready indicator goes OFF or blinks, there is a problem with the system. In this case, have your vehi- cle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

OAEE046144

OAEE046102

H46

DRIVING ELECTRIC VEHICLE (CONT.)

Service Warning Light

This warning light illuminates :

When the POWER button is in the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off. When there is a problem with relat-

ed parts of the electric vehicle con- trol system, such as sensors, etc.

When the warning light illuminates while driving, or does not go OFF after starting the vehicle, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Power Down Warning Light

This warning light illuminates :

When the power is limited for the safety of the electric vehicle. The power is limited for the following reasons. - The high voltage battery level is

below a certain level or voltage is decreasing

- The temperature of the motor or high voltage battery is too high or too low

- There is a problem with the cooling system, or a failure that may inter- rupt normal driving

Do not accelerate or start the vehi- cle suddenly when the power down warning light is ON. Charge the battery immediately when the high voltage battery level is not enough.

Charging Indicator Light

This warning light illuminates :

[Red] When charging the high volt- age battery.

High Voltage Battery Level Warning Light

This warning light illuminates :

When the high voltage battery level low. When the warning light turns ON, charge the battery immediately.

NOTICE

H47

Regenerative Brake Warning Light

This warning light illuminates :

When the regenerative brake does not operate and the brake does not perform well. This causes the Brake Warning light (red) and Regenerative Brake Warning Light (yellow) to illu- minate simultaneously. In this case, drive safely and have your vehicle inspected by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer. The operation of the brake pedal may be more difficult than normal and the braking distance can increase.

LCD Display Messages Shift to P to charge

This message is displayed if you connect the charging cable without the gear in the P (Park) position. Shift to P (Park) before connecting the charging cable.

Remaining time

This message is displayed to notify the remaining time to fully charge the battery.

(yellow)

OAEE046192L

OAEE046193L

H48

DRIVING ELECTRIC VEHICLE (CONT.)

Charging Door Open

This message is displayed when the vehicle is driven with the charging door opened. Close the charging door and then start driving.

Charger Error! / Quick Charger Error!

This warning message is displayed when there is a problem with the charger.

Stop vehicle and check brakes

This warning message is displayed when a failure occurs in the brake system. In this case, park the vehicle in a safe location and recommend that you tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the vehicle inspected.

OAEE046134LOAEE046135L

OAEE046194L OLFH044234L

H49

Check brakes

This warning message is displayed when the brake performance is low or the regenerative brake does not work properly due to a failure in the brake system. In this case, it may take longer for the brake pedal to operate and the brak- ing distance may become longer.

Low Battery

When the high voltage battery level reaches below 13%, this warning message is displayed. The warning light on the instrument cluster ( ) will turn ON simultane- ously. Charge the high voltage battery immediately.

Charge immediately. Power limited

When the high voltage battery level reaches below 5%, this warning message is displayed. The warning light on the instrument cluster ( ) and the power down warning light ( ) will turn on simul- taneously. The vehicle's power will be reduced to minimize the energy consumption of the high voltage battery. Charge the battery immediately.

OAEE046123LOLFH044250L

OAEE046125L

H50

DRIVING ELECTRIC VEHICLE (CONT.)

Low Battery. Charge immediately

When the high voltage battery level reaches below 4%, this warning message is displayed. The warning light on the instrument cluster ( ) and the power down warning light ( ) will turn ON simul- taneously and the distance to empty gauge will be displayed as "---". The vehicles power will be reduced to minimize the energy consumption of the high voltage battery. Charge the battery immediately.

Low Battery Temp. Power limited

This warning message is displayed to protect battery and electric vehicle system when the high voltage bat- tery temperature is too low.

If this warning message is still dis- played even after the ambient tem- perature has increased, have the vehicle inspected by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer.

Battery Overheated! Stop vehicle

This warning message is displayed to protect battery and electric vehicle system when the high voltage bat- tery temperature is too high. Turn off the POWER button and stop the vehicle so that the battery tem- perature decreases.

NOTICE

OAEE046128L

OAEE046124L

OAEE046129L

H51

Power limited

In the following cases, this warning message is displayed when the vehi- cle's power is limited for safety. When the high voltage battery is

below a certain level, or voltage is decreasing.

When the temperature of the motor or high voltage battery is too high or too low.

When there is a problem with the cooling system or a failure that may interrupt normal driving.

When this warning message is displayed, do not accelerate or start the vehicle suddenly. Charge the battery immediately when the high voltage battery level is not enough.

Stop vehicle and check power supply

This warning message is displayed when a failure occurs in the power supply system. In this case, park the vehicle in a safe location and recommend that you tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the vehicle inspected.

NOTICE

OAEE046127L

OLFH044230L

H52

DRIVING ELECTRIC VEHICLE (CONT.)

Check Virtual Engine Sound System

This message is displayed when there is a problem with the Virtual Engine Sound System (VESS). In this case, have your vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Check electric vehicle system

This warning message is displayed when there is a problem with the electric vehicle control system. Refrain from driving when the warn- ing message is displayed. In this case, have your vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Energy Flow The electric vehicle system informs the drivers its energy flow in various operating modes. While driving, the current energy flow is specified in 3 modes.

OLFH044543L

OAEE046149L

H53

Vehicle Stop

The vehicle is stopped. (No energy flow)

EV Propulsion

Only the motor power is used to drive the vehicle. (Battery Wheel)

Regeneration

The high-voltage battery is charged up by the regenerative brake system. (Wheel Battery)

OAEQ046001L OAEQ046020L OAEQ046002L

H54

DRIVING ELECTRIC VEHICLE (CONT.)

Aux. Battery Saver+ The Aux. Battery Saver+ is a function that monitors the charging status of the 12 V auxiliary battery. If the auxiliary battery level is low, the main high voltage battery charges the auxiliary battery.

Information The Aux. Battery Saver+ function will be ON when the vehicle is delivered. If the function is not needed, you may turn it off in the Users Settings mode on the cluster. For more information, refer to the following page.

Mode Cycle Mode : When the POWER button is in the OFF or ACC position with all doors, hood and liftgate closed, the Aux. Battery Saver+ activates according to the auxiliary battery status. Automatic Mode : When the POWER button is in the ON position with the charging con- nector plugged in, the function acti- vates according to the auxiliary bat- tery status to prevent overdischarge of the auxiliary battery.

Information The Aux. Battery Saver+ activates

maximum of 20 minutes. If the Aux. Battery Saver+ function activates more than 10 times consecutively when in the automatic mode, the function will stop activating, judg- ing that there is a problem with the auxiliary battery. In this case, drive the vehicle for some period of time or if the auxiliary battery returns to normal, the function will start acti- vating.

The Aux. Battery Saver+ function cannot prevent battery discharge if the auxiliary battery is damaged, worn out, used as a power supply or unauthorized electronic devises are used.

If the Aux. Battery Saver+ function was activated, a message will be dis- played on the instrument cluster and the high voltage battery level may have decreased.

i

i

H55

System Setting

The driver can activate the Aux. Battery Saver+ function by placing the POWER button to the ON posi- tion and by selecting: 'User Settings Other Features Aux. Battery Saver+'

The Aux. Battery Saver+ function deactivates, when the driver cancels the system setting.

LCD Message

This message is displayed when the Aux. Battery Saver+ function has been completed when the vehicle is turned ON. However, if the LCD message pops up frequently, we recommend that your vehicle's auxiliary battery or electric/electronic components be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR ELECTRIC VEHICLE

OAEE046143L

When the function is activating the third Charging Indicator Lamp will blink and high voltage electricity will be flowing in the vehicle. Do not touch the high voltage electric wire (orange), connector, and all electric com- ponents and devices. This may cause electric shock and lead to injuries. Also, do not modify your vehicle in any way. This may affect your vehicle per- formance and lead to an acci- dent.

WARNING

OAEEQ016025OAEE046433L

H56

When a vehicle accident occurs, move the vehicle to a safe place, turn OFF the vehi- cle and remove the auxiliary battery (12 V) terminal to pre- vent high voltage electricity from flowing.

If electric wires are exposed from inside or outside the vehicle, do not touch the wires. Also, do not touch the high voltage electric wire (orange), connector, and all electric components and devices.This may cause electric shock and lead to injuries.

WARNING When a vehicle accident occurs and the high voltage battery is damaged, harmful gas and electrolytes may leak. Be careful not to touch the leaked liquid. When you suspect leakage of inflammable gas and other harmful gases, open the win- dows and evacuate to a safe place. If any leaked fluid comes in contact with your eyes or skin, immediately clean the affected area thor- oughly with tap water or saline solution and have doc- tors inspect it as soon as pos- sible.

WARNING

If a small scale fire occurs, use a fire extinguisher (ABC, BC) that is meant for electrical fires. If it is impossible to extinguish the fire in the early stage, remain a safe distance from the vehicle and immedi- ately call 911. Also, advise them that an electric vehicle is involved. If the fire spreads to the high voltage battery, large amount of water is needed to put out the fire. Using small amount of water or fire extinguishers not meant for electrical fires could cause serious injury or death from electrical shocks.

WARNING If an Accident Occurs

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR ELECTRIC VEHICLE (CONT.)

H57

If you cannot put out the fire immediately, the high voltage battery may explode. Evacuate to a safe place and do not let other people approach the site. Contact the fire department and notify them of an electric vehi- cle fire. If the vehicle is flooded with

water, immediately turn OFF the vehicle and evacuate to a safe place. Contact 911 or an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

If towing is required, lift all four wheels off the ground and tow the vehicle. If you must tow the vehicle using only two wheels, lift the front wheels off the ground and tow the vehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued) If necessary to roll the vehicle so that it can be rolled onto a flatbed tow truck perform the following: - First, depress the brake

pedal and release the park- ing brake.

- While depressing the brake pedal shift to the N (Neutral) position and press the POWER button to turn the vehicle off.

- Wait 3 minutes or more before opening the driver door and the vehicle will remain in ACC mode and in Neutral.

- If the driver door is opened within the 3 minute period, the vehicle will automatically shift to P (Park), the vehicle will turn OFF and the front wheels will be remained locked.

WARNING

OAEE066015

Flatbed Towing

Tires Locked Towing

Dolly Tires Locked Towing

Dolly

H58

Other Precautions for Electric Vehicle When you paint or apply heat treat-

ment to the vehicle as a result of an accident, the performance of the high voltage battery can be reduced. If heat treatment is required, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

When you clean the motor com- partment, do not use high pressure water to wash. This may cause an electric shock due to a discharge in high voltage electricity, or damage the vehicle's electric system.

Do not use, remodel, or install non- genuine parts. This may damage the electric power system.

The high voltage battery cooling duct is located in the bottom center of the rear seats. The cooling duct cools down the high voltage bat- tery. When the high voltage battery cooling duct is blocked, the high voltage battery may be overheat- ed. Do not obstruct the cooling duct with any other objects.

If you tow the vehicle while the front wheels are touching the ground, the vehicle motor may generate electricity and the motor components may be damaged or a fire may occur.

When a vehicle fire occurs due to the battery, there is a risk of a second fire. Contact 911 when towing the vehicle.

WARNING

OAE066019

OAEE036004

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR ELECTRIC VEHICLE (CONT.)

H59

Service Plug

OAEEQ016057

Never touch the service plug in the luggage compartment. <

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Ioniq Hyundai works, you can view and download the Hyundai Ioniq Base 2018 Electric Car Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Hyundai Ioniq as well as other Hyundai manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Hyundai Ioniq. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Hyundai Ioniq Base 2018 Electric Car Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Hyundai Ioniq Base 2018 Electric Car Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Hyundai Ioniq Base 2018 Electric Car Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Hyundai Ioniq Base 2018 Electric Car Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Hyundai Ioniq Base 2018 Electric Car Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.